[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

1. Introduction

Ce chapitre explique les objectifs recherchés par la création de GNU gettext et du Projet de Traduction Libre (ndt free Translation Project). Ensuite il explique quelques concepts généraux autour du Support des Langues Nationales et la position des traductions de message en regard d'autres aspects des variations culturelles telle qu'elles s'appliquent pour les programmes. Il étudie aussi ces fichiers qui transmettent les traductions. Il explique comment les divers outils interagissent dans la génération initiale de ces fichiers et ensuite comment le cycle de maintenance doit normalement prendre place.

Dans ce manuel, nous utilisons le singulier masculin quand nous parlons du programmeur ou du mainteneur, nous utilisons le singulier féminain quand nous parlons du traducteur (ndt, pardon de la traductrice :-) et nous utilisons le pluriel quand nous parlons des installateurs ou des utilisateurs finaux des programmes traduits. Ceci est fait uniquement pour le souci pratique de clarifier la documentation. Il ne s'agit en aucun cas de signifier que certains rôles seraient plus appropriés pour les hommes ou pour les femmes. D'autres parts, comme vous l'aurez peut être déjà deviné, la suite d'utilitaires GNU gettext a pour objectif d'être utile pour toute personne utilisant un ordinateur, quelque soit son sexe, son origine, sa religion ou sa nationalité !

Merci d'envoyer les suggestions ou corrections (ndt en anglais) à :

 
Internet address:
    bug-gnu-gettext@gnu.org

Merci d'inclure le numéro d'édition du manuel et de mise à jour dans vos messages.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

1.1 L'objectif de la suite d'utilitaire GNU gettext

Habituellement, les programmes sont écrits et documentés en anglais et l'anglais est utilisé pour inter-agir avec l'utilisateur au moment de l'exécution.Ceci n'est pas seulement vrai pour les logiciels GNU, mais aussi pour un grand nombre de logiciels libres ou propriétaires. L'utilisation d'un language commun est assez pratique pour la communication entre les développeurs, les mainteneurs de programme et les utilisateurs de tous les pays. Mais d'un autre côté, la plupart des gens sont moins à l'aise avec l'anglais qu'aver leur propre langue maternelle et préfèreraient utiliser leur langue maternelle pour leur travail du jour-le-jour autant que faire ce peut. Beaucoup adoreraient simplement de voir leur écran d'ordinateur montrer un peu moins d'anglais et beaucoup plus de leur propre langue.

Cependant pour beaucoup de personnes ce rêve peut paraître tant hors de portée, qu'elles ne pensent même pas qu'il soit utile de passer du temps à y réfléchir.Elles ne pensent qu'en aucune manière ce rêve puisse un jour se réaliser.Mais cependant quelques unes n'ont pas perdu espoir et se sont organisées.Le projet de traduction (ndt Translation Project) est une formalisation de cet espoir en une structure pour y travailler, qui a une bonne chance de nous rapprocher tous de l'achèvement d'un véritable jeu de programmmes multilingues.

GNU gettext is an important step for the Translation Project, as it is an asset on which we may build many other steps. This package offers to programmers, translators and even users, a well integrated set of tools and documentation. Specifically, the GNU gettext utilities are a set of tools that provides a framework within which other free packages may produce multi-lingual messages. These tools include

GNU gettext est conçu pour minimiser l'impact de l'internationalisation des programmes sources, gardant cet impact aussi discret que possible. L'internationalisation a de meilleures chances de succès si elle reste légère, ou du moins semble l'être quand on regarde les codes sources.

La Projet de Traduction utilise aussi la distribution GNU gettex comme un vecteur pour documenter sa structure et ses méthodes. Ceci va au delà de la stricte technicité de documenté proprement GNU gettext. Ce faisant, les traducteurs trouveront à un endoit unique, autant que possible, tout ce qu'ils doivent savoir pour faire correctement leur tâche de traduction. Bien qu'en fait, cette documentation supplémentaire puisse aussi aider les programmeurs comme les utilisateurs curieux à comprendre comment GNU gettext est lié au reste du Projet de Traduction et d'avoir par conséquent un aperçu de l'image d'ensemble.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

1.2 I18n, L10n et autres

Les longs mots apparaissent sans cesse quand nous parlons des diverses langues dans les programmes et ces mots ont des significations précises, qu'il convient d'expliquer ici une bonne fois pour toutes dans ce documents. Ces mots sont internationalisation et localisation. Beaucoup de personnes, lasses de les écrire et ré-écrire, ont pris l'habitude de les remplacer par i18n et l10n, citant la première la première et la dernière lettre de chacun de ces mots et remplaçant les lettres intermédiaires par un nombre ne vous donnant que le nombre de lettres qu'il devrait y avoir. Mais dans ce manuel, pour plus de clareté, nous écrirons patiemment les noms en entiers à chaque fois…

Par internationalisation, on réfère à l'opération par laquelle un programme, ou un ensemble de programmes groupés un progiciel, tient compte des multiples langues et est capable de les supporter. C'est un procédé de généralisation, par lequel un programme n'est plus contraint d'utiliser des phrases uniquement en anglais ainsi que des habitudes spécifiquement anglaises, mais fait à la place le même chose de manière générique.Les développeurs de programmes peuvent utiliser plusieures techniques pour internationaliser leurs programmes. Quelques unes d'entre elles ont été standardisées. GNU gettext offre l'un de ces standards. Voir la section Le point de vue du programmeur.

Par localisation on signifie l'opération par laquelle, dans un ensemble de programmes déjà internationalisés, on donne au programme toute l'information nécessaire pour qu'il puisse s'adapter pour gérer son entrée et sa sortie d'une façon qui soit correcte pour la langue et les habitudes culturelles choisies. C'est un procédé de particularisation, par lequel des méthodes génériques déjà implémentées dans un programme internationalisé sont utilisées de manières spécifiques. L'environnement de programmation met à disposition du programmeur plusieurs fonctions qui permettent la configuration pendant le temps d'execution. La description formelle d'un jeu d'habitudes culturelles pour quelque pays associés avec toutes les traductions visant une même langue est appelée la localisation pour cette langue ou pays. Les utilisateurs conservent les programmes localisés en définissant avant d'exécuter ces programmes, leur propres valeurs dans des variables d'environnement et en identifiant quelle localisaton doit être utilisée.

En fait le support des messages locaux de localisation n'est qu'un composant des données culturelles qui font un mode particulier. Il y a tout un serveur présentant des routines et de fonctions qui sont mises à disposition pour aider les programmeurs à développer des logiciels internationalisé et qui leur permet d'accéder aux données conservées sous une localisation particulière. Quand quelqu'un fait actuellement référence à une localisation particulière, il fait évidemment référence aux données stockées dans cette localisation particulière. De manière analogue, si un programmeur fait référence à « l'accès aux routines localisées » il fait en fait référence à la suite complète de routines, qui accèdent à toutes les informations de localisation.

On utilise l'expression Support des Langues Nationales ou plutôt SLN pour parler des activités générales ou des fonctionalités qui couvrent l'ensemble internationalisation et localisation, permettant les interactions multilingues dans un programme. En condensé, on pourrait dire que l'internationalisation et l'opération par laquelle les futures localisations sont rendues possibles.

On peut aussi dire de manière très sommaire, que quand il s'agit de message multilingues, l'internationalisation et la plupart du temps pris en charge par les programmeurs et la localisation par les traductrices.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

1.3 Les aspects du Support des Langues Nationales

Pour arriver à une distribution complètement multilingue, il y a beaucoup de choses à traduire qui vont au delà des messages de sortie.

Comme nous l'avons souligné, la traduction n'est qu'un aspect de la localisation. D'autres aspects de l'internationalisation sont les services du système qui sont gérés par GNU libc. Il y a beaucoup d'attributs qui sont requis pour définir les conventions culturelles d'un pays. Ces attributs incluent à côté de la langue nationale du pays, le formattage des dates et des temps, la représentation des nombres, les symboles monétaires etc… Ces règles locales déterminent les paramètres de localisation du pays. Cette localisation représente un connaissance requise pour supporter les attributs nationaux du pays.

Il quelques domaines majeurs, qui peuvent varier selon les pays et qui définissent donc ce que les paramètres de localisation doivent décrire. La liste qui suit aide à metter les messages multilingues dans leur contexte propre et sur d'autres tâches liées à la localisation. Voir le manuel GNU libc pour plus de détails.

Characters and Codesets

Le jeu de codes les plus couramment utilisés aux États Unis d'Amérique etpour la plupart des régions anglophones dans le monde est le jeu de code ASCII. Cependant, il y a beaucoup de caractères requis par différentes localisations qui ne sont pas compris dans ce jeu de code. Le jeu de codes sur 8-bits ISO 8859-1 a la plupart des caractères spéciaux requis pour la plupart des langues européennes. Cependant, dans beaucoup de cas, choisir l'ISO 8859-1 n'est néanmoins pas adéquat : il ne gère même pas la monaie principale de l'Europe. Ainsi chaque localisation devra avoir une routine de gestion des caractères appropriée pour s'en sortir avec le jeu de code.

Monnaie

Le symbole utilisé varie d'un pays à l'autre comme la position utilisée par ce symbole. Les logiciels ont besoin de pouvoir afficher les nombres monétaires de manière transparent dans le mode national de chaque localisation.

Dates

Le format des dates varie entre les différentes localisations. Par exemple, le jour de Noël en 1994 est écrit 12/25/94 aux États Unis d'Amérique et25/12/94 en Australie. D'autres payus peuvent utiliser des dates 8601 etc…

L'heure du jour peut être notée hh:mm, hh.mm ou encore autrement. Certaines localisations requièrent que le temps soit spécifié sur vingt quatre heures plutôt que d'utiliser les matin (ndt AM)et après-midi (ndt PM). D'autre part la nature et la répartition annuelle de la correction d'heure d'été et d'heure d'hivers peut varier beaucoup entre les pays.

Les nombres

Les nombres peut être représentés différemment selon les localisation. Par exemple le nombre suivant sont tous écrits correctement dans leurs localisatons repectives :

 
12,345.67       anglais
12.345,67       allemand
12 345,67       français
1,2345.67       asie

Quelques programme peuvent aller plus loin et utiliser différents systèmes d'unités, comme les unités anglaises ou le système métrique ou encore tenir compte de variantes dans la façon dont les nombres sont épelés en entier.

Messages

Le domaine le plus évident dans une localisation est le support des langues. C'est là que GNU gettext procure le moyen aux développeurs et aux lecteurs de changer facilement la langue qu'utilise le logiciel pour communiquer avec l'utilisateur.

Ces domaines de conventions culurelles sont appelées les catégorie de localisation. C'est un terme assez malheureux ; les aspects de localisation ou les catégories des fonctionalités de localisation seraient de meilleures expressions, car chaque « catégorie de localisation » décrit un domaine ou une tâche qui demande une localisation. La donnée concrète qui décrit les conventions culturelles pour ce domaine et pour une culture particulière est aussi appelée une catégorie de localisation. En ce sens,une localisation est composée de plusieures catégories de localisation : la catégorie de localisation qui décrit le jeu de caractères,la catégorie de localisation qui décrit le formatage des nombre, la catégorie de localisation qui contient les messages traduits et ainsi de suite…

Les composants de la localisation en dehors de la gestion des messages sont standardisés le standard C ISO le standard POSIX:2001 (aussi connu comme la spécificatin SUSV3). La bibliothèque GNU lbc implémente ceci totalement et la plupart des autres systèmes modernes procurent un support plus ou moins raisonable pour au moins une partie des composants manquants.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

1.4 Les fichiers transmettant les traductions

Les lettres PO dans les fichiers ‘.po’ signifient Objet Portable pour les dinstinguer des fichiers ‘.mo’, où MO signifie Object pour la Machine. Ce paradigme comme le format des fichiers PO est inspiré du standard SLN (ndt NLS) développé par Uniform et implémenté la première fois par Sun sur leur système Solaris.

Les fichies PO sont prévus pour être lus et édités par des humains et associent chaque chaîne originale à traduire d'un progiciel donné avec sa traduction dans la langue cible particulière. Un fichier unique PO et dédié à une langue cible particulière. Si un progiciel supporte beaucoup de langues, il n'y aura qu'un fichier PO de ce type par langue supportée et chaque progiciel a son propre jeu de fichiers PO. Ces fichiers PO seront crées préférentiellemnt avec le programme xgettext et par la suite mise à jour ou rajeunis par le programme msmerge. Le programme gettext extrait tous les messages marqués dans un groupe de fichiers C et initie un fichier PO avec des traductions vides. Le programme msmege fait attention d'ajuster les fichiers PO entre les différentes révisions des fichiers sources correspondants, commentant les entrées devenues obsolètes, initialisant les nouvelles et mettant à jour toutes les références des lignes sources. Les fichiers terminant par ‘.pot’ sont des sortes de fichier de traduction de base qui se trouvent dans les distributions sous le format des fichiers PO.

Les fichiers MO sont prévus pour être lus par des programmes et sont de nature binaire. Quelques systèmes offrent déjà des outils pour créer et gérer les fichiers MO comme partie du Support des Langues Nationales venant avec le système, mais le format de ces fichiers MO est souvent différent d'un système à l'autre et est non-portable. Les outils déjà fournis avec ces systèmes ne supportent pas toutes les fonctionalités du programme GNU gettext. C'est pourquoi GNU gettext utilise son propre format pour les fichiers MO. Les fichiers terminant par ‘.gmo’ sont réellement des fichiers MO, quand il est su que ces fichiers sont dans le format GNU.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

1.5 Vue générale de la suite d'utilitaires GNU gettext

Le diagamme suivant synthétise les relations entre les fichiers gérés par GNU gettext et les outils agissant sur ces fichiers. Il est suivi par des explications passablement détaillées, que vous devriez lire en gardant un œil sur ce diagramme. Avoir une compréhension claire de ces interactions aidera sûrement les programmeurs, les traductrices et les mainteneurs.

 
Sources d'origine en C ───> Préparation ───> Sources C marqués ───╮
                                                                  │
              ╭─────────<─── bibliothèque GNU gettext             │
╭─── make <───┤                                                   │
│             ╰─────────<────────────────────┬────────────────────╯
│                                            │
│   ╭─────<─── PACKAGE.pot <─── xgettext <───╯    ╭───<─── PO Compendium
│   │                                             │             ↑
│   │                                             ╰───╮         │
│   ╰───╮                                             ├───> éditeur PO ───╮
│       ├────> msgmerge ──────> LANG.po ────>──── ────╯                   │
│   ╭───╯                                                                 │
│   │                                                                     │
│   ╰─────────────<───────────────╮                                       │
│                                 ├─── nouveau LANG.po <──────────────────╯
│   ╭─── LANG.gmo <─── msgfmt <───╯
│   │
│   ╰───> install ───> /.../LANG/PACKAGE.mo ───╮
│                                              ├───> "Bonjour le monde !"
╰───────> install ───> /.../bin/PROGRAM ───────╯

Pour le programmeur, la première étape pour amener GNU gettext dans votre progiciel est d'identifer, déjà depuis le fichier source en C, ces chaînes qui sont prévues pour être traduites et celles qui ne le seront pas. Ce travail fastidieux peut être fait de manière un peu plus confortable en utilisant le mode PO d'Emacs, mais vous pouvez utiliser tous les moyens qui vous sont familliers pour modifier les fichiers sources en C. À côté de ceci, quelques autres changements simples et standards sont requis pour initialiser proprement la bibliotèque de traduction.@xref{Sources},pour plus d'information sur tout ceci.

Pour le nouveaux logiciels en développement, bien sûr les chaînes peuvent et devraient être marquées pendant qu'on l'écrit. L'approche de gettext rend ceci très facile. Il suffit de mettre les lignes suivantes au début de chaque fichier ou dans un fichier d'en-tête centralisé.

 
#define _(Chaîne) (Chaîne)
#define N_(Chaîne) Chaîne
#define textdomain(Domaine)
#define bindtextdomain(Progiciel, Répertoire)

Faire ainsi vous permet de préparer les sources pour l'internationalisation. Plus tard, quand vous vous senterez prêt pour utiliser la bibliothèque gettext remplacez simplement ces définitions par :

 
#include <libintl.h>
#define _(Chaîne) gettext (Chaîne)
#define gettext_noop(Chaîne) Chaîne
#define N_(Chaîne) gettext_noop (Chaîne)

et liez de nouveau avec ‘libintl.a’ ou ‘libintl.so’. Notez que sur les systèmes GNU, nous n'avez pas besoin de lier à libintl car les fonctions de la bibliothèque gettext sont déjà contenues dans la bibliothèque GNU libc. C'est tout ce que vous avez à changer.

Une fois que les sources C ont été modifiées, le programme xgettext est utilisé pour trouver et extraire toutes les chaînes à traduire et crée un fichier PO de référence avec tout ceci. Ce fichier ‘progiciel.pot’ contient toutes les chaînes originales du programme.Il conserve un jeu de pointeurs désignant exactement où chacune des chaînes est utilisées dans le source C. Chaque traduction est vide. La lettre t dans le .pot indique qu'il s'agit d'un fichier PO modèle, pas encore orienté vers une langue particulière. Voir la section Invocation le programme msginit, pour plus de détails sur comment on appelle le programme xgettext. Si vous être vraiment flémard, vous serez peut être intéressé de travailler beaucoup plus directement et de préparer la définition de la distribution complète (@pxref{mainteneurs}).En faisant ainsi, vous vous économisez de taper les commandes xgettext car make devrait générer maintenant les choses correctement et automatiquement pour vous !

Néanmoins, la première fois il n'y a pas encore de ‘lan.po’, donc l'étape msmerge peut être sautée et remplacée par seulement une copie de ‘package.pot’ vers ‘lang.po’, où lang représente la langue voulue. Voir @ref{création}< pour les détails.

Vient ensuite la traduction initiales des messages. La traduction par elle même est un sujet complet, uniquement dédiée aux humains, et dont la complexité dépasse largement le niveau de ce manuel. Néanmoins, quelques conseils sont donnés dans d'autres chapitres de ce manuel (@pxref{traducteurs}). Vous trouverez aussi ici des indications sur la façon de contacter les équipes de traduction, ou sur la façon d'en devenir membre pour partager vos soucis de traduction avec d'autres traducteurs qui traduisent vers la même langue nationale que vous.

Quand vous ajoutez un message traduit dans un fichier PO ‘lang.po’, si vous n'utilisez pas un éditeur de fichiers PO dédié (@pxref{édition}), vous devez vous en remettre à vous seul pour que votre effort respecte complètement le format des fichiers PO et les conventions de cotations (@pxref{fichiers PO}). Ce n'est sûrement pas une tâche impossible, car c'est ainsi que beaucoup de personnes ont gérés les fichiers PO autour des années 1995. D'un autre côté, en utilisant un éditeur de fichier PO, la plupart des détails du format des fichiers PO sont traités pour vous, mais vous devez acquérir quelques familiarités avec l'éditeur de fichier PO lui même.

Si quelques traductions communes ont déjà été sauvegardées dans un fichier PO compendium, les traductrices peuvent utiliser le mode PO pour intialiser les entrées non traduites du compendium et aussi d'avoir une sélection de traductions dans la mise à jour du compendium (@pxref{compendium}). Les fichiers compendium ont pour objectif d'être échangés entre les membres d'une équipe de traduction donnée.

Les programmes ou les progiciels sont par nature dynamiques : les utilisateurs écrivent des rapports de bogues et des suggestions d'amélioration, les mainteneurs réagissent en modifiant les programmes de manières diverses. Le fait qu'un progiciel ait déjà été internationalisé ne devrait pas rendre le mainteneur timoré pour ajouter de nouvelles chaînes ou modifier celles qui ont déjà été traduites. Ils font juste leur travail le mieux qu'ils peuvent. Pour que le Projet de Traduction puisse fonctionner sans heurt, il est important que les mainteneurs n'aient pas à porter sur leurs épaules, déjà bien chargées, les préoccupations de traduction et que les traductrices soient aussi libre que possible des préoccupations de programmation.

La seule préoccupation que les mainteneurs devraient avoir est de marquer consciencieusement les nouvelles chaînes comme traduisibles quand elles le doivent sans se préoccuper ensuite si elles sont ou non traduite, ce qui viendra en temps utile. En conséquence, quand les programmes et leurs chaînes sont ajustés de différentes façons par les mainteneurs et pour des sujets qui n'ont la plupart du temps aucune relation avec la traduction, xgettext construira les fichiers ‘package.pot’ qui évoluent au cours du temps, quand les traductions faites par ‘lang.po’ deviennent progressivement obsolètes.

Il est important pour les traductrices (et même les mainteneurs) de comprendre que la traduction des progiciels un processus continu dans la durée de vie d'un progiciel et non pas quelque chose qui est fait une fois pour toute au début.Après l'explosion initiale de l'activité de traduction pour un progiciel donné, des interventions sont nécessaires de temps en temps, car par ci par là, les entrées traduites deviennent obsolètes et de nouvelles entrées non-traduites apparaissent et qui ont besoin de traduction.

Le programme msmerge a pour objectif de rafraîchir un fichier ‘lang.po’ déjà existant en le comparant avec un nouveau fichier modèle ‘package.pot’ extrait par xgettext du source C récent. L'opération de rafraîchissement ajuste toutes les références aux positions des chaines dans les fichiers sources C, car ces chaînes bougent quand les programmes sont changés. msgmerge commente aussi comme obsolète dans le fichier ‘lang.po’, ces entrées déjà traduites qui ne sont plus utilisées dans les sources du programme (@pxref{entrées obsolètes}). Il découvre finalement de nouvelles chaînes et les insèrent dans le fichier PO résultant comme des entrées non traduites (@pxref{entrées non traduites}). @xref{invocation de msgmerge}, pour avoir plus d'informations sur ce que msgmerge fait réellement.

Quelque soit la route ou moyens pris, la but est d'obtenir un fichier ‘lang.po’ mise à jour donnant des traductions pour toutes les chaînes.

La mobilité temporelle, ou fluidité, des fichiers PO est une part intégrale du jeu de traduction et doit être bien comprise et acceptée. Les personnes qui y resistent auront du mal à participer à un Projet de Traduction ou donneront du mou à retordre aux autres participants ! En particulier, les mainteneurs devraient rester souples et inclure dans distriutions tous les fichiers PO officiels disponibles, même s'ils ne n'ont pas été mis à jour récemment et ne pas exercer de pression sur les équipes de traduction pour obtenir un travail achevé. La pression devrait plutôt venir de la communauté des utilisateurs parlant une langue particulière et les mainteneurs devraient se considérer eux mêmes plutot déchargés de tous soucis sur l'adéquation des fichiers de traduction. D'un autre côté, les traducteurs devraient essayer de mettre à jour raisonnablement les fichiers PO dont ils sont responsables, quand le progiciel est en train d'être pré-testé, avant une distribution officielle.

Une fois qu'un fichier PO est complet et fiable, le programme msgfmt est utilisé pour traduire le fichier PO en un format oritenté machine, qui peut permettre de récupérer les traductions d'un programme, à chaque fois que c'est demandé pendant l'exécution (@pxref{MO Files}). @ref{msgfmt Invocation}, pour plus d'information sur tous les modes d'exécution du programme msgfmt.

Finalement les sources C modifiés et marqués sont compilés et liés avec la bibliothèque GNU gettext, habituellement par la commande make en supposant qu'un ‘Makefile’ adéquat existe pour le projet. Les fichiers exécutables résultants sont installés à un endroit ou les utilisateurs vont les trouver. Les fichiers MO eux mêmes doivent être installés correctement. En supposant que les variables d'environnement sont définies (@pxref{définir la localisation POSIX}), le programme devrait se localiser de lui même automatiquement, à chaque fois qu'il s'exécute.

La suite de ce manuel a pour objet l'explication en profondeur des différentes étapes que nous avons décrites ci dessus.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

2. Le point de vue de l'utilisateur

De nos jours, quand les utilisateurs démarrent leur session sur un ordinateur, ils trouvent habituellement que tous leur programmes envoient des messages dans leur langue nationale — au moins pour les utilisateurs dont les langues ont une communauté active pour les logiciels libres, comme les français ou les allemands et dans une moindre mesure, des langues avec une plus faible participation dans les logiciels libres et le projet GNU, comme l'hindi et le philipin.

Comment cela fonctionne ? Commet l'utilisateur peut-il influencer la langue qui est utilisée par les programmes ? Ce chapitre va y répondre.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

2.1 Installation du système d'exploitation

La langue par défaut est souvent déjà spécifiée pendant l'installation du système d'exloitation. Quand le système d'exploitation est installé, le programme d'installation demande habituellement la langue à utiliser pour le processus d'installation lui même et séparément, pour la langue à utiliser sur le système installé. Quelques programmes d'installation ne demande la langue qu'une seule fois.

Ceci détermine la langue par défaut sur tout le système pour tous les utilisateurs.Mais les installateurs donnent souvent la possibilité d'installer des localisationset langues additionnelles. Par exemple, les localisations sur KDE (l'environnementde bureau K) ou sur OpenOffice.org sont souvent empaquettés séparément comme unpaquatage installable par langue.

À ce point, est il est bon de considérer l'utilisaton voulue de la machine : si c'est une machine à vocation d'utilisation personnelle, les localisations additionnelles ne sont sûrement pas nécessaires. Par contre si la machine doit être utilisée dans une organisation ou une entreprise qui a des relations internationales, on peut alors prendre en compte le besoin d'utilisateurs hôtes. Si vous avez un hôte venant de l'étranger pour une semaine, quelles seraient ses localisatons préférées ? Cela peut valoir le coup d'installer ces localisations additonnelles en avance, car elles ne coûtent qu'un peu d'espace disque à cette étape.

La langue par défaut de tout le système et la configuration locale, qui estutilisée quant un compte utilisateur est crée. Mais l'utilisateur peut avoirses propres configurations de localisation, qui sont différentes de cellesd'autres utilisateurs sur la même machine. Il peut le spécifier, typquementaprès sa prémière connexion sur le système, comme décrit dans la section suivante.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

2.2 Régler la localisation utilisée par les programmes avec interface utilisateur graphique

Les programmes immédiatement disponibles sur le bureau de l'utilisateur formentun groupe de programmes appelé « environnement du bureau » ; il inclue habituellementle gestionnaire de fenêtres, un navigateur internet, un éditeur de texte et plus… Les environnements de bureau libres les plus communs sont KDE, GNOME et XFce.

La localisation utilisée par un programme avec interface utilisateur graphique (IUG)sur une environnement de bureau peut être spécifié par un écran de configurationappelé « centre de contrôle », « réglage de la langue » ou « réglage du pays ».

Les programmes IUG individuels, qui ne font pas partie de l'environnement de bureau, peuvent avoir leur propre localisation spécifiée soit dans le panneau de contrôle, soit dans les variables d'environnement.

Pour quelques programmes, il est possible de définir la localisation à traversdes variables d'environnement, parfois même avec une autre localisation que celledu bureau lui même. Ceci signifie que vous pouvez démarrer ce programme depuis laligne de commande, après avoir défini quelques variables d'environnement à laplace de démarrer le programme par un menu ou par le système de gestion de fichiers.Les variables d'environnement peuvent être celles qui sont spécifiées dans la sectionsuivante (@ref{définir la localisation POSIX}); cependant pour quelques versions de KDE, la localisation est définie par la variable KDE_LANG plutôt que LANG ouLC_ALL.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

2.3 Définir la localisation par les variables d'environnement

Comme utilisateur, si votre langue a été installée pour ce progiciel, dans le cas le plus simple, vous n'avez qu'à définir la variable d'environnement LANG sur la combinaison appropriée de ‘ll_CC’. Par exemple, supposons que vous parliez allemand et viviez en Allemagne. À l'invite du Shell, exécutez simplement ‘setenv LANG de_DE’ (dans csh), ‘export LANG; LANG=de_DE’ (dans sh)ou ‘export LANG=de_DE’ (dans bash). Ceci peut être fait dans votre fichier ‘.login’ ou ‘.profile’ une bonne fois pour toutes.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

2.3.1 Noms de localisations

Un nom de localisation a habituellement la forme ‘ll_CC’. Ici ‘ll’ est code à deux lettres donnant la langue selon la normeISO 639 et ‘CC’ est la code à deux lettres donnant le pays selon la norme ISO 3166. Par exemple, pour l'allemand en allemagne, ll est de et CC est DE. Vous trouverez une liste de codes de langues dans l'appendice @ref{codes des langues} et la liste des codes des pays dans l'appendice @ref{codes des pays}.

Vous pourriez penser que la spécifications des codes des pays est redondante.Mais en fait, certaines langues ont des dialectes selon les pays. Par exemple, ‘de_AT’ est utilisé pour l'Autriche et ‘pt_BR’ pour le Brésil.Le code du pays permet de distinguer ces différences.

Beaucoup de noms de localisation ont une syntaxe étendue ‘ll_CC.encoding’ qui spécifie aussi l'encodage des caractères. Ceci est utilisé car entre 2000 et 2005, la plupart des utilisateurs sont passés aux localisations avec un encodage UTF-8. Par exemple, la localisation allemande sur les systèmes glibc est maintenant ‘de_DE.UTF-8’. L'ancien nom ‘de_DE’ refère toujours à la localisation allemande comme en 2000, qui sauvegardait les caractères dans l'encodage ISO-8859-1, un encodage de texte qui ne peut même pas accomoder le signe monétaire de l'Euro.

Quelques noms de localisation utilise ‘ll_CC.@variante’ à la place de ‘ll_CC’. La ‘@variante’ peut signifier n'importe quelle caractéristique qui n'est pas déjà impliquée par la langue ll et le pays CC. Ceci peut indiquer une unité monétaire particulière. Par exemple sur les systèmes glibc, ‘de_DE@euro’ signifie une localisation qui utilise la monaie Euro, en contraste avec l'ancienne localisation ‘de_DE’ qui implique l'utilisation de l'ancienne monnaie d'avant 2002. Ceci peut aussi signifier un dialecte de la langue ou un type d'écriture utilisé pour écrire le texte (par exemple, ‘sr_RS@latin’ utilise l'écriture latine, alors que ‘sr_RS’ utilise l'écriture cyrillique pour écrire le serbe) ou encore des règles orthographiques ou tout autre chose similaire.

Sur d'autres systèmes, quelques variations de ce schéma sont utilisées, comme ‘ll’. Vous pouvez obtenir la liste des localisationssupportées par votre système pour votre langue en lançant la commande‘locale -a | grep '^ll'’.

Il y a aussi une localisation spéciale, appelée ‘C’. Quand elle est utilisée, elle desactive toutes les localisations : dans cette localisation, tous les programmes standardisés par POSIX utilisent des messages en anglais et un encodage de caractères non spécifié (souvent US-ASCII, mais quelque fois aussi ISO-8859-1 ou UTF-8, selon le système d'exploitation).


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

2.3.2 Variables d'envrionnement pour la localisation

A locale is composed of several locale categories, see @ref{Aspects}. When a program looks up locale dependent values, it does this according to the following environment variables, in priority order:

  1. LANGUAGE
  2. LC_ALL
  3. LC_xxx, selon la catégorie locale sélectionnée : LC_CTYPE, LC_NUMERIC, LC_TIME, LC_COLLATE, LC_MONETARY, LC_MESSAGES, ...
  4. LANG

Les variables dont les valeurs sont définies, mais vides, sont ignorées dans cet aperçu.

LANG est la variable d'environnement normale pour spécifier une localisation.Comme utilisateur, vous réglez normalement cette variable (sauf si d'autres variables ont déjà été réglées par le système, dans ‘/etc/profile’ ou des fichiers d'initialisation similaires).

LC_CTYPE, LC_NUMERIC, LC_TIME, LC_COLLATE, LC_MONETARY, LC_MESSAGES, etc… sont les variables d'environnement prévues pour remplacer LANG et affecter une catégorie locale unique. Par exemple, supposons que vous êtes un utilisateur Suédois en Espagne et que vous voulez voulez que vos programmes gèrent les nombres et les dates selon les conventions espagnoles et seulement les messages devraient utiliser le Suédois. Alors vous pourriez créer une localisation nommée ‘sv_ES’ ou ‘sv_ES.UTF-8’ en utilisant le programme localedef. Mais il est plus simple et cela donne le même effet de définir la variable LANG à es_ES.UTF-8 et la variable LC_MESSAGES à sv_SE.UTF-8; ces deux localisations arrivent pré-installées avec le système d'explotation.

LC_ALL est la variable d'environnement qui les remplace toutes. C'est habituellement utilisé dans les scripts qui lancent des programmes particuliers.Par exemple, le script configure généré par GNU autoconf utilise LC_ALL pour s'assurer que les tests de configuration n'opèreront en dépendant de la localisation.

Malheureusement quelques systèmes définissent LC_ALL dans le fichier ‘/etc/profile’ ou dans des fichiers d'initialisation similaires. Comme utilisateurs, vous devez donc ré-intialiser cette variable si vous voulez régler LANG et optionnellement quelques unes des autres variables LC_xxx.

La variable LANGUAGE est décrite dans la prochaine sous section.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

2.3.3 Spécification d'une liste de priorité des langues

Tous les programmes n'ont pas de traduction pour toutes les langues. Par défaut, un message en anglais est montré à la place des traductions non-existante. Si vous comprenez les autres langues, vous pouvez définir un liste de priorité des langues. Ceci est fait à travers différentes variables d'environnement appelées LANGUAGE. GNU gettext donne la préférence à LANGUAGE sur LC_ALL et LANG pour la gestion des messages, mais vous avez toujours besoin d'avoir LANG (or LC_ALL) réglée sur la première langue ; ceci est requis par les autres parties des bibliothèques systèmes.Par exemple, des utilisateurs suédois liraient plutôt des traductions en allemand qu'en anglais quand le suédois n'est pas disponible, ils définiraient alors LANGUAGE à ‘sv:de’ en laissant LANG sur ‘sv_SE’.

Conseil spécifique pour les utilisateurs norvégiens : le code linguistique pour le glyphe norvégien bokmål à changé de ‘no’ à ‘nb’ récemment (en 2003).Pendant cette période de transition, alors que certains catalogues de message pour cette langue ont été installé avec ‘nb’ et d'autres plus anciens sous ‘no’, il est recommandé pour les utilisateurs norvégiens de définir LANGUAGE à ‘nb:no’ de telle façon que les nouvelles et les anciennes traductions soient utilisées.

Dans la variable d'environnement LANGUAGE, mais pas dans les autres variables d'environnement, les combinaisons ‘ll_CC’ peuvent être abrégées en ‘ll’ en signifiant le dialecte principale de la langue. Par exemple, ‘de’ est équivalent à ‘de_DE’ (L'allemand comme parlé en Allemagne) et ‘pt’ pour ‘pt_PT’ (le portugais comme parlé au Portugal) dans ce contexte.

Note : la variable LANGUAGE est ignorée si la localisation est réglée à ‘C’.En d'autres termes, vous devez d'abord activer la localisation en définissant LANG (ou LC_ALL) à une valeur différente de ‘C’, avant de pouvoir utiliser une liste de priorité des langues à travers la variable LANGUAGE.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

2.4 Installing Translations for Particular Programs

Les langues ne sont pas supportées de manières égales dans tous les progiciels utilisant gettext et plus de traductions sont ajoutées au cours du temps.Habituellement, vous utilisez les traductions qui sont livrées avec le système d'exploitation ou avec des progiciels particuliers que vous avez installés par après. Mais vous pouvez aussi installer de nouvelles localisations directement.Pour faire ceci, vous aurez besoin de comprendre où sont stockés chaque fichier de localisation sur le système d'exploitation.

Pour les programmes qui participent au Projet de Traduction, vous pouvezcommencer à chercher des traductions ici :http://translationproject.org/team/index.html. Un extrait de cette information peut aussi être trouvé dans le fichier ‘ABOUT-NLS’ qui est livré avec GNU gettext.

Pour les programmes qui font partie du projet KDE, le point de départ est :http://i18n.kde.org/.

Pour les programmes qui font partie du projet GNOME, le point de départ est :http://www.gnome.org/i18n/.

Pour les autres programmes, vous pouvez vérifier si le paquet du code source du programme contient quelques fichiers ‘ll.po’; souvent, ils sont gardés ensemble dans un répertoire appelé ‘po/’. Chaque fichier ‘ll.po’ contient les traductions de messages pour la langue dont l'abréviation est ll.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

3. Le format des fichiers PO.

La suite d'outils GNU gettext aide les programmeurs et les traductrices pour produire, mettre à jour et utiliser les fichiers de traduction, principalement les fichiers PO, qui sont des fichiers textuels et éditables. Ce chapitre explique le format des fichiers PO.

Un fichier PO est fait de beaucoup d'entrées, chacune d'entre elle gardant une relation entre une chaîne originale non traduite et sa traduction correspondante.Chaque entrée d'un fichier PO font normalement partie d'un seul projet et toutes les traductions sont exprimées dans une seule langue cible. Un entrée d'un fichier PO a la structure schématique suivante :

 
white-space
#  translator-comments
#. extracted-comments
#: reference…
#, flag…
#| msgid previous-untranslated-string
msgid untranslated-string
msgstr translated-string

La structure générale d'un fichier PO devrait être bien comprise par la traductrice. En utilisant le mode PO, peu de choses doivent être sûes sur les détails du format, car le mode PO fait attention à eux pour elle.

Un entrée simple peut ressembler à ceci :

 
#: lib/error.c:116
msgid "Unknown system error"
msgstr "Error desconegut del sistema"

Les entrées débutent par quelques espaces blancs optionnels. Habituellement, quand la génération est faite par les outils GNU gettext, il y a exactement une ligne blanche entre les entrées. Ensuite suivent les commentaires, sur des lignes qui commencent toutes par le caractère #. Il y a deux sortes de commentaires : ceux qui ont des espaces blancs suivant immédiatement le # -les commentaires de la traductrice - et qui sont des commentaires crées et maintenus exclusivement par la traductrice et ceux qui ont des caractères non-blancs suivant immédiatement le # — les commentaires automatiques — et qui sont des commentaires crées et maintenus automatiquement par les outils GNU gettext. Les lignes de commentaires débutant par #. contiennent des commentaires donnés par le programmeur, dirigés vers la traductrice ; ces commentaires sont appelés commentaires extraits car le programme gettext les extrait du code source du programme. Les lignes de commentaires débuttant avec #: contiennent des références au code source du programme. Les lignes de commentaires débutant par #, contiennent des marques ; on en dira plus plus loin. Les lignes de commentaires débutant par #| contiennent les chaînes précédemment non traduites pour lesquelles la traductrice a donné une traduction.

Tous les commentaires, de quelque sortes qu'ils soient, sont optionnels.

les entrées montrent deux chaînes, nommément la première donne la chaîne non traduite telle qu'elle apparaît dans le source original du programme et ensuite la traduction de cette chaîne.La chaîne originale est introduite par le mot clé msgid et la traduction par msgstr. Les deux chaînes, la non-traduite et la traduite, sont entre guillemets de différentes façons dans le fichier PO, en utilisant les délimiteurs \" et les échappements \\, mais le traducteur n'a pas vraiment à faire attention pour préciser la forme du format des guillemets car le mode PO les gère pour elle.

Les chaînes msgid, comme les commentaires automatique, sont produits et gérés par les autres outils GNU gettext et le mode PO ne donne pas de moyens à la traductrice pour les altérer. Tout ce qu'elle peut faire est simplement de les effacer et seulement en enlevant l'entrée entière. D'un autre côté, la chaîne msgstr, comme les commentaires de la traductrice, sont vraiment pour la traductrice et le mode PO lui donne le contrôle dont elle a besoin.

Les lignes de commentaires débutant par #, sont spéciales car elles ne sont pas complètement ignorées par le programme comme le sont généralement les commentaires. La liste séparée par des virgules des marques est utilisée par le programme msgfmt pour donner à l'utilisateur des messages de diagnostiques améliorés. Il y a couramment deux formes de marques définies :

fuzzy

msgmerge ou peut être inséré par la traductrice elle même. Il montre que la chaîne msgstr peut ne pas être une traduction correcte (ne plus l'être). Seule la traductrice peut juger si une traduction nécessitera d'autres modifications ou si elle est acceptable. Une fois satisfaite avec la traduction, elle peut enlever cet attribut fuzzy. Le programme msgmerge insère ceci quand il combine les entrées msgid et msgstr seulement après une recherche floue (ndt fuzzy). @xref{entrées floues -ndt fuzzy}.

c-format
no-c-format

par un humain. À la place, seul le programme xgettext les ajoute. Avec un système automatisé de traitement des fichiers PO, comme proposé ici, les changements de l'utilisateur seront rejettés dès que le programme xgettext génèrera un nouveau fichier modèle.

La marque c-format dit que la chaînes non-traduite et la traduction sont supposées être des chaînes en format C. La marque no-c-format dit qu'elles ne sont pas des chaînes en format C, même s'il s'avère que la chaîne non-traduite ressemble à une chaîne en format C (avec des directives ‘%’).

Au cas où la marque c-format est donné pour une chaîne le programme msgfmt fera d'autres tests pour vérifier la validité de la traduction. @xref{invocation de msgfmt}, @ref{marque c-format} et Format des chaînes en C.

format objc
no-objc-format

De façon identique pour Objective C, voir @ref{format-objc}.

format Shell
no-sh-format

@ref{format-sh}.

format python
no-python-format

De façon identique pour Python, voir @ref{format-python}.

format Lisp
no-lisp-format

@ref{format-lisp}.

format ELisp
no-elisp-format

De façon identique pour Emacs Lisp, voir @ref{format-elisp}.

format librep
no-librep-format

De façon identique pour librep, voir @ref{format-librep}.

format scheme
no-scheme-format

De façon identique pour Scheme, voir @ref{format-scheme}.

format smalltalk
no-smalltalk-format

De façon identique pour Smalltalk, voir @ref{format-smalltalk}.

format java
no-java-format

De façon identique pour Java, voir @ref{format-java}.

format csharp
no-csharp-format

De façon identique pour C#, voir @ref{format-csharp}.

format awk
no-awk-format

De façon identiquer pour awk, voir @ref{format-awk}.

format object pascal
no-object-pascal-format

De façon identique pour Object Pascal, voir @ref{format-object-pascal}.

format ycp
no-ycp-format

De façon identique pour YCP, voir @ref{format-ycp}.

format tcl
no-tcl-format

De façon identique Tcl, voir @ref{format-tcl}.

format perl
no-perl-format

DE façon identique pour Perl, voir @ref{format-perl}.

perl-brace-format
no-perl-brace-format

De façon identique pour les parenthèses Perl, voir @ref{format-perl}.

format php
no-php-format

De façon identique pour PHP, voir @ref{format-php}.

format interne de gcc
no-gcc-internal-format

De façon identique pour les sources GCC, voir @ref{format-interne-gcc}.

format qt
no-qt-format

De façon identique pour Qt, voir @ref{format-qt}.

format kde
no-kde-format

De façon identique pour KDE, voir @ref{format-kde}.

format boost
no-boost-format

De façon identique pour Boost, voir @ref{format-boost}.

Il est aussi possible d'avoir des entrées avec un spécificateur du contexte. Ellesressemblent à ceci :

 
white-space
#  commentaire-traductrice
#. commentaires-extraits
#: référence…
#, marque…
#| msgctxt context-précédent
#| msgid chaîne-non-traduite-précédente
msgctxt contexte
msgid chaîne-non-traduite
msgstr chaîne-traduite

Le contexte sert à lever les ambiguïtés des messages avec la même chaîne non-traduite. Il est possible d'avoir plusieurs entrées avec la même chaîne non-traduite dans un fichier PO, en supposant qu'elles ont chacune un contexte différent. Notez qu'une chaîne vide de contexte et que l'absence d'une ligne msgctxt ne signifient pas la même chose.

Une forme différente d'entrées est utilisée pour les traductions qui impliquent des formes plurielles.

 
white-space
#  translator-comments
#. extracted-comments
#: reference…
#, flag…
#| msgid previous-untranslated-string-singular
#| msgid_plural previous-untranslated-string-plural
msgid untranslated-string-singular
msgid_plural untranslated-string-plural
msgstr[0] translated-string-case-0
...
msgstr[N] translated-string-case-n

Une telle entrée ressemble à ceci :

 
#: src/msgcmp.c:338 src/po-lex.c:699
#, c-format
msgid "found %d fatal error"
msgid_plural "found %d fatal errors"
msgstr[0] "s'ha trobat %d error fatal"
msgstr[1] "s'han trobat %d errors fatals"

Ici aussi, un contexte msgctxt peut être spécifié avant msgid comme vu plus haut.

La chaîne non-traduite (ndt previous-untranslated-string)peut éventuellement être insérée par le programme msgmerge en même temps qu'il marque une traduction fuzzy (-ndt floue). Cela aide la traductrice à voir quels ont été les changements qui ont été faits par les développeurs sur la chaîne non-traduite.

Il arrive que certaines lignes, habituellement des espaces blanc ou des commentaires suivent la dernière entrée d'un fichier PO. De telles lignes ne font partie d'aucune entrée et seront rejetées quand le fichier PO sera traité par les outils, ou cela pourrait aussi déranger certains éditeurs de fichiers PO.

Le reste de cette section peut être sauté sans risque pour ceux qui utilisent un éditeur de fichier PO, bien qu'elle puisse être intéressante pour toute personne désireuse d'avoir une meilleure idée du format précis d'un fichier PO.Par contre les personnes désirant modifier des fichiers PO à la main devraient continuer de lire avec attention.

Chacune des chaînes non-traduites et des chaînes traduites respectent la syntaxe C pour les chaînes de caractères, incluant les guillemets encadrantes et les séquences d'échappement par barres obliques inversées incorporées. Quand il faut écrire des chaînes à lignes multiples, on ne devrait pas utiliser les nouvelles lignés échappées. À la place, des guillemets fermantes devraient suivre le dernier caractère sur la ligne à continuer et des guillemets ouvrantes devraient reprendre la chaîne au début de la prochaine ligne du fichier PO. Par exemple :

 
msgid ""
"Here is an example of how one might continue a very long string\n"
"for the common case the string represents multi-line output.\n"

Dans cet exemple, la chaîne vide est utilisée sur la première ligne pour permettre un meilleur alignement du I du mot ‘Ici’ sur le p du mot ‘pour’. Dans cet exemple, le mot clé msgid est suivi de trois chaînes, qui doivent être concaténées. La concaténation de la ligne vide ne change pas la chaîne générale résultante , mais c'est un moyen pour nous de satisfaire la nécessité pour msgid d'être suivi par une chaîne sur la même ligne, tout en conservant la présentation sur plusieurs lignes justifiées à gauche car nous trouvons que c'est une disposition plus claire. La chaîne vide aurait pu être omise, mais seulement si la chaîne débutant par ‘Ici’ aurait été promue sur la première ligne, juste après msgid.(2) Il n'était pas vraiment nécessaire de changer entre les deux dernières chaînes entre guillemets, immédiatement après la nouvelle ligne ‘\\n’, le changement aurait pu avoir lieu après n'importe quel autre caractère, nous l'avons juste fait de cette façon pour être plus propre.

On devrait distinguer avec soin entre des fins de ligne marquées par ‘\\nà l'intérieur des guillemets, qui font parties de la chaîne représentée,et les fins de lignes dans le fichier PO lui même, à l'extérieur des guillemets,qui n'ont aucune incidence sur la chaîne représentée.

À l'extérieur des chaînes, les lignes blanches et les commentaires peuvent être utilisées librement. Les commentaires commence au début d'une ligne avec un ‘#’ et s'étendent jusqu'à la fin de ligne du fichier PO. Les commentaires qui sont écrits par les traductrices devraient avoir le signe ‘#’ initial suivi immédiatement par quelques espaces blancs. Si le ‘#’ n'est pas immédiatement suivi par un espace blanc, ce commentaire a vraisemblablement été généré et géré par les outils GNU spécialisés et peut disparaître ou être remplacé de manière impromptue quand le fichier PO est donné à msgmerge.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

4. La préparation des fichiers source d'un programme.

Pour le programmeur, les changements dans le source C peuvent être classés en trois catégories. Premièrement, vous devez porter à la connaissance de tous les modules ayant besoin de traduction de messages les fonctions de localisation.Deuxièmement, vous devriez activer activer correctement les opérations de GNU gettext quand le programmes n'initialise, habituellement avec par la fonction main. Enfin, vous devriez identifier, ajuster et marquer toutes les chaînes constantes qui auront besoin de traduction dans votre programme.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

4.1 Importation de la déclarations de gettext

Dans l'hypothèse que votre ensemble de programmes, ou progiciels, ont été ajustés de telle façon que tous les fichiers GNU gettext sont disponibles et que vos fichiers ‘Makefile’ sont ajusté (@pxref{mainteneurs}), chaque module C qui a des chaînes traduites en C devraient avoir la ligne :

 
#include <libintl.h>

De manière similaire, chaque module C contenant des appels printf()/fprintf()/...avec des chaînes formatées qui pourraient être traduites en chaîne C (même si les chaînes C viennent d'un module différent) devraient contenir la ligne :

 
#include <libintl.h>

[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

4.2 Sollicitation des operations de gettext

L'initialisation des données locales devraient être faite avec à peu prêt le même code dans chaque programme, comme démontré plus bas :

 
int
main (int argc, char *argv[])
{
 …
 setlocale (LC_ALL, \"\");
 bindtextdomain (PACKAGE, LOCALEDIR);
 textdomain (PACKAGE);
 …
}

PACKAGE et LOCALEDIR devraient être fournies soit par ‘config.h’ soit par la Makefile. Pour le moment, consultez les sources de gettext ou de hello pour plus d'informations.

L'utilisation de LC_ALL peut ne pas être approprié pour vous. LC_ALL inclut toutes les catégories locales et spécialement LC_CTYPE. Cette dernière catégorie est responsable de la détermination des classes de caractères avec isalnum etc… les fonctions de ‘ctype.h’, qui pourraient être non adéquates, spécifiquement pour les programme, qui traitent des sortes d'entrée pour les langues. Par exemple, ceci voudrait dire qu'un code source utilisant le ç (le caractère c-cédille) peut fonctionner en France mais pas aux États-Unis.

Quelques systèmes d'exploitation ont aussi des problèmes avec la reconnaissance syntaxique des chiffres qui utilise la fonction scanf si une autre catégorie que LC_ALL est utilisée. Les standards disent que des formats additionnels excepté celui en local \"C\" peuvent être reconnus. Mais certains systèmes semblent rejeter les nombres qui sont dans le format locale \"C\". Dans certaines situations, il peut aussi y avoir un problème avec la notation elle même, qui rend impossible de savoir reconnaître si le nombre dans la locale \"C\" ou dans le format local. Ceci peut arriver sur des milliers de caractères de séparation sont utilisés. Quelques localisations définissent ce caractère selon la convention nationale du '.', qui est le même caractère utilisé par la localisation \"C\" pour noter le point séparant les décimaux.

Donc il est parfois nécessaire de remplacer la ligne LC_ALL dans le code ci dessus par une séquence de lignes setlocale

 
{
 …
 setlocale (LC_CTYPE, "");
 setlocale (LC_MESSAGES, "");
 …
}

Sur tous les systèmes conformes à la norme POSIX, les catégories locales LC_CTYPE, LC_MESSAGES, LC_COLLATE, LC_MONETARY, LC_NUMERIC et LC_TIME sont disponibles. Sur certains systèmes, qui ne sont que compatibles à l'ISO C, LC_MESSAGES est absent, mais un substitut est défini dans la bibliothèque GNU gettext <libintl.h> et la bibliothèque GNU <locale.h>.

Notez que changer le LC-TYPE affecte aussi les fonctions déclarées dans l'en-tête standard <ctype.h> et quelques fonctions déclarées dans les en-têtes standards <string.h> et <stdlib.h>. Si ceci n'est pas souhaitable pour votre application (par exemple l'outil de reconnaissance syntaxique d'un compilateur), vous pouvez utiliser un ensemble de fonctions de substitutions qui ont la localisation C codé en dur, comme on le trouve dans les modules ‘c-ctype’,‘c-strcasestr’, ‘c-cstrtod’, ‘c-strtold’ dans la distributiondes sources de GNU gnulib.

Il est aussi possible de changer la localisation et de revenir entre la localisation dépendant de l'environnement et la localisation C, mais cette approche est normalement évitée car les appels à setlocale sont coûteux, parce qu'il est fastidieux de déterminer les positions où le changement de la localisation est requis dans le source d'un gros programme et parce que change de localisation n'est sécurisé pour les fonctionnements en multi-activité (ndt multithread).


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

4.3 Préparation des chaînes à traduire

Avant qu'une chaîne puisse être marquée pour des traductions, elles ont parfois besoin d'être ajustées. Habituellement la préparation des chaînes pour la traduction est faite juste avant de les marquer, phase de marquage qui va être décrite dans la section suivante. Vous devez garder ceci en mémoire pour la suite.

Regardons quelques exemples d'application de ces conseils.

Les chaîne à traduire devraient être dans un style anglais correct. Si de l'argot avec des abréviations et des ellipses sont utilisés, la plupart du temps les traductrices ne comprendront pas les messages et produiront des traductions très inapropriées.

 
"%s: est paramètre \n"

Ceci est presque intraduisible : est-ce que l'item affiché est un paramètre ou le paramètre ?

 
"pas de correspondance"

L'ambiguïté de ce message le rend inintelligible : est-ce que le programme cherche de définir quelque chose dans le feu de l'action ? Est-ce que cela signifie "l'objet donné ne correspond pas au modèle"? Est-ce que cela signifie "le modèle ne correspond pas pour aucun de ces objets" ?

Dans les deux cas, ajouter plus de mots dans le message aiderait à la fois la traductrice et l'utilisateur de langue anglaise.

Les chaînes à traduire devraient être des phrases entières. Il est souvent impossible de traduire des verbes ou des adjectifs isolés de manière convenable.

 
printf ("Le fichier %s est %s protégé", filename, rw ? "write" : "read");

Le plupart des traductrices ne regarderont pas le source et verront simplement la chaîne "Le fichier %s est %s protégé", qui est inintelligible. Changez ceci en

 
printf (rw? "Le fichier %s est protégé contre l'écriture" : "Le fichier %s
est protégé contre la lecture",
           filename:

De cette façon la traductrice ne fera pas que comprendre le message, elle sera aussi capable de trouver la construction grammaticale appropriée. Un traductrice française par exemple traduit "write protected" en 'protégé contre l'écriture".

Les phrases entières sont aussi importantes, car dans beaucoup de langues, la déclinaison de certains mots dans la phrase dépends du genre ou du nombre (singulier/pluriel) d'une autre partie de la phrase. Il y a habituellement plus d'inter-dépendance entre les mots qu'il y a en anglais. En conséquence, demander à une traductrice de traduire deux êmoitiés de phrase et les combiner ensuite en une seule phrase ne marchera pas pour beaucoup de langue, même si cela marcherait en anglais. C'est pourquoi les traductrices doivent travailler sur des phrases entières.

Souvent les phrases ne rentrent pas sur une seule ligne. Si une phrase est sortie en utilisant deux expressions printf successives comme celles ci :

 
printf ("Locale charset \"%s\" is different from\n", lcharset);
printf ("input file charset \"%s\".\n", fcharset);

la traductrice devrait traduire les deux moitiés de phrases, mais rien dans le fichier PO ne lui dira que les deux moitiés de phrases vont ensemble. Il est nécessaire de fusionner les deux expressions printf, de telle manière que la traductrice puisse travailler sur la phrase entière en une seule fois et décider à quel endroit il faut insérer une rupture de ligne dans la traduction (s'il y en a une) :

 
printf ("Locale charset \"%s\" is different from\n\
input file charset \"%s\".\n", lcharset, fcharset);

Vous pourriez maintenant demander : et comment fait-on avec les phrases adjacentes ? Comme dans ce cas :

 
puts ("Apollo 13 scenario: Stack overflow handling failed.");\n"
puts ("On the next stack overflow we will crash!!!");

Ces deux expressions doivent-elles être fusionnées en une seule ? Je recommanderais de les fusionner, si les deux phrases ont une relation entre elles, car cela facilite la compréhension de la traductrice pour les traduire toutes deux. D'un autre côté, si l'un des messages est stéréotypé et qu'il intervient à d'autres endroits, vous faciliterez la tâche de la traductrice en ne les fusionnant pas. (les messages identiques qui interviennent à plusieurs endroits sont combinés par xgettext, de telle manière que la traductrice ne les travaille qu'un seule fois).

les chaînes traduisibles devrait être limitées à un paragraphe ; ne laisser pas un message devenir plus long que dix lignes. La raison en est que quand la chaîne à traduire change, la traductrice doit alors modifier la chaîne traduite entièrement. Peut-être seulement un mot aura changé dans la chaîne en anglais, mais la traductrice ne le voit pas (avec les outils de traduction actuels), c'est pourquoi elle devra vérifier le message en entier.

Beaucoup de programme GNU ont une sortie ‘--help’ qui s'étend sur plusieurs pages. C'est une courtoisie envers la traductrice de scinder ces messages en plusieurs pages de cinq à dix lignes chacunes. Ce faisant, vous pouvez aussi scinder les options documentées en groupes, comme le groupe des options d'entrée, celui des options de sortie et celui des options de sorties informatives. Cela aidera tous les utilisateurs à trouver l'option qu'ils recherchent.

On utilise parfois des concaténations de chaînes codées en dur pour construire des phrases anglaise :

 
strcpy (s, "Replace ");
strcat (s, object1);
strcat (s, " with ");
strcat (s, object2);
strcat (s, "?");

Pour ne présenter que des phrases entières à la traductrice et aussi parceque dans certaines langues, la traductrice peut vouloir inverser l'ordre de object1 et object2, il est nécessaire de changer ceci pour utiliser une chaîne formatée :

 
sprintf (s, "Replace %s with %s?", object1, object2);

Un cas similaire est la concaténation des chaînes à la compilation. Le fichier ISO C 99 à en-tête <inttypes.h contient une macro PRId64 qui peut être utilisée comme une directive de formatage pour écrire un entier ‘int64_t’ avec printf. Il se développe en une chaîne constante, habituellement "d" ou "ld" ou "lld" ou quelque chose d'approchant, en fonction de la plateforme. Supposons que vous ayez un code comme celui ci

 
printf ("La quantité est %0" PRId64 "\n", number);

Les outils et bibliothèques de gettext ont un support particulier pour ces macros <inttypes.h>. C'est pourquoi vous pouvez simplement écrire

 
printf (gettext ("La quantité est %0" PRId64 "\n"), number);

Le fichier PO contiendra la chaîne "La quantité est %0<PRId64>\n". La traductrice donnera une traduction contenant aussi "%0<PRId64>" et au moment de l'exécution le résultat de la fonction gettext contiendra la chaîne constante appropriée, "d", "ld" ou "lld".

Ceci fonctionne pour les macros prédéfinie de <inttypes.h>. Si vous avez défini vos propres macros similaires, prenons par exemple ‘MYPRId64’, qui qui ne sont pas connues de gettext, la solution du problème est alors de changer le code de la façon suivante :

 
char buf1[100];
sprintf (buf1, "%0" MYPRId64, number);
printf (gettext ("La quantité est %s\n"), buf1);

Ceci signifie que vous avez mis le code dépendant de la plateforme dans une déclaration et le code d'internationalisation dans une déclaration différente. Notez qu'un tampon de longueur 100 est sûr, car tous les types entiers codés en dur sont limités à 128 bits et pour imprimer un entier codé en 128 bit, on a besoin d'au plus 54 caractères, indépendamment du fait qu'il soit en décimal, octal ou hexadécimal.

Tout ceci s'applique aussi aux autres langages de programmation. Par exemple en Java et C#, les concaténations de chaînes sont utilisées très fréquement, car c'est un opérateur intégré au compilateur. Comme en C, en Java vous changeriez

 
System.out.println("Replace "+object1+" with "+object2+"?");

en une déclaration utilisant une chaîne de formatage :

 
System.out.println(
    MessageFormat.format("Replace {0} with {1}?",
                         new Object[] { object1, object2 }));

De manière identique, en C# vous changeriez

 
Console.WriteLine("Replace "+object1+" with "+object2+"?");

en une déclaration utilisant une chaîne de formatage :

 
Console.WriteLine(
    String.Format("Replace {0} with {1}?", object1, object2));

Les balises et caractères de contrôle inhabituels ne devraient pas être utilisés dans le chaînes ) traduire. Il y a de fortes chances que Les traductrices ne comprendront pas la signification particulière de ces marquages et caractères de contrôle.

Par exemple, si vous avez une convention que ‘|’ délimite la partie main droite et main gauche d'un élément de l'Interface Utilisateur Graphique, sans commentaires spécifiques, les traductrices ne le comprendront pas la plupart du temps. Il serait peut être mieu que la traductrice traduise la partie main gauche et main droite séparemment.

Un autre exemple est la convention ‘argp’ pour utiliser un seul caractère ‘\v’ (tabulation verticale) pour délimiter deux sections à l'intérieur d'une chaîne. Ceci est défectueux. Certaines traductrices pourront convertir ceci en un simple nouvelle ligne, d'autre en une ligne blanche. Avec certains éditeurs de fichier PO, ceci ne sera même peut être pas facile d'entrer un caractère de contrôle pour une tabulation verticale. Donc vous ne pourrez pas être sûr que la traduction contiendra un caractère ‘\v’ à la position correspondante. La solution est encore une fois de laisser la traductrice traduire deux chaînes séparrées et de les combiner au moment de l'exécution avec le ‘\v’ requis par la convention.

Cependant les balises HTML sont communes et il est problablement acceptable de les utiliser dans les chaînes à traduire. Mais gardez néanmoins en mémoire que les outils GNU gettext ne vérifient pas que les traductions sont des expressions HTML bien formées.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

4.4 Comment les marquages apparaissent dans les fichiers source

Toutes les chaînes requérant une traduction devraient être balisées dans les sources C. Le balisage est fait de telle manière que chaque chaîne à traduire apparaisse comme le seul paramètre de quelque fonction ou macro du pré-processeur. Il n'y a que quelques fonctions ou macros qui sont concernées par les traduction et leurs noms sont faits pour être des clés de balisage. Le balisage est attaché aux chaînes elles-mêmes plutôt qu'à ce que nous en faisons avec. Cette approche a plusieures utilités. Un exemple évident est un message d'erreur produit par formatage. La chaîne de format a besoin d'une traduction comme les quelques chaînes qui sont insérées par la spécification ‘%s’ dans le format alors que le résultat de sprintf peut avoir tellement d'instances différentes qu'il n'est pratiquement impossible de les lister toutes, disons dans quelque routine ‘error_string_out()’.

Cette opération de balisage a deux objectifs. Le premier objectif du balisage est de déclencher la récupération de la traduction au moment de l'exécution. Le mot clé peut être résolu en une routine capable de retourner dynamiquement la traduction correcte, autant que possible ou autant que voulu, pour la chaîne en paramètre. La plupart des chaînes à rendre dans l'idiome national sont trouvées dans les positions d'exécution, c'est-à-dire attachées à des variables ou données comme des paramètres aux fonctions. Mais ce n'est pas un usage universel et quelques chaînes à traduire apparaissent dans des initialisations structurées. @xref{cas spéciaux}.

Le second objectif de l'opération de balisage est d'aider xgettext à extraire correctement toutes les chaînes à traduire, quand il parcourt un ensemble de sources de programmes et produit des fichiers PO modèles.

Le mot clé canonique pour baliser une chaîne à traduire est ‘gettext’, ceci donne d'ailleurs son nom au progiciel GNU gettext en son entier. Pour les progiciels ne faisant qu'une utilisation légère du mot clé ‘gettex’, macro et fonction, il est facilement utilisé tel que. Cependant, pour les progiciels utilisant l'interface gettext de façon plus intensive, il est souvent plus pratique de donner au mot clé principal un nom plus court et moins voyant. En fait, le mot clé peut apparaître dans beaucoup de chaîne à travers le progiciel et les programmeurs ne veulent pas habituellement ni n'ont besoin que leur programme source les rappelle énergiquement à chaque fois qu'ils ont internationalisés. De plus un long mot clé à le désavantage d'utiliser plus d'espace, forçant un plus gros travail d'indentation sur les sources de ceux qui essaient de les garder entre 79 et 80 colonnes.

Beaucoup de progiciel utilisent ‘_’ (un simple soulignement) comme mot clé et écrive ‘_("chaîne à traduire")’ à la place de ‘gettext ("chaîne à traduire")’. De plus, la règle de programmation des standards GNU voulant qu'il y ait un espace entre le mot clé et la parenthèse ouvrante est oubliée en pratique, pour cet usage particulier. Ainsi l'entête textuel pour les chaînes à traduire est réduit à seulement trois caractères : le soulignement et les deux parenthèses. Cependant, même si GNU gettext utilise cette convention en interne, il ne l'offre pas officiellement. Le mot clé véritable et authentique est vraiment en réalité ‘gettext’. Il est assez facile pour ceux qui veulent utiliser ‘_’ à la place de ‘gettext’ de déclarer :

 
#include <libintl.h>
#define _(String) gettext (String)

à la place de n'utiliser que ‘#include <libintl.h>’.

Les balises ‘gettext’ et ‘_’ prennent les chaînes à traduire comme seul argument. Il est aussi possible de définir des fonctions de balisage qui les prennent comme argument à d'autres positions. Il est même possible de faire dépendre la position de l'argument balisé du nombre total d'arguments de l'appel de la focntion ; ceci est utile en C++. Tout ceci est obtenu en utilisant l'option gettext--keyword’.

Notez aussi que les longues chaînes peuvent être coupées à travers les lignes, en multiples morceaux de chaînes adjacents. La concaténation automatique de chaîne est faite au moment de la compilation en accord avec l'ISO C ou l'ISO C++ ; xgettext permet aussi cette syntaxe.

Plus tard, la maintenant est relativement simple. Si, en tant que programmeur, vous ajoutez ou modifiez une chaîne, il faudra vous poser la question si le nouvelle chaîne, ou la chaîne modifiée, requiert une traduction et l'inclure avec ‘_()’, si vous pensez qu'elle doit être traduite. Par exemple, ‘"%s"’ est un exemple de chaîne de requérant pas de traduction. Mais ‘"%s: %d"requiert une traduction, car en français, à la différence de l'anglais, l'usage veut qu'on place un espace avant les deux points.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

4.5 Marquage des chaînes à traduire

balisage

Dans le mode PO, un jeu de fonctionalités est prévu plus pour le programmeur que pour la traductrice et lui permet de baliser interactivement dans un jeu de programmes sources les chaînes qui doivent être traduites et celles qui ne le doivent pas. Même si c'est une tâche plutôt simple pour un programmeur que de trouver et de baliser de telles chaînes par d'autres moyens en utilisant un éditeur de son choix, le mode PO rend cette tâche plus confortable. De plus, ceci donne aux traductrices qui se sentent un peu programmeur ou au programmeurs qui se sentent un peu traductrice, un outil qui leur permet de travailler à baliser les chaînes à traduire dans les sources du programme, tout en produisant simultanément un jeu de traduction dans une langue, pour que le progiciel soit internationalisé.

programmes sources visé par les commandes du mode PO décrites ici, devrait avoir une table de balises construites pour votre projet, avant d'utiliser ces commandes de fichier PO. C'est facile à faire. Dans n'importe quel fenêtre de Shell, changer le répertoire pour aller à la racine de votre projet et exécuter une commande ressemblant à :

 
etags src/*.[hc] lib/*.[hc]

en présumant ici que vous vouliez traiter tous les fichiers ‘.h’ et ‘.c’ depuis les répertoires ‘src/’ et ‘lib/’. Cette commande explorera tous les dits fichiers et créera un fichier ‘TAGS’ dans votre répertoire racine, résumant à peu prêt les contenus en utilisant un fichier avec un format particulier qu'Emacs peut comprendre.

progiciels qui suivent les standards de codage GNU, il existe un fichier make ayant pour objectif tags ou TAGS, qui construit le fichier de balises dans tous les répertoires et pour tous les fichiers contenant du code source.

Une fois que votre fichier ‘TAGS’ est prêt, les commandes suivantes aident le programmeur à baliser les chaînes traduisibles dans son jeu de sources. Mais ces commandes sont nécessairement dirigées depuis une fenêtre d'un fichier PO et il est probable que vous n'ayez même pas encore un tel fichier PO. Ceci n'est pas un problème du tout, car vous pouvez en ouvrir un nouveau en toute sécurité, un fichier PO vide, principalement pour utiliser ces commandes. Ce fichier PO vide va se remplir lentement en même temps que vous marquez des chaînes comme chaînes à traduire dans les sources de votre programme.

,

@efindex, , commande mode PO Recherche à travers les sources du programme une chaîne, qui ressemble à une chaîne pouvant être traduite (po-tags-search).

M-,

_()’ (po-mark-translatable).

M-.

mot clé pris dans les mots clés possibles. Cette commande avec un préfixe permet une certaine gestion de ces mots clés (po-select-mark-and-mark).

(po-tags-search) cherche les prochaines occurrences d'un chaîne qui ressemble à une chaîne pouvant être traduite et affiche le programme source dans une autre fenêtre Emacs, positionné de façon à ce que la chaîne soit proche du bord supérieur de cette autre fenêtre. Si la chaîne est trop longue pour tenir entièrement dans cette fenêtre, elle est positionnée de façon à ce que seule sa fin soit montrée. Dans tous les cas, le curseur est laissé dans la fenêtre du fichier PO. Si la chaîne montrée serait mieux présentée différement dans d'autres langues nationales, vous pourriez le marquer en utilisant M-, ou M-.. Autrement vous pouvez tout autant l'ignorer et passez à la prochaine chaîne en répétant juste la commande ,.

Une chaîne est une chaîne bonne à traduire si elle contient une séquence de trois lettres ou plus. Un chaîne contenant au plus deux lettres dans une rangée sera considérée comme une chaîne à traduire s'il elle a plus de lettres que de non-lettres. La commande ne considère pas les chaînes qui ne contiennent pas de lettres, ou seulement des lettres isolées. Elle ne considère pas non plus les chaînes à l'intérieur des commentaires ou les chaînes déjà balisée avec quelques mots clés que le mode PO connait (voir ci dessous).

Si vous n'avez jamais donné à Emacs quelques fichiers ‘TAGS’ à utiliser, la commande demandera que vous en spécifiez un dans la mini zone tampon, la première fois que vous utiliserez la commande. Vous pourrez changer votre fichier ‘TAGS’ plus tard en utilisant la commande habituelle d'Emacs M-x visit-tags-table, qui vous demandera de nommer le fichier ‘TAGS’ précis que vous voulez utiliser. Voir (Emacs)balises section `tables de balises' dans l'éditeur Emacs.

Chaque fois que vous utilisez la commande ,, la recherche démarre depuis là où vous l'aviez arrêté la fois précédente et elle parcourt tous les sources du programme, obéissant au fichier ‘TAGS’ jusqu'à ce que tous les sources aient été traités. Cependant en donnant un argument en préfixe à la commande (C-u ,), vous pouvez demander que la recherche complètement de nouveau depuis le premier programme source ; mais dans ce cas, les chaînes que vous avez récemment balisées comme des chaînes à traduire seront passées automatiquement.

L'utilisation de la commande , ne vous empèche pas d'utiliser les autres commandes de balisage d'Emacs. Par exemple, les commandes habituelles tags-search ou tags-query-replace peuvent être utilisées sans interrompre la séquence de recherche indépendante de la commande {,. Cependant, comme implémenté, la commande initiale , (ou la commande , qui est utilisée avec un préfixe) peut aussi ré-intialiser la recherche habituelle d'Emacs au premier fichier de balises, cette ré-intialisation peut être non désirée.

La commande M-, (po-mark-translatable) marquera les chaînes récemment trouvée avec le mot clé ‘_’. La commande M-. (po-select-mark-and-mark) vous demandera de taper un mot-clé depuis la mini zone tampon et d'utiliser ce mot-clé pour marquer la chaîne. Les deux commandes créeront automatiquement un nouveau fichier PO des entrées non traduites pour les chaînes qui auront été marquée et en fera l'entrée courante (vous rendant facile le traitement immédiat de sa traduction, si vous vous sentez d'attaque de l'entreprendre immédiatement). Il est posssible que les modifications faites au programme source par M-, ou M-. rendent les lignes du sources plus longues que 80 colonnes, vous forçant de les ré-indenter et de les couper différement. Vous pouvez utiliser la commande O du mode PO ou n'importe quelle autre commande affectant les fenêtres dans Emacs, pour couper dans la fenêtre du programme source et d'y faire tous les ajustements nécessaires. Vous devrez utiliser quelques commandes habituelles d'Emacs pour renvoyer le curseur à la fenêtre du fichier PO, disons si vous voulez utiliser la commande , pour la prochaine chaîne.

La commande M-. a quelques fonctionalités intégrées de rapididé, de façon à ce que vous n'ayez pas à taper explicitement tous les mots-clés à chaque fois. La première de ces fonctionalités de rapidité est que que les mots-clés préférés vous sont présentés, que vous pouvez accepter en tapant simplement <RET> à l'invite de commande. La seconde fonctionalité de rapidité est que vous pouvez tapez les préfixes non-amiguës des mots-clés que vous voulez vraiment et la commande les complètera automatiquement pour vous. Ceci veut aussi dire que le mode PO doit connaître tous les mots-clés possibles et qu'il n'accèptera pas les mots clés tapés incorrectement.

Si vous répondez ? à la demande de mot-clé, la commande vous donnera une liste de tous les mots-clés connus, dans laquelle vous pourrez choisir. Quand la commande est préfixée par un argument (C-u M-.), ceci empêche la mise à jour de tout programme source ou de zone tampon PO et ne fait qu'une gestion de mot-clé à la place. Dans ce cas, la commande demande un mot-clé, écrit en entier, qui devient un nouveau mot-clé permis pour les futures utilisaton de la commande M-.. De plus, ce nouveau mot-clé devient automatiquement le mot-clé préféré pour les prochaines commandes. En tapant un mot-clé déjà connu en réponse à C-u M-., on change juste le mot-clé préféré et rien de plus.

Quand les chaînes sont scruttées, tous les mots clés connus par M-. sont reconnu par la commande , et les chaînes déjà marquées par n'importe lequel de ces mots-clés connus sont automatiquement sautées. Si beaucoup de fichier PO sont ouverts simultanément, chacun a son jeu de mots-clés connus indépendant. Il n'y a —pour le moment— aucune disposition dans le mode PO pour effacer un mot-clé connu. Vous devez quitter le fichier (par exemple en utilisant q) et le ré-ouvrir tout frais. Quand un fichier PO est juste ouvert dans une fenêtre Emacs, les seuls mots-clés connus sont ‘gettext’ et ‘_’ et ‘gettext’ est préféré pour la commande M-.. En fait, il n'est pas utile de préférer ‘_’, car celui ci est déjà intégré dans la commande M-,.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

4.6 Les commentaires spéciaux précédants les mots-clés

Dans les programmes C, les chaînes sont souvent utilisées à l'intérieur d'appels de fonctions de la famille des printf. La spécialité de ces chaînes formattées est qu'elles contiennent des spécifications de format introduites par %. Suppsons que nous ayons le code

 
printf (gettext ("String `%s' has %d characters\n"), s, strlen (s));

Une traduction possible en allemand pour la chaîne ci dessus serait:

 
"%d Zeichen lang ist die Zeichenkette `%s'"

Un programmeur C, même s'il ne parle pas allemand, reconnaitra qu'il y a quelque chose qui ne va pas ici. L'ordre des deux spécifications de formats précédant est changée, mais bien sûr les arguments dans la fonctions printf ne le sont pas. Ceci conduira probablement à des problèmes car maintenant la

longueur de la chaîne est considérée comme l'adresse.

Pour prévenir les erreurs au moment de l'exécution causée par les traductions, l'outil msgfmt peut vérifier statiquement si les arguments dans la chaîne originale et sa traduction correspondent en genre et en nombre. Si ce n'est pas le cas et que l'option ‘-c’ a été passée à msgfmt, msgfmt donnera une erreur et refusera de produire le fichier MO. L'utilisation avisée de ‘msgfmt -c’ interceptera l'erreur, de façon à ce qu'elle ne cause pas de problème au moment de l'exécution.

Si l'ordre les mots dans la traducitons allemande ci dessus avait été correcte, on aurait eu à écrire

 
"%2$d Zeichen lang ist die Zeichenkette `%1$s'"

Les routines dans msgfmt connaissent ce genre de notation spéciale.

Parceque toutes les chaînes dans un programme ne sont pas des châînes formattées, il n'est pas utile pour msgfmt de tester toutes le chaînes dans un fichier ‘.po’. Ceci peut être la source de problème car la chaîne peut contenir ce quu peut ressembler à une spécification de format, sans que la chaîne ne soit utilisée dans printf.

C'est pourquoi xgettext ajoute une balise spéciale pour ces messages qu'il croit être des chaînes formattées. Il n'y a pas de règle absolue pour cela, seulement une heuristique. Dans le fichier ‘.po’, l'entrée est marquée en utilisant le marquer de c-format dans la ligne commentée #, (@pxref{fichiers PO}).

Le lecteur attentif pourrait maintenant dire, que c'est ceci peut encore causer des problèmes. L'heuristique peut l'interpréter de manière erronnée. Ceci est vrai et c'est pourquoi xgettext connait un certain type de commentaire qui laisse le programmeur prendre la décision. Si programme xgettext trouve un commentaire contenant les mots xgettext:c-format sur la même ligne que le mot-clé gettext, ou la ligne la précédant immédiatement, il marquera la chaîne dans tous les cas avec la marque c-format. Cette sorte de commentaire devrait être utilisé quand xgettext ne reconnait pas la chaîne comme une chaîne formattée, mais qu'elle en ai vraiment une et que cela devrait être vérifié.

Cette situation arrive assez souvent. La fonction printf est souvent appelée avec des chaînes qui ne contiennent pas de spécification de format. Bien sûr on devrait normalement utiliser fputs, mais ceci arrive tout de même. Dans ce cas xgettext ne reconnait pas la chaîne comme une chaîne formattée, mais qu'arrive-t-il si la traduction introduit une spécification de format valide. ? La fonction printf cherchera à accéder à l'un des paramètres, mais aucun n'existe parceque le code original ne passe aucun paramètre.

xgettext pourrait bien sûr prendre une mauvaise décision dans le sens contraire, i.e. une chaîne marquée comme une chaîne formattée ne serait pas en réalité une chaîne formatté. Dans ce cas le programme msgfmt pourrait donner trop d'avertissements et empêcherait de traduire le fichier ‘.po’. La méthode pour empêcher cette mauvaise décision est identique à celle utilisée ci dessus, seul le commentaire à utiliser doit contenir la chaîne xgettext:no-c-format.

Si une chaîne est marquée avec c-format et que ce n'est pas correct, l'utilisateur peut retrouver qui est responsable de cette décision. Voir Invocation le programme msginit pour voir comme l'option --debug peut être utilisé pour régler ce problème.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

4.7 Cas spéciaux de chaînes à traduire

Le lecteur attentif pourrait maintenant objecter qu'il n'est pas toujours possible de marquer les chaînes à traduire avec gettext ou quelque chose d'analogue. Considérez le cas suivant :

 
{
 static const char *messages[] = {
   "some very meaningful message",
   "and another one"
 };
 const char *string;
 …
 string
   = index > 1 ? "a default message" : messages[index];

 fputs (string);
 …
}

Alors que ce n'est pas un problème de marquer la chaîne "a default message", il n'est pas possible de marquer les initialisateurs de chaines pour messages. Que faut-il faire ? Nous devons réaliser deux tâches. Tout d'abord, nous devons marquer les chaînes de façon à ce que le programme xgettext (voir la section Invocation le programme msginit puisse les trouver et ensuite nous devons traduire les chaînes au moment de l'exécution avant de les imprimer.

La première tâche peut être réalisée en créant un nouveau mot clé, qui nomme une no-op. Pour la seconde, nous devons marquer tous les points d'accès à une chaîne depuis le vecteur. Donc une solution pourrait ressembler à ceci :

 
#define gettext_noop(String) String

{
 static const char *messages[] = {
   gettext_noop ("some very meaningful message"),
   gettext_noop ("and another one")
 };
 const char *string;
 …
 string
   = index > 1 ? gettext ("a default message") : gettext "
(messages[index]);

 fputs (string);
 …
}

Vous devez vous convaincre que la chaîne, qui est écrite par fputs est traduite dans tous les cas. La façon d'obtenir que xgettext connaisse le mot-clé additionel gettext_noop est expliqué dans Invocation le programme msginit.

Ce qui est décrit ci dessus n'est bien sûr pas la seule solution. Vous auriez pu aussi vous en sortir avec la façon suivante :

 
#define gettext_noop(String) String

{
 static const char *messages[] = {
   gettext_noop ("some very meaningful message",
   gettext_noop ("and another one")
 };
 const char *string;
 …
 string
   = index > 1 ? gettext_noop ("a default message") : messages[index];

  fputs (gettext (string));
  …
}

Mais ceci a un inconvénient. Le programmeur doit prendre garde d'utiliser gettext_noop pour la chaîne "a default message". L'utilisation de gettext pourrait avoir dans des cas rares des résultats imprévisibles.

Un avantage est que vous n'avez pas besoin de faire du contrôle d'analyse de flux pour vous assurer que la sortie est traduite dans tous les cas. Mais cette analyse est générallement pas très difficile. Si ça devait l'être, dans ce cas vous pourrez utiliser cette seconde méthode en toute situation.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

4.8 Laisser les utilisateurs rapporter les bogues de traduction

Le code a parfois des bogues, mais les traductions ont aussi parfois des bogues. L'utilisateur doit pouvoir les rapporter. Rapporter les bogues de traduction au programmeur ou au mainteneur d'un progiciel n'est pas très utile, parceque le mainteneur ne doit jamais changer une traduction, excepté pour le compte de la traductrice. C'est pourquoi les bogues de la traduction doivent être rapportés aux traductrices.

Voici un moyen d'organiser ceci, de façon à ce que le mainteneur n'ait pas besoin de faire suivre les rapports de bogues de traduction et même pas de garder une liste des adresses des traductrices ou de leurs équipes de traduction.

Tous les programmes ont une place où ils montrent les adresses de rapport de bogues. Pour les programmes GNU, c'est le code qui gère l'option “–help”, typiquement dans une fonction appelée “usage”. Instruisez les traductrices d'ajouter à cette place leur propre adresse de rapport de bogue. Par exemple, si le code a une instruction

 
printf (_("Report bugs to <%s>.\n"), PACKAGE_BUGREPORT);

vous pouvez ajouter quelques instructions de traductrice comme ceci :

 
/* TRANSLATORS: The placeholder indicates the bug-reporting address
  for this package.  Please add _another line_ saying
  "Report translation bugs to <...>\n" with the address for translation
  bugs (typically your translation team's web or email address).  */
printf (_(\"Report bugs to <%s>.\n"), PACKAGE_BUGREPORT);

Ceci sera extrait par ‘xgettext’, conduisant à un fichier .pot qui contiendra ceci :

 
#. TRANSLATORS: The placeholder indicates the bug-reporting address
#. for this package.  Please add _another line_ saying
#. "Report translation bugs to <...>\n" with the address for "
translation
#. bugs (typically your translation team's web or email address).
#: src/hello.c:178
#, c-format
msgid "Report bugs to <%s>.\n"
msgstr ""

[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

4.9 Marquage des noms correctement pour les traductions

Est-ce que le nom des personnes, villes, localisation etc ... doit être marqué pour les traductions ou non ? Les personnes, qui ne connaissent que les langues, qui peuvent s'écrire avec les lettres latines (l'anglais, l'espagnol, le français, l'allemant etc@dots) sont tentées de dire “non”, car les noms souvent ne changent pas quand ils sont transportés entre ces langues. Cependant, en général quand on traduit d'une écriture à une autre, les noms sont aussi traduit, habituellement phonétiquement ou par translitération. Par exemple, les noms russes ou grec sont convertis dans l'alphabet latin quand ils sont traduits en anglais et les noms anglais ou français sont convertis en écriture katana quand ils sont traduits en japonais. Ceci est nécessaire car les locuteurs de la langue cible ne savent pas, en général, lire l'écriture dans laquelle le nom était écrit à l'origine.

En tant que programmeur, vous devriez donc vous assurer que les noms soient marqués pour traduction avec un commentaire spécial disant aux traductrices que c'est un nom propre et comment le prononcer. Comme ceci :

 
printf (_("Written by %s.\n"),
       /* TRANSLATORS: This is a proper name.  See the gettext
          manual, section Names.  Note this is actually a non-ASCII
          name: The first name is (with Unicode escapes)
          "Fran\u00e7ois" or (with HTML entities) "Fran&ccedil;ois".
          Pronunciation is like "fraa-swa pee-nar".  */
       _("Francois Pinard"));

Comme traductrice, vous devriez faire attention quand vous traduisez les noms, car il est frustrant pour les personnes de voir leur noms mutilés ou distordus. Si votre langue utiliser l'alphabet latin, tout ce dont bous avez besoin est de reproduire le nom aussi parfaitement que possible avec les jeux de caractères habituels de votre langue. Dans ce cas particulier, ceci signifie de donner une traduction contenant le caractère c-cédille. Si votre langue utilise une autre écriture et les personnes parlant cette langue ne lisent pas habituellement les mots latin, cela signifie une translitération ; mais vous devriez toujours donner, entre paranthèses, l'écriture original du nom —pour l'usage des personnes sachant lire les écritures latines. Voici une exemple, utilisant le grec comme langue cible :

 
#. This is a proper name.  See the gettext
#. manual, section Names.  Note this is actually a non-ASCII
#. name: The first name is (with Unicode escapes)
#. "Fran\u00e7ois" or (with HTML entities) "Fran&ccedil;ois".
#. Pronunciation is like "fraa-swa pee-nar".
msgid "Francois Pinard"
msgstr "\phi\rho\alpha\sigma\omicron\alpha "
\pi\iota\nu\alpha\rho"
      " (Francois Pinard)"

Parceque la traduction des noms est un sujet sensible, c'est une bonne idée de tester votre traduction avant de la soumettre.

Le projet de traduction http://sourceforge.net/projects/translation a défini un fichier POT et un domaine de traduction qui est consitués des noms des auteurs de programmes, avec de meilleures fonctionalités pour les traductrices que celles présentées ici. Nommément, il y a le nom original écrit directement en unicode (plutôt qu'avec des échappements unicode ou des entités HTML) et la prononciation est notée en utilisant l'alphabet phonétique international (voir http://www.wikipedia.org/wiki/International_Phonetic_Alphabet).

Cependant, nous ne recommendons pas cette approche pour tous les fichier POT dans tous les progiciels, car cela forcerait les traductrices d'utiliser des fichiers PO avec l'encodage UTF-8, qui est — dans l'état actuel du logiciel (en 2003) — un harrassement majeur pur les traductrices utilisant GNU Emacs ou XEmacs avec po-mode.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

4.10 Préparation des fichiers source d'une bibliothèque

Quand vous êtes en train de préparer une bibliothèque, pas un programme, pour l'utilisation de gettext, seulement quelques détails sont différents. Ici nous assumons que la bibliothèque a un domaine de traduction et un fichier POT pour elle même. (si elle utilise le domaine de traduction et le fichier POT du programme principal, alors la section précédentes s'applique sans changement.)

  1. Le code de la bibliothèque n'appelle pas setlocale (LC_ALL, ""). C'est la responsabilité du programmeur principal, que de définir la localisation. La documentation de la bibliothèque devrait en fait le mentioner, de façon à ce que les développeurs de programmes utilisant cette bibliothèque en soient conscient.
  2. Le code de la bibliothèque n'appelle pas textdomain (PACKAGE), car cela interfèrerait avec le domaine de texte défini par le programme principal.
  3. Le code d'initialisation pour le programme était
     
     setlocale (LC_ALL, "");
     bindtextdomain (PACKAGE, LOCALEDIR);
     textdomain (PACKAGE);
    

    Pour une bibliothèque il est réduit à

     
      bindtextdomain (PACKAGE, LOCALEDIR);
    

    Si l'API (-ndt Interface de Programmation de l'Application) de votre bibliothèque n'a pas déjà une fonction d'initialisation, vous aurez besoin d'en créer une, contenant au moins l'invocation de bindtextdomain. Cependant vous n'aurez pas besoin habituellement d'exporter et de documenter cette fonction d'initialisation : il est suffisant que tous les points d'entrée de la bibliothèque appèlent la fonction d'initialisation si elle n'a pas été appelée avant. L'idiome type pour parvenir à ceci est une variable booléenne statique, qui indique si la fonction d'initialisation a été appelée, comme ceci :

     
    static bool libfoo_initialized;
    static void
    libfoo_initialize (void)
    {
     bindtextdomain (PACKAGE, LOCALEDIR);
     libfoo_initialized = true;
    }
    
    /* This function is part of the exported API.  */
    struct foo *
    create_foo (...)
    {
     /* Must ensure the initialization is performed.  */
     if (!libfoo_initialized)
       libfoo_initialize ();
     ...
    }
    
    /* This function is part of the exported API.  The argument must be
      non-NULL and have been created through create_foo().  */
    int
    foo_refcount (struct foo *argument)
    {
     /* No need to invoke the initialization function here, because
        create_foo() must already have been called before.  */
     ...
    }
    
  4. La déclaration habituelle de la macro ‘_’ dans chaque fichier source était
     
    #include <libintl.h>
    #define _(String) gettext (String)

    pour un programme. Pour une bibliothèque, qui a son propre domaine de traduction, ceci ce lit comme ceci :

     
    #include <libintl.h>
    #define _(String) dgettext (PACKAGE, String)
    

    En d'autres termes, dgettext est utilisé à la place de gettext. De manière similaire, la fonction dngettext devrait être utilisée à la place de la fonction ngettext.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

5. La fabrication du fichier modèle PO.

Après avoir préparer les sources, le programmeur crée un fichier PO modèle (-ndt template file). Cette section explique comment utiliser xgettex dans ce but.

xgettext crée un fichier nommé ‘nomdomaine.po’. Vous devriez le renommer en ‘nomdomaine.pot’. (Pourquoi xgettext ne le crée pas tout de suite sour le nom ‘nomdomaine.pot’ ? La réponse est : pour des raisons historiques. Quand xgettext a été spécifié, la distinction entre les fichiers PO et les modèle (-ndt template) de fichier PO était floue et le suffixe ‘.pot’ n'était pas utilisé à cette époque.)


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

5.1 Invocation le programme msginit

 
xgettext [option] [inputfile] …

Le programme xgettext extrait les chaînes à traduire depuis un fichier entrée donné.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

5.1.1 Input file location

inputfile

Input files.

-f file
--files-from=file

Read the names of the input files from file instead of getting them from the command line.

-D directory
--directory=directory

Add directory to the list of directories. Source files are searched relative to this list of directories. The resulting ‘.po’ file will be written relative to the current directory, though.

If inputfile is ‘-’, standard input is read.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

5.1.2 Output file location

-d nom
--default-domain=nom

Use ‘name.po’ for output (instead of ‘messages.po’).

-o file
--output=file

Write output to specified file (instead of ‘name.po’ or ‘messages.po’).

-p rép
--output-dir=rép

Output files will be placed in directory dir.

Si le fichier de sortie est ‘-’ ou ‘/dev/stdout’, la sortie est écrite sur la sortie standard.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

5.1.3 Choix du language d'entrée

-L nom
--language=nom

Spécifie le langage du fichier d'entrée. Les langages supportés sont C, C++, ObjectiveC, PO, Python, Lisp, EmacsLisp, librep, Scheme, Smalltalk, Java, JavaProperties, C#, awk, YCP, Tcl, Perl, PHP, GCC-source, NXStringTable, RST, Glade.

-C
--c++

This is a shorthand for --language=C++.

Par défaut, le langage est déduit de l'extension du nom du fichier.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

5.1.4 Input file interpretation

--from-code=nom

Specifies the encoding of the input files. This option is needed only if some untranslated message strings or their corresponding comments contain non-ASCII characters. Note that Tcl and Glade input files are always assumed to be in UTF-8, regardless of this option.

Par défaut les fichiers d'entrée sont considérés avoir été codés en ASCII.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

5.1.5 Operation mode

-j
--join-existing

Join messages with existing file.

-x fichier
--exclude-file=fichier

Entries from file are not extracted. file should be a PO or POT file.

-c [balise]
--add-comments[=balise]

Place comment block with tag (or those preceding keyword lines) in output file.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

5.1.6 Options spécifiques sur les languages

-a
--extract-all

Extract all strings.

Cette option fonctionne avec la plupart des langages, nommément C, C++, ObjectiveC, Shell, Python, Lisp, EmacsLisp, librep, Java, C#, awk, Tcl, Perl, PHP, GCC-source, Glade.

-k specmotclé
--keyword[=specmotclé]

Additional keyword to be looked for (without keywordspec means not to use default keywords).

If keywordspec is a C identifier id, xgettext looks for strings in the first argument of each call to the function or macro id. If keywordspec is of the form ‘id:argnum’, xgettext looks for strings in the argnumth argument of the call. If keywordspec is of the form ‘id:argnum1,argnum2’, xgettext looks for strings in the argnum1st argument and in the argnum2nd argument of the call, and treats them as singular/plural variants for a message with plural handling. Also, if keywordspec is of the form ‘id:contextargnumc,argnum’ or ‘id:argnum,contextargnumc’, xgettext treats strings in the contextargnumth argument as a context specifier. And, as a special-purpose support for GNOME, if keywordspec is of the form ‘id:argnumg’, xgettext recognizes the argnumth argument as a string with context, using the GNOME glib syntax ‘"msgctxt|msgid"’.
Furthermore, if keywordspec is of the form ‘id:…,totalnumargst’, xgettext recognizes this argument specification only if the number of actual arguments is equal to totalnumargs. This is useful for disambiguating overloaded function calls in C++.
Finally, if keywordspec is of the form ‘id:argnum...,"xcomment"’, xgettext, when extracting a message from the specified argument strings, adds an extracted comment xcomment to the message. Note that when used through a normal shell command line, the double-quotes around the xcomment need to be escaped.

Cette option fonctionne avec la plupart des langages, nommément C, C++, ObjectiveC, Shell, Python, Lisp, EmacsLisp, librep, Java, C#, awk, Tcl, Perl, PHP, GCC-source, Glade.

The default keyword specifications, which are always looked for if not explicitly disabled, are language dependent. They are:

To disable the default keyword specifications, the option ‘-k’ or ‘--keyword’ or ‘--keyword=’, without a keywordspec, can be used.

--flag=word:arg:flag

Specifies additional flags for strings occurring as part of the argth argument of the function word. The possible flags are the possible format string indicators, such as ‘c-format’, and their negations, such as ‘no-c-format’, possibly prefixed with ‘pass-’.
The meaning of --flag=function:arg:lang-format is that in language lang, the specified function expects as argth argument a format string. (For those of you familiar with GCC function attributes, --flag=function:arg:c-format is roughly equivalent to the declaration ‘__attribute__ ((__format__ (__printf__, arg, ...)))’ attached to function in a C source file.) For example, if you use the ‘error’ function from GNU libc, you can specify its behaviour through --flag=error:3:c-format. The effect of this specification is that xgettext will mark as format strings all gettext invocations that occur as argth argument of function. This is useful when such strings contain no format string directives: together with the checks done by ‘msgfmt -c’ it will ensure that translators cannot accidentally use format string directives that would lead to a crash at runtime.
The meaning of --flag=function:arg:pass-lang-format is that in language lang, if the function call occurs in a position that must yield a format string, then its argth argument must yield a format string of the same type as well. (If you know GCC function attributes, the --flag=function:arg:pass-c-format option is roughly equivalent to the declaration ‘__attribute__ ((__format_arg__ (arg)))’ attached to function in a C source file.) For example, if you use the ‘_’ shortcut for the gettext function, you should use --flag=_:1:pass-c-format. The effect of this specification is that xgettext will propagate a format string requirement for a _("string") call to its first argument, the literal "string", and thus mark it as a format string. This is useful when such strings contain no format string directives: together with the checks done by ‘msgfmt -c’ it will ensure that translators cannot accidentally use format string directives that would lead to a crash at runtime.
This option has an effect with most languages, namely C, C++, ObjectiveC, Shell, Python, Lisp, EmacsLisp, librep, Scheme, Java, C#, awk, YCP, Tcl, Perl, PHP, GCC-source.

-T
--trigraphs

Understand ANSI C trigraphs for input.
This option has an effect only with the languages C, C++, ObjectiveC.

--qt

Recognize Qt format strings.
This option has an effect only with the language C++.

--kde

Recognize KDE 4 format strings.
This option has an effect only with the language C++.

--boost

Recognize Boost format strings.
This option has an effect only with the language C++.

--debug

Use the flags c-format and possible-c-format to show who was responsible for marking a message as a format string. The latter form is used if the xgettext program decided, the format form is used if the programmer prescribed it.

By default only the c-format form is used. The translator should not have to care about these details.

This implementation of xgettext is able to process a few awkward cases, like strings in preprocessor macros, ANSI concatenation of adjacent strings, and escaped end of lines for continued strings.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

5.1.7 Output details

--force-po

Always write an output file even if no message is defined.

-i
--indent

Write the .po file using indented style.

--no-location

Do not write ‘#: filename:line’ lines. Note that using this option makes it harder for technically skilled translators to understand each message's context.

-n
--add-location

Generate ‘#: filename:line’ lines (default).

--strict

Write out a strict Uniforum conforming PO file. Note that this Uniforum format should be avoided because it doesn't support the GNU extensions.

--properties-output

Write out a Java ResourceBundle in Java .properties syntax. Note that this file format doesn't support plural forms and silently drops obsolete messages.

--stringtable-output

Write out a NeXTstep/GNUstep localized resource file in .strings syntax. Note that this file format doesn't support plural forms.

-w number
--width=number

Set the output page width. Long strings in the output files will be split across multiple lines in order to ensure that each line's width (= number of screen columns) is less or equal to the given number.

--no-wrap

Do not break long message lines. Message lines whose width exceeds the output page width will not be split into several lines. Only file reference lines which are wider than the output page width will be split.

-s
--sort-output

Generate sorted output. Note that using this option makes it much harder for the translator to understand each message's context.

-F
--sort-by-file

Sort output by file location.

--omit-header

Don't write header with ‘msgid ""’ entry.

This is useful for testing purposes because it eliminates a source of variance for generated .gmo files. With --omit-header, two invocations of xgettext on the same files with the same options at different times are guaranteed to produce the same results.

Note that using this option will lead to an error if the resulting file would not entirely be in ASCII.

--copyright-holder=string

Set the copyright holder in the output. string should be the copyright holder of the surrounding package. (Note that the msgstr strings, extracted from the package's sources, belong to the copyright holder of the package.) Translators are expected to transfer or disclaim the copyright for their translations, so that package maintainers can distribute them without legal risk. If string is empty, the output files are marked as being in the public domain; in this case, the translators are expected to disclaim their copyright, again so that package maintainers can distribute them without legal risk.

The default value for string is the Free Software Foundation, Inc., simply because xgettext was first used in the GNU project.

--foreign-user

Omit FSF copyright in output. This option is equivalent to ‘--copyright-holder=''’. It can be useful for packages outside the GNU project that want their translations to be in the public domain.

--package-name=package

Set the package name in the header of the output.

--package-version=version

Set the package version in the header of the output. This option has an effect only if the ‘--package-name’ option is also used.

--msgid-bugs-address=email@address

Set the reporting address for msgid bugs. This is the email address or URL to which the translators shall report bugs in the untranslated strings:

It can be your email address, or a mailing list address where translators can write to without being subscribed, or the URL of a web page through which the translators can contact you.

The default value is empty, which means that translators will be clueless! Don't forget to specify this option.

-m [string]
--msgstr-prefix[=string]

Use string (or "" if not specified) as prefix for msgstr entries.

-M [string]
--msgstr-suffix[=string]

Use string (or "" if not specified) as suffix for msgstr entries.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

5.1.8 Sortie informative

-h
--help

Display this help and exit.

-V
--version

Output version information and exit.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

6. La création d'un nouveau fichier PO.

Quand vous débuttez une nouvelle traduction, la traductrice crée un fichier appelé ‘LANG.po’, comme une copie du fichier modèle ‘package.pot’ avec des modifications dans les commentaires initiaux (au début du fichier) et dans les entrées de l'en-tête (la première entrée, près du début du fichier).

La façon la plus simple de faire ceci est d'utilisr le programme ‘msginit’. Par exemple :

 
$ cd PACKAGE-VERSION
$ cd po
$ msginit

La façon alternative de faire ceci est de copier les modifications à la main. Pour ce faire, la traductrice copie ‘package.pot’ dans ‘LANG.po’. Ensuite elle modifie les commentaires initiaux et l'entrée de l'en-tête de ce fichier.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

6.1 Invocation du programme msginit

 
msginit [option]

The msginit program creates a new PO file, initializing the meta information with values from the user's environment.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

6.1.1 Input file location

-i inputfile
--input=inputfile

Input POT file.

If no inputfile is given, the current directory is searched for the POT file. If it is ‘-’, standard input is read.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

6.1.2 Output file location

-o file
--output-file=file

Write output to specified PO file.

If no output file is given, it depends on the ‘--locale’ option or the user's locale setting. If it is ‘-’, the results are written to standard output.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

6.1.3 Input file syntax

-P
--properties-input

Assume the input file is a Java ResourceBundle in Java .properties syntax, not in PO file syntax.

--stringtable-input

Assume the input file is a NeXTstep/GNUstep localized resource file in .strings syntax, not in PO file syntax.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

6.1.4 Output details

-l ll_CC
--locale=ll_CC

Set target locale. ll should be a language code, and CC should be a country code. The command ‘locale -a’ can be used to output a list of all installed locales. The default is the user's locale setting.

--no-translator

Declares that the PO file will not have a human translator and is instead automatically generated.

-p
--properties-output

Write out a Java ResourceBundle in Java .properties syntax. Note that this file format doesn't support plural forms and silently drops obsolete messages.

--stringtable-output

Write out a NeXTstep/GNUstep localized resource file in .strings syntax. Note that this file format doesn't support plural forms.

-w number
--width=number

Set the output page width. Long strings in the output files will be split across multiple lines in order to ensure that each line's width (= number of screen columns) is less or equal to the given number.

--no-wrap

Do not break long message lines. Message lines whose width exceeds the output page width will not be split into several lines. Only file reference lines which are wider than the output page width will be split.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

6.1.5 Sortie informative

-h
--help

Display this help and exit.

-V
--version

Output version information and exit.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

6.2 Remplissage de l'en-tête

Les commentaire initiaux "SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE", "YEAR" et "FIRST AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR" devrait être remplacé par de l'information raisonnable. Ceci peut être fait dans n'importe éditeur de texte ; si Emacs est utilisé et est placé dans le mode PO automatiquement (parcecqu'il a reconnu l'extension du fichier), vous pouvez le désactiver en tapant M-x fundamental-mode.

La modification de l'entrée de l'en-tête peut déjà être faire en utilisant le mode PO : dans Emacs, tapez "M-x po-mode RET et ensuite RET de nouveau pour démarrer l'édition de l'entrée. Vous devriez remplir les champs suivant.

Project-Id-Version

Ceci est le nom et la version du progiciel (-ndt package). Remplissez le, si cela n'a pas déjà été rempli par xgettext.

Report-Msgid-Bugs-To

Ceci a déjà été rempli par xgettext. Il contient une adresse de courriel ou une URL, où vous pouvez rapporter les bogues dans les chaînes non-traduites :

POT-Creation-Date (-ndt Date de création POT)

Ceci a déjà été remplis par xgettext.

PO-Revision-Date

Vous n'avez pas besoin de remplir ceci. Ceci sera rempli par l'éditeur de fichier PO, quand vous sauverez le fichier.

Last-Translator

Remplissez votre nom et votre adresse courriel (sans les doubles guillemets).

Language-Team

Remplissez ici le nom anglais de la langue et l'adresse courriel ou du portail de l'équipe de langue dont vous faites partie.

Avant de démarrer une traduction, c'est une bonne idée de prendre contact avec votre équipe de traduction, non seulement pour être sûr que vous ne dupliquerez pas le travail, mais aussi pour coordonner les sujets liguistiques difficiles.

Dans le projet de traduction libre, chaque équipe de traduction a sa propre liste de courriel. La liste mise à jour des équipes peut se trouver sur la portail du projet de traduction libre, http://translationproject.org/, dans l'espace "Teams".

Content-Type

Remplacer ‘CHARSET’ avec l'encodage de caractère utilisé par votre langue, dans votre localisation ou UTF-8. Ce champs est nécessaire pour l'opération correcte des programmes msmerge et msgfmt, comme pour les utilisateurs dont l'encodage de caractère local diffère de la vôtre (voir @ref{conversion de jeu de caractères}).

Vous pouvez obtenir l'encodage de caractères de votre localisaton en lançant la commande en ligne de commande ‘locale charmap’. Si le résultat est ‘C’ ou ‘ANSI_X3.4-1968’, qui est équivalent à ‘ASCII’ (= ‘US-ASCII’), ceci signifie que votre localisation n'est configurée correctement. Dans ce cas, demandez à votre équipe de traduction, quel encodage ils utilisent. ‘ASCII’ n'est pas utilisable pour aucune langue excépté le latin.

Parceque les fichiers PO doivent être portables pour les systèmes d'exploitation avec moins de fonctionalitée avancée d'internationalisation, les encodages de caractères qui peuvent être utilisés sont limités à ceux qui sont supportés à la fois par GNU libc et GNU libiconv. Ces codes sont : ASCII, ISO-8859-1, ISO-8859-2, ISO-8859-3, ISO-8859-4, ISO-8859-5, ISO-8859-6, ISO-8859-7, ISO-8859-8, ISO-8859-9, ISO-8859-13, ISO-8859-14, ISO-8859-15, KOI8-R, KOI8-U, KOI8-T, CP850, CP866, CP874, CP932, CP949, CP950, CP1250, CP1251, CP1252, CP1253, CP1254, CP1255, CP1256, CP1257, GB2312, EUC-JP, EUC-KR, EUC-TW, BIG5, BIG5-HKSCS, GBK, GB18030, SHIFT_JIS, JOHAB, TIS-620, VISCII, GEORGIAN-PS, UTF-8.

Dans le système GNU, les encodages suivant sont fréquemment utilisés pour les langue correspondantes.

Quand des caractères de quotation simples ou des caractères de quotation doubles sont utilisés dans les traductions pour votre langue et que votre encodage local est l'un des jeux de caractères ISO-8859-*, il vaut mieux que vous créeiez votre fichier PO en utilisant l'encodage UTF-8 à la place de votre encodage local. Ceci parceque les caractères réels de quotation peuvent être représentés en UTF-8 (les caractères de simple quotation : U+2018, U+2019, les caractères de quotation double : U+201C, U+201D) alors qu'aucun des jeux de caractères ISO-8859-* ne les a tous. Les utilisateurs de localisation en UTF-8 veront les caractères réels de quotation alors que les utilisateurs des localisation en ISO-8859-* veront l'apostrophe verticalle et la double quotation verticale à la place (parceque c'est que la translitération définira pour les traduire).

Pour entrer ces caractères de quotation sous X11, vous pouvez changer le l'arrangement des correspondances des touches de votre clavier en utilisant le programme xmodmap. Les noms X11 des caractères de quotation sont "leftsinglequotemark", "rightsinglequotemark", "leftdoublequotemark", "rightdoublequotemark", "singlelowquotemark", "doublelowquotemark".

Notez que seules les versions récentes de GNU Emacs supportent l'encodage UTF-8 : Emacs 20 avec Mule-UCS et Emacs 21. En janvier 2001, XEmacs ne supportait pas encore l'encodage UTF-8.

Les noms d'encodages des caractères peuvent être écrit soit en majuscules soit en minuscules. Habituellement, les majuscules sont préférées.

Content-Transfer-Encoding

Définir ceci en 8bit.

Plural-Forms (-ndt Formes-Plurielles)

Ce champ est optionnel. Il est seulement nécessaire si le fichier PO a des formes plurielles. Vous pouvez les trouver en cherchant le mot-clé ‘msgid_plural’. Le format des champs de formes plurielles et décrit dans @ref{formes plurielles}.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

7. La mise à jour d'un fichier PO existant


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

7.1 Invocation du promgramme msgmerge

 
msgmerge [option] def.po ref.pot

The msgmerge program merges two Uniforum style .po files together. The def.po file is an existing PO file with translations which will be taken over to the newly created file as long as they still match; comments will be preserved, but extracted comments and file positions will be discarded. The ref.pot file is the last created PO file with up-to-date source references but old translations, or a PO Template file (generally created by xgettext); any translations or comments in the file will be discarded, however dot comments and file positions will be preserved. Where an exact match cannot be found, fuzzy matching is used to produce better results.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

7.1.1 Input file location

def.po

Translations referring to old sources.

ref.pot

References to the new sources.

-D directory
--directory=directory

Add directory to the list of directories. Source files are searched relative to this list of directories. The resulting ‘.po’ file will be written relative to the current directory, though.

-C file
--compendium=file

Specify an additional library of message translations. Voir la section Utiliser un compendia de traduction. This option may be specified more than once.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

7.1.2 Operation mode

-U
--update

Update def.po. Do nothing if def.po is already up to date.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

7.1.3 Output file location

-o file
--output-file=file

Write output to specified file.

The results are written to standard output if no output file is specified or if it is ‘-’.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

7.1.4 Output file location in update mode

The result is written back to def.po.

--backup=control

Make a backup of def.po

--suffix=suffix

Override the usual backup suffix.

The version control method may be selected via the --backup option or through the VERSION_CONTROL environment variable. Here are the values:

none
off

Never make backups (even if --backup is given).

numbered
t

Make numbered backups.

existing
nil

Make numbered backups if numbered backups for this file already exist, otherwise make simple backups.

simple
never

Always make simple backups.

The backup suffix is ‘~’, unless set with --suffix or the SIMPLE_BACKUP_SUFFIX environment variable.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

7.1.5 Operation modifiers

-m
--multi-domain

Apply ref.pot to each of the domains in def.po.

-N
--no-fuzzy-matching

Do not use fuzzy matching when an exact match is not found. This may speed up the operation considerably.

--previous

Keep the previous msgids of translated messages, marked with ‘#|’, when adding the fuzzy marker to such messages.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

7.1.6 Input file syntax

-P
--properties-input

Assume the input files are Java ResourceBundles in Java .properties syntax, not in PO file syntax.

--stringtable-input

Assume the input files are NeXTstep/GNUstep localized resource files in .strings syntax, not in PO file syntax.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

7.1.7 Output details

--force-po

Always write an output file even if it contains no message.

-i
--indent

Write the .po file using indented style.

--no-location

Do not write ‘#: filename:line’ lines.

--add-location

Generate ‘#: filename:line’ lines (default).

--strict

Write out a strict Uniforum conforming PO file. Note that this Uniforum format should be avoided because it doesn't support the GNU extensions.

-p
--properties-output

Write out a Java ResourceBundle in Java .properties syntax. Note that this file format doesn't support plural forms and silently drops obsolete messages.

--stringtable-output

Write out a NeXTstep/GNUstep localized resource file in .strings syntax. Note that this file format doesn't support plural forms.

-w number
--width=number

Set the output page width. Long strings in the output files will be split across multiple lines in order to ensure that each line's width (= number of screen columns) is less or equal to the given number.

--no-wrap

Do not break long message lines. Message lines whose width exceeds the output page width will not be split into several lines. Only file reference lines which are wider than the output page width will be split.

-s
--sort-output

Generate sorted output. Note that using this option makes it much harder for the translator to understand each message's context.

-F
--sort-by-file

Sort output by file location.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

7.1.8 Sortie informative

-h
--help

Display this help and exit.

-V
--version

Output version information and exit.

-v
--verbose

Increase verbosity level.

-q
--quiet
--silent

Suppress progress indicators.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

8. L'édition d'un fichier PO


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

8.1 Éditeur de fichier PO sous KDE


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

8.2 Éditeur de fichier PO sous GNOME


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

8.3 Éditeur Emacs pour les fichiers PO

Pour ceux d'entres-vous qui sont les heureux utilisateurs d'Emacs, le mode PO a été spécialement crée pour procurer un environnment confortable pour éditer ou modifier les fichiers PO. Quand vous éditez un fichier PO, le mode PO vous permet un parcours facile des fichiers compendium et des fichiers PO auxiliaires, comme il vous aide à suivre les références dans un jeu de source de programme C, depuis lesquels les fichiers PO ont été dérivés. Il a quelques fonctionalités spéciales, parmis lesquelles le marquage interactif des chaînes à traduire et la validation des fichiers PO avec un repositionnement facile sur la ligne du fichier PO qui montre l'erreur.

Pour débutter, à côté des commandes principales du mode PO (@pxref{commandes PO principales}), vous devriez savoir comment bouger entre les entrées (@pxref{positionnnement de l'entrée}) et comme gérer les entrées non traduites (@pxref{entrées non traduites}).


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

8.3.1 Achever l'installation de GNU gettext

Une fois que vous avez reçu, désempacté, configuré et compilé la distribution GNU gettext, la commande ‘make install’ met les programmes xgettext; msgfmt, gettext et msgmerge à leur place comme leur catalogues de messages disponibles. Pour démarrer en plus avec une installation confortable, vous voudrez aussi rendre le mode PO disponible pour les utilisateurs d'Emacs.

Pendant l'installation du mode PO, vous pouvez vouloir modifier votre fichier ‘.emacs’, une fois pour toute, de façon à ce qu'il contienne quelques lignes qui ressemblentt à ceci :

 
(setq auto-mode-alist
     (cons '("\\.po\\'\\|\\.po\\." . po-mode) auto-mode-alist))
(autoload 'po-mode "po-mode" "Major mode for translators to edit PO "
files" t)

Ensuite, à chaque fois que vous éditerez un fichier ‘.po’ ou tout fichier qui aura la chaîne ‘.po’ dans son nom, Emacs chargera ‘po-mode.elc’ (ou ‘po-mode.el’) selon les besoins et activera automatiquement les commandes du mode PO pour la zone tampon associée. La chaîne PO apparaît dans la ligne modale pour toute zone tampon, pour laquel le mode PO est actif. Beaucoup de fichier PO peuvent être actifs en même temps dans une seule session Emacs.

Si vous utilisez Emacs version 20 ou plus et si vous avez déjà installé les polices appropriées de caractères internationaux sur votre système, vous pourriez aussi demander à Emacs de savoir déterminer automatiquement le système de codage sur chaque fichier PO. Cela chargera le plus souvent (mais pas toujours) les polices de caractères nécessaires pour les utliliser pour afficher les traductions sur votre fenêtre Emacs. Pour que ceci se passe, ajoutez les lignes :

 
(modify-coding-system-alist 'file "\\.po\\'\\|\\.po\\."
                            'po-find-file-coding-system)
(autoload 'po-find-file-coding-system "po-mode")

à votre fichier ‘.emacs’. Si malgré ceci, vous voyez toujours des boites vides à la place de vos caractères internationaux, essayer un autre jeu de polices de caractères (via shift et bouton de la souri 1).


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

8.3.2 Main PO mode Commands

in Achever l'installation de GNU gettext, PO mode is activated for a window when Emacs finds a PO file in that window. This puts the window read-only and establishes a po-mode-map, which is a genuine Emacs mode, in a way that is not derived from text mode in any way. Functions found on po-mode-hook, if any, will be executed.

When PO mode is active in a window, the letters ‘PO’ appear in the mode line for that window. The mode line also displays how many entries of each kind are held in the PO file. For example, the string ‘132t+3f+10u+2o’ would tell the translator that the PO mode contains 132 translated entries (@pxref{Translated Entries}, 3 fuzzy entries (@pxref{Fuzzy Entries}), 10 untranslated entries (@pxref{Untranslated Entries}) and 2 obsolete entries (@pxref{Obsolete Entries}). Zero-coefficients items are not shown. So, in this example, if the fuzzy entries were unfuzzied, the untranslated entries were translated and the obsolete entries were deleted, the mode line would merely display ‘145t’ for the counters.

The main PO commands are those which do not fit into the other categories of subsequent sections. These allow for quitting PO mode or for managing windows in special ways.

_

(po-undo).

Q

(po-quit).

q

(po-confirm-and-quit).

0

(po-other-window).

?
h

about PO mode (po-help).

=

(po-statistics).

V

file (po-validate).

command _ (po-undo) interfaces to the Emacs undo facility. Voir (emacs)Undo section `Undoing Changes' dans The Emacs Editor. Each time U is typed, modifications which the translator did to the PO file are undone a little more. For the purpose of undoing, each PO mode command is atomic. This is especially true for the <RET> command: the whole edition made by using a single use of this command is undone at once, even if the edition itself implied several actions. However, while in the editing window, one can undo the edition work quite parsimoniously.

po-quit, PO Mode command command The commands Q (po-quit) and q (po-confirm-and-quit) are used when the translator is done with the PO file. The former is a bit less verbose than the latter. If the file has been modified, it is saved to disk first. In both cases, and prior to all this, the commands check if any untranslated messages remain in the PO file and, if so, the translator is asked if she really wants to leave off working with this PO file. This is the preferred way of getting rid of an Emacs PO file buffer. Merely killing it through the usual command C-x k (kill-buffer) is not the tidiest way to proceed.

command The command 0 (po-other-window) is another, softer way, to leave PO mode, temporarily. It just moves the cursor to some other Emacs window, and pops one if necessary. For example, if the translator just got PO mode to show some source context in some other, she might discover some apparent bug in the program source that needs correction. This command allows the translator to change sex, become a programmer, and have the cursor right into the window containing the program she (or rather he) wants to modify. By later getting the cursor back in the PO file window, or by asking Emacs to edit this file once again, PO mode is then recovered.

po-help, PO Mode command The command h (po-help) displays a summary of all available PO mode commands. The translator should then type any character to resume normal PO mode operations. The command ? has the same effect as h.

The command = (po-statistics) computes the total number of entries in the PO file, the ordinal of the current entry (counted from 1), the number of untranslated entries, the number of obsolete entries, and displays all these numbers.

The command V (po-validate) launches msgfmt in checking and verbose mode over the current PO file. This command first offers to save the current PO file on disk. The msgfmt tool, from GNU gettext, has the purpose of creating a MO file out of a PO file, and PO mode uses the features of this program for checking the overall format of a PO file, as well as all individual entries.

program msgfmt runs asynchronously with Emacs, so the translator regains control immediately while her PO file is being studied. Error output is collected in the Emacs ‘*compilation*’ buffer, displayed in another window. The regular Emacs command C-x` (next-error), as well as other usual compile commands, allow the translator to reposition quickly to the offending parts of the PO file. Once the cursor is on the line in error, the translator may decide on any PO mode action which would help correcting the error.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

8.3.3 Positionnement de l'entrée

always part of an entry. The only exceptions are the special case when the cursor is after the last entry in the file, or when the PO file is empty. The entry where the cursor is found to be is said to be the current entry. Many PO mode commands operate on the current entry, so moving the cursor does more than allowing the translator to browse the PO file, this also selects on which entry commands operate.

of the cursor in a specialized way. A few of those special purpose positioning are described here, the others are described in following sections (for a complete list try C-h m):

.

(po-current-entry).

n

(po-next-entry).

p

(po-previous-entry).

<

(po-first-entry).

>

(po-last-entry).

m

later use (po-push-location).

r

(po-pop-location).

x

previously saved one (po-exchange-location).

command Any Emacs command able to reposition the cursor may be used to select the current entry in PO mode, including commands which move by characters, lines, paragraphs, screens or pages, and search commands. However, there is a kind of standard way to display the current entry in PO mode, which usual Emacs commands moving the cursor do not especially try to enforce. The command . (po-current-entry) has the sole purpose of redisplaying the current entry properly, after the current entry has been changed by means external to PO mode, or the Emacs screen otherwise altered.

It is yet to be decided if PO mode helps the translator, or otherwise irritates her, by forcing a rigid window disposition while she is doing her work. We originally had quite precise ideas about how windows should behave, but on the other hand, anyone used to Emacs is often happy to keep full control. Maybe a fixed window disposition might be offered as a PO mode option that the translator might activate or deactivate at will, so it could be offered on an experimental basis. If nobody feels a real need for using it, or a compulsion for writing it, we should drop this whole idea. The incentive for doing it should come from translators rather than programmers, as opinions from an experienced translator are surely more worth to me than opinions from programmers thinking about how others should do translation.

command The commands n (po-next-entry) and p (po-previous-entry) move the cursor the entry following, or preceding, the current one. If n is given while the cursor is on the last entry of the PO file, or if p is given while the cursor is on the first entry, no move is done.

The commands < (po-first-entry) and > (po-last-entry) move the cursor to the first entry, or last entry, of the PO file. When the cursor is located past the last entry in a PO file, most PO mode commands will return an error saying ‘After last entry’. Moreover, the commands < and > have the special property of being able to work even when the cursor is not into some PO file entry, and one may use them for nicely correcting this situation. But even these commands will fail on a truly empty PO file. There are development plans for the PO mode for it to interactively fill an empty PO file from sources. @xref{Marking}.

The translator may decide, before working at the translation of a particular entry, that she needs to browse the remainder of the PO file, maybe for finding the terminology or phraseology used in related entries. She can of course use the standard Emacs idioms for saving the current cursor location in some register, and use that register for getting back, or else, use the location ring.

command Mode command PO mode offers another approach, by which cursor locations may be saved onto a special stack. The command m (po-push-location) merely adds the location of current entry to the stack, pushing the already saved locations under the new one. The command r (po-pop-location) consumes the top stack element and repositions the cursor to the entry associated with that top element. This position is then lost, for the next r will move the cursor to the previously saved location, and so on until no locations remain on the stack.

If the translator wants the position to be kept on the location stack, maybe for taking a look at the entry associated with the top element, then go elsewhere with the intent of getting back later, she ought to use m immediately after r.

command The command x (po-exchange-location) simultaneously repositions the cursor to the entry associated with the top element of the stack of saved locations, and replaces that top element with the location of the current entry before the move. Consequently, repeating the x command toggles alternatively between two entries. For achieving this, the translator will position the cursor on the first entry, use m, then position to the second entry, and merely use x for making the switch.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

8.3.4 Normalisation des chaînes de caractères en entrée

There are many different ways for encoding a particular string into a PO file entry, because there are so many different ways to split and quote multi-line strings, and even, to represent special characters by backslashed escaped sequences. Some features of PO mode rely on the ability for PO mode to scan an already existing PO file for a particular string encoded into the msgid field of some entry. Even if PO mode has internally all the built-in machinery for implementing this recognition easily, doing it fast is technically difficult. To facilitate a solution to this efficiency problem, we decided on a canonical representation for strings.

A conventional representation of strings in a PO file is currently under discussion, and PO mode experiments with a canonical representation. Having both xgettext and PO mode converging towards a uniform way of representing equivalent strings would be useful, as the internal normalization needed by PO mode could be automatically satisfied when using xgettext from GNU gettext. An explicit PO mode normalization should then be only necessary for PO files imported from elsewhere, or for when the convention itself evolves.

So, for achieving normalization of at least the strings of a given PO file needing a canonical representation, the following PO mode command is available:

M-x po-normalize

entries more uniform.

The special command M-x po-normalize, which has no associated keys, revises all entries, ensuring that strings of both original and translated entries use uniform internal quoting in the PO file. It also removes any crumb after the last entry. This command may be useful for PO files freshly imported from elsewhere, or if we ever improve on the canonical quoting format we use. This canonical format is not only meant for getting cleaner PO files, but also for greatly speeding up msgid string lookup for some other PO mode commands.

M-x po-normalize presently makes three passes over the entries. The first implements heuristics for converting PO files for GNU gettext 0.6 and earlier, in which msgid and msgstr fields were using K&R style C string syntax for multi-line strings. These heuristics may fail for comments not related to obsolete entries and ending with a backslash; they also depend on subsequent passes for finalizing the proper commenting of continued lines for obsolete entries. This first pass might disappear once all oldish PO files would have been adjusted. The second and third pass normalize all msgid and msgstr strings respectively. They also clean out those trailing backslashes used by XView's msgfmt for continued lines.

Having such an explicit normalizing command allows for importing PO files from other sources, but also eases the evolution of the current convention, evolution driven mostly by aesthetic concerns, as of now. It is easy to make suggested adjustments at a later time, as the normalizing command and eventually, other GNU gettext tools should greatly automate conformance. A description of the canonical string format is given below, for the particular benefit of those not having Emacs handy, and who would nevertheless want to handcraft their PO files in nice ways.

Right now, in PO mode, strings are single line or multi-line. A string goes multi-line if and only if it has embedded newlines, that is, if it matches ‘[^\n]\n+[^\n]’. So, we would have:

 
msgstr "\n\nHello, world!\n\n\n"

but, replacing the space by a newline, this becomes:

 
msgstr ""
"\n"
"\n"
"Hello,\n"
"world!\n"
"\n"
"\n"

We are deliberately using a caricatural example, here, to make the point clearer. Usually, multi-lines are not that bad looking. It is probable that we will implement the following suggestion. We might lump together all initial newlines into the empty string, and also all newlines introducing empty lines (that is, for n > 1, the n-1'th last newlines would go together on a separate string), so making the previous example appear:

 
msgstr "\n\n"
"Hello,\n"
"world!\n"
"\n\n"

There are a few yet undecided little points about string normalization, to be documented in this manual, once these questions settle.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

8.3.5 Entrées traduites

Each PO file entry for which the msgstr field has been filled with a translation, and which is not marked as fuzzy (@pxref{Fuzzy Entries}), is said to be a translated entry. Only translated entries will later be compiled by GNU msgfmt and become usable in programs. Other entry types will be excluded; translation will not occur for them.

related to translated entry processing.

t

(po-next-translated-entry).

T

(po-previous-translated-entry).

Mode command po-previous-translated-entry, PO Mode command The commands t (po-next-translated-entry) and T (po-previous-translated-entry) move forwards or backwards, chasing for an translated entry. If none is found, the search is extended and wraps around in the PO file buffer.

usually result from the translator having edited in a translation for them, @ref{Modifying Translations}. However, if the variable po-auto-fuzzy-on-edit is not nil, the entry having received a new translation first becomes a fuzzy entry, which ought to be later unfuzzied before becoming an official, genuine translated entry. @xref{Fuzzy Entries}.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

8.3.6 Entrées floues

Each PO file entry may have a set of attributes, which are qualities given a name and explicitly associated with the translation, using a special system comment. One of these attributes has the name fuzzy, and entries having this attribute are said to have a fuzzy translation. They are called fuzzy entries, for short.

Fuzzy entries, even if they account for translated entries for most other purposes, usually call for revision by the translator. Those may be produced by applying the program msgmerge to update an older translated PO files according to a new PO template file, when this tool hypothesises that some new msgid has been modified only slightly out of an older one, and chooses to pair what it thinks to be the old translation for the new modified entry. The slight alteration in the original string (the msgid string) should often be reflected in the translated string, and this requires the intervention of the translator. For this reason, msgmerge might mark some entries as being fuzzy.

mark an entry as fuzzy for her own convenience, when she wants to remember that the entry has to be later revisited. So, some commands are more specifically related to fuzzy entry processing.

z

(po-next-fuzzy-entry).

Z

(po-previous-fuzzy-entry).

<TAB>

entry (po-unfuzzy).

command po-previous-fuzzy-entry, PO Mode command The commands z (po-next-fuzzy-entry) and Z (po-previous-fuzzy-entry) move forwards or backwards, chasing for a fuzzy entry. If none is found, the search is extended and wraps around in the PO file buffer.

<TAB> (po-unfuzzy) removes the fuzzy attribute associated with an entry, usually leaving it translated. Further, if the variable po-auto-select-on-unfuzzy has not the nil value, the <TAB> command will automatically chase for another interesting entry to work on. The initial value of po-auto-select-on-unfuzzy is nil.

The initial value of po-auto-fuzzy-on-edit is nil. However, if the variable po-auto-fuzzy-on-edit is set to t, any entry edited through the <RET> command is marked fuzzy, as a way to ensure some kind of double check, later. In this case, the usual paradigm is that an entry becomes fuzzy (if not already) whenever the translator modifies it. If she is satisfied with the translation, she then uses <TAB> to pick another entry to work on, clearing the fuzzy attribute on the same blow. If she is not satisfied yet, she merely uses <SPC> to chase another entry, leaving the entry fuzzy.

command The translator may also use the <DEL> command (po-fade-out-entry) over any translated entry to mark it as being fuzzy, when she wants to easily leave a trace she wants to later return working at this entry.

Also, when time comes to quit working on a PO file buffer with the q command, the translator is asked for confirmation, if fuzzy string still exists.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

8.3.7 Entrées non traduites

When xgettext originally creates a PO file, unless told otherwise, it initializes the msgid field with the untranslated string, and leaves the msgstr string to be empty. Such entries, having an empty translation, are said to be untranslated entries. Later, when the programmer slightly modifies some string right in the program, this change is later reflected in the PO file by the appearance of a new untranslated entry for the modified string.

The usual commands moving from entry to entry consider untranslated entries on the same level as active entries. Untranslated entries are easily recognizable by the fact they end with ‘msgstr ""’.

(quite naively) seen as the process of seeking for an untranslated entry, editing a translation for it, and repeating these actions until no untranslated entries remain. Some commands are more specifically related to untranslated entry processing.

u

(po-next-untranslated-entry).

U

(po-previous-untransted-entry).

k

one (po-kill-msgstr).

Mode command po-previous-untransted-entry, PO Mode command The commands u (po-next-untranslated-entry) and U (po-previous-untransted-entry) move forwards or backwards, chasing for an untranslated entry. If none is found, the search is extended and wraps around in the PO file buffer.

An entry can be turned back into an untranslated entry by merely emptying its translation, using the command k (po-kill-msgstr). @xref{Modifying Translations}.

Also, when time comes to quit working on a PO file buffer with the q command, the translator is asked for confirmation, if some untranslated string still exists.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

8.3.8 Entrées obsolètes

By obsolete PO file entries, we mean those entries which are commented out, usually by msgmerge when it found that the translation is not needed anymore by the package being localized.

The usual commands moving from entry to entry consider obsolete entries on the same level as active entries. Obsolete entries are easily recognizable by the fact that all their lines start with #, even those lines containing msgid or msgstr.

Commands exist for emptying the translation or reinitializing it to the original untranslated string. Commands interfacing with the kill ring may force some previously saved text into the translation. The user may interactively edit the translation. All these commands may apply to obsolete entries, carefully leaving the entry obsolete after the fact.

specifically related to obsolete entry processing.

o

(po-next-obsolete-entry).

O

(po-previous-obsolete-entry).

<DEL>

an obsolete entry (po-fade-out-entry).

command po-previous-obsolete-entry, PO Mode command The commands o (po-next-obsolete-entry) and O (po-previous-obsolete-entry) move forwards or backwards, chasing for an obsolete entry. If none is found, the search is extended and wraps around in the PO file buffer.

PO mode does not provide ways for un-commenting an obsolete entry and making it active, because this would reintroduce an original untranslated string which does not correspond to any marked string in the program sources. This goes with the philosophy of never introducing useless msgid values.

command However, it is possible to comment out an active entry, so making it obsolete. GNU gettext utilities will later react to the disappearance of a translation by using the untranslated string. The command <DEL> (po-fade-out-entry) pushes the current entry a little further towards annihilation. If the entry is active (it is a translated entry), then it is first made fuzzy. If it is already fuzzy, then the entry is merely commented out, with confirmation. If the entry is already obsolete, then it is completely deleted from the PO file. It is easy to recycle the translation so deleted into some other PO file entry, usually one which is untranslated. @xref{Modifying Translations}.

Here is a quite interesting problem to solve for later development of PO mode, for those nights you are not sleepy. The idea would be that PO mode might become bright enough, one of these days, to make good guesses at retrieving the most probable candidate, among all obsolete entries, for initializing the translation of a newly appeared string. I think it might be a quite hard problem to do this algorithmically, as we have to develop good and efficient measures of string similarity. Right now, PO mode completely lets the decision to the translator, when the time comes to find the adequate obsolete translation, it merely tries to provide handy tools for helping her to do so.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

8.3.9 Modification de traductions

PO mode prevents direct modification of the PO file, by the usual means Emacs gives for altering a buffer's contents. By doing so, it pretends helping the translator to avoid little clerical errors about the overall file format, or the proper quoting of strings, as those errors would be easily made. Other kinds of errors are still possible, but some may be caught and diagnosed by the batch validation process, which the translator may always trigger by the V command. For all other errors, the translator has to rely on her own judgment, and also on the linguistic reports submitted to her by the users of the translated package, having the same mother tongue.

When the time comes to create a translation, correct an error diagnosed mechanically or reported by a user, the translators have to resort to using the following commands for modifying the translations.

<RET>

(po-edit-msgstr).

<LFD>
C-j

Reinitialize the translation with the original, untranslated string (po-msgid-to-msgstr).

k

delete it (po-kill-msgstr).

w

without deleting it (po-kill-ring-save-msgstr).

y

the kill ring (po-yank-msgstr).

command The command <RET> (po-edit-msgstr) opens a new Emacs window meant to edit in a new translation, or to modify an already existing translation. The new window contains a copy of the translation taken from the current PO file entry, all ready for edition, expunged of all quoting marks, fully modifiable and with the complete extent of Emacs modifying commands. When the translator is done with her modifications, she may use C-c C-c to close the subedit window with the automatically requoted results, or C-c C-k to abort her modifications. @xref{Subedit}, for more information.

po-msgid-to-msgstr, PO Mode command The command <LFD> (po-msgid-to-msgstr) initializes, or reinitializes the translation with the original string. This command is normally used when the translator wants to redo a fresh translation of the original string, disregarding any previous work.

arrange so, whenever editing an untranslated entry, the <LFD> command be automatically executed. If you set po-auto-edit-with-msgid to t, the translation gets initialised with the original string, in case none exists already. The default value for po-auto-edit-with-msgid is nil.

a translation with an empty string, or rather with a copy of the original string, is a matter of taste or habit. Sometimes, the source language and the target language are so different that is simply best to start writing on an empty page. At other times, the source and target languages are so close that it would be a waste to retype a number of words already being written in the original string. A translator may also like having the original string right under her eyes, as she will progressively overwrite the original text with the translation, even if this requires some extra editing work to get rid of the original.

command command k (po-kill-msgstr) merely empties the translation string, so turning the entry into an untranslated one. But while doing so, its previous contents is put apart in a special place, known as the kill ring. The command w (po-kill-ring-save-msgstr) has also the effect of taking a copy of the translation onto the kill ring, but it otherwise leaves the entry alone, and does not remove the translation from the entry. Both commands use exactly the Emacs kill ring, which is shared between buffers, and which is well known already to Emacs lovers.

The translator may use k or w many times in the course of her work, as the kill ring may hold several saved translations. From the kill ring, strings may later be reinserted in various Emacs buffers. In particular, the kill ring may be used for moving translation strings between different entries of a single PO file buffer, or if the translator is handling many such buffers at once, even between PO files.

To facilitate exchanges with buffers which are not in PO mode, the translation string put on the kill ring by the k command is fully unquoted before being saved: external quotes are removed, multi-line strings are concatenated, and backslash escaped sequences are turned into their corresponding characters. In the special case of obsolete entries, the translation is also uncommented prior to saving.

The command y (po-yank-msgstr) completely replaces the translation of the current entry by a string taken from the kill ring. Following Emacs terminology, we then say that the replacement string is yanked into the PO file buffer. Voir (emacs)Yanking section `Yanking' dans The Emacs Editor. The first time y is used, the translation receives the value of the most recent addition to the kill ring. If y is typed once again, immediately, without intervening keystrokes, the translation just inserted is taken away and replaced by the second most recent addition to the kill ring. By repeating y many times in a row, the translator may travel along the kill ring for saved strings, until she finds the string she really wanted.

When a string is yanked into a PO file entry, it is fully and automatically requoted for complying with the format PO files should have. Further, if the entry is obsolete, PO mode then appropriately push the inserted string inside comments. Once again, translators should not burden themselves with quoting considerations besides, of course, the necessity of the translated string itself respective to the program using it.

Note that k or w are not the only commands pushing strings on the kill ring, as almost any PO mode command replacing translation strings (or the translator comments) automatically saves the old string on the kill ring. The main exceptions to this general rule are the yanking commands themselves.

illustrate the operation of killing and yanking, let's use an actual example, taken from a common situation. When the programmer slightly modifies some string right in the program, his change is later reflected in the PO file by the appearance of a new untranslated entry for the modified string, and the fact that the entry translating the original or unmodified string becomes obsolete. In many cases, the translator might spare herself some work by retrieving the unmodified translation from the obsolete entry, then initializing the untranslated entry msgstr field with this retrieved translation. Once this done, the obsolete entry is not wanted anymore, and may be safely deleted.

When the translator finds an untranslated entry and suspects that a slight variant of the translation exists, she immediately uses m to mark the current entry location, then starts chasing obsolete entries with o, hoping to find some translation corresponding to the unmodified string. Once found, she uses the <DEL> command for deleting the obsolete entry, knowing that <DEL> also kills the translation, that is, pushes the translation on the kill ring. Then, r returns to the initial untranslated entry, and y then yanks the saved translation right into the msgstr field. The translator is then free to use <RET> for fine tuning the translation contents, and maybe to later use u, then m again, for going on with the next untranslated string.

When some sequence of keys has to be typed over and over again, the translator may find it useful to become better acquainted with the Emacs capability of learning these sequences and playing them back under request. Voir (emacs)Keyboard Macros section `Keyboard Macros' dans The Emacs Editor.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

8.3.10 Modification de commentaires

Any translation work done seriously will raise many linguistic difficulties, for which decisions have to be made, and the choices further documented. These documents may be saved within the PO file in form of translator comments, which the translator is free to create, delete, or modify at will. These comments may be useful to herself when she returns to this PO file after a while.

Comments not having whitespace after the initial ‘#’, for example, those beginning with ‘#.’ or ‘#:’, are not translator comments, they are exclusively created by other gettext tools. So, the commands below will never alter such system added comments, they are not meant for the translator to modify. @xref{PO Files}.

The following commands are somewhat similar to those modifying translations, so the general indications given for those apply here. @xref{Modifying Translations}.

#

(po-edit-comment).

K

ring, and delete it (po-kill-comment).

W

ring, without deleting it (po-kill-ring-save-comment).

Y

new from the kill ring (po-yank-comment).

These commands parallel PO mode commands for modifying the translation strings, and behave much the same way as they do, except that they handle this part of PO file comments meant for translator usage, rather than the translation strings. So, if the descriptions given below are slightly succinct, it is because the full details have already been given. @xref{Modifying Translations}.

command The command # (po-edit-comment) opens a new Emacs window containing a copy of the translator comments on the current PO file entry. If there are no such comments, PO mode understands that the translator wants to add a comment to the entry, and she is presented with an empty screen. Comment marks (#) and the space following them are automatically removed before edition, and reinstated after. For translator comments pertaining to obsolete entries, the uncommenting and recommenting operations are done twice. Once in the editing window, the keys C-c C-c allow the translator to tell she is finished with editing the comment. @xref{Subedit}, for further details.

po-subedit-mode-hook, if any, are executed after the string has been inserted in the edit buffer.

command po-kill-ring-save-comment, PO Mode command command (po-kill-comment) gets rid of all translator comments, while saving those comments on the kill ring. The command W (po-kill-ring-save-comment) takes a copy of the translator comments on the kill ring, but leaves them undisturbed in the current entry. The command Y (po-yank-comment) completely replaces the translator comments by a string taken at the front of the kill ring. When this command is immediately repeated, the comments just inserted are withdrawn, and replaced by other strings taken along the kill ring.

On the kill ring, all strings have the same nature. There is no distinction between translation strings and translator comments strings. So, for example, let's presume the translator has just finished editing a translation, and wants to create a new translator comment to document why the previous translation was not good, just to remember what was the problem. Foreseeing that she will do that in her documentation, the translator may want to quote the previous translation in her translator comments. To do so, she may initialize the translator comments with the previous translation, still at the head of the kill ring. Because editing already pushed the previous translation on the kill ring, she merely has to type M-w prior to #, and the previous translation will be right there, all ready for being introduced by some explanatory text.

On the other hand, presume there are some translator comments already and that the translator wants to add to those comments, instead of wholly replacing them. Then, she should edit the comment right away with #. Once inside the editing window, she can use the regular Emacs commands C-y (yank) and M-y (yank-pop) to get the previous translation where she likes.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

8.3.11 Details of Sub Edition

The PO subedit minor mode has a few peculiarities worth being described in fuller detail. It installs a few commands over the usual editing set of Emacs, which are described below.

C-c C-c

(po-subedit-exit).

C-c C-k

(po-subedit-abort).

C-c C-a

(po-subedit-cycle-auxiliary).

po-subedit-exit, PO Mode command The window's contents represents a translation for a given message, or a translator comment. The translator may modify this window to her heart's content. Once this is done, the command C-c C-c (po-subedit-exit) may be used to return the edited translation into the PO file, replacing the original translation, even if it moved out of sight or if buffers were switched.

command If the translator becomes unsatisfied with her translation or comment, to the extent she prefers keeping what was existent prior to the <RET> or # command, she may use the command C-c C-k (po-subedit-abort) to merely get rid of edition, while preserving the original translation or comment. Another way would be for her to exit normally with C-c C-c, then type U once for undoing the whole effect of last edition.

po-subedit-cycle-auxiliary, PO Mode command The command C-c C-a (po-subedit-cycle-auxiliary) allows for glancing through translations already achieved in other languages, directly while editing the current translation. This may be quite convenient when the translator is fluent at many languages, but of course, only makes sense when such completed auxiliary PO files are already available to her (@pxref{Auxiliary}).

Functions found on po-subedit-mode-hook, if any, are executed after the string has been inserted in the edit buffer.

While editing her translation, the translator should pay attention to not inserting unwanted <RET> (newline) characters at the end of the translated string if those are not meant to be there, or to removing such characters when they are required. Since these characters are not visible in the editing buffer, they are easily introduced by mistake. To help her, <RET> automatically puts the character < at the end of the string being edited, but this < is not really part of the string. On exiting the editing window with C-c C-c, PO mode automatically removes such < and all whitespace added after it. If the translator adds characters after the terminating <, it looses its delimiting property and integrally becomes part of the string. If she removes the delimiting <, then the edited string is taken as is, with all trailing newlines, even if invisible. Also, if the translated string ought to end itself with a genuine <, then the delimiting < may not be removed; so the string should appear, in the editing window, as ending with two < in a row.

edited, the translator may move the cursor back into the PO file buffer and freely move to other entries, browsing at will. If, with an edition pending, the translator wanders in the PO file buffer, she may decide to start modifying another entry. Each entry being edited has its own subedit buffer. It is possible to simultaneously edit the translation and the comment of a single entry, or to edit entries in different PO files, all at once. Typing <RET> on a field already being edited merely resumes that particular edit. Yet, the translator should better be comfortable at handling many Emacs windows!

any order, regardless of how or when they were started. When many subedits are pending and the translator asks for quitting the PO file (with the q command), subedits are automatically resumed one at a time, so she may decide for each of them.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

8.3.12 Contexte des fichiers sources en C

translation

PO mode is particularly powerful when used with PO files created through GNU gettext utilities, as those utilities insert special comments in the PO files they generate. Some of these special comments relate the PO file entry to exactly where the untranslated string appears in the program sources.

When the translator gets to an untranslated entry, she is fairly often faced with an original string which is not as informative as it normally should be, being succinct, cryptic, or otherwise ambiguous. Before choosing how to translate the string, she needs to understand better what the string really means and how tight the translation has to be. Most of the time, when problems arise, the only way left to make her judgment is looking at the true program sources from where this string originated, searching for surrounding comments the programmer might have put in there, and looking around for helping clues of any kind.

Surely, when looking at program sources, the translator will receive more help if she is a fluent programmer. However, even if she is not versed in programming and feels a little lost in C code, the translator should not be shy at taking a look, once in a while. It is most probable that she will still be able to find some of the hints she needs. She will learn quickly to not feel uncomfortable in program code, paying more attention to programmer's comments, variable and function names (if he dared choosing them well), and overall organization, than to the program code itself.

meant to help the translator at getting program source context for a PO file entry.

s

context, or cycle through them (po-cycle-source-reference).

M-s

selected by menu (po-select-source-reference).

S

source files (po-consider-source-path).

M-S

for source files (po-ignore-source-path).

Mode command po-select-source-reference, PO Mode command The commands s (po-cycle-source-reference) and M-s (po-select-source-reference) both open another window displaying some source program file, and already positioned in such a way that it shows an actual use of the string to be translated. By doing so, the command gives source program context for the string. But if the entry has no source context references, or if all references are unresolved along the search path for program sources, then the command diagnoses this as an error.

Even if s (or M-s) opens a new window, the cursor stays in the PO file window. If the translator really wants to get into the program source window, she ought to do it explicitly, maybe by using command O.

When s is typed for the first time, or for a PO file entry which is different of the last one used for getting source context, then the command reacts by giving the first context available for this entry, if any. If some context has already been recently displayed for the current PO file entry, and the translator wandered off to do other things, typing s again will merely resume, in another window, the context last displayed. In particular, if the translator moved the cursor away from the context in the source file, the command will bring the cursor back to the context. By using s many times in a row, with no other commands intervening, PO mode will cycle to the next available contexts for this particular entry, getting back to the first context once the last has been shown.

The command M-s behaves differently. Instead of cycling through references, it lets the translator choose a particular reference among many, and displays that reference. It is best used with completion, if the translator types <TAB> immediately after M-s, in response to the question, she will be offered a menu of all possible references, as a reminder of which are the acceptable answers. This command is useful only where there are really many contexts available for a single string to translate.

command po-ignore-source-path, PO Mode command Program source files are usually found relative to where the PO file stands. As a special provision, when this fails, the file is also looked for, but relative to the directory immediately above it. Those two cases take proper care of most PO files. However, it might happen that a PO file has been moved, or is edited in a different place than its normal location. When this happens, the translator should tell PO mode in which directory normally sits the genuine PO file. Many such directories may be specified, and all together, they constitute what is called the search path for program sources. The command S (po-consider-source-path) is used to interactively enter a new directory at the front of the search path, and the command M-S (po-ignore-source-path) is used to select, with completion, one of the directories she does not want anymore on the search path.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

8.3.13 Consultation des fichiers PO auxiliaires

PO mode is able to help the knowledgeable translator, being fluent in many languages, at taking advantage of translations already achieved in other languages she just happens to know. It provides these other language translations as additional context for her own work. Moreover, it has features to ease the production of translations for many languages at once, for translators preferring to work in this way.

meant for the same package the translator is working on, but targeted to a different mother tongue language. Commands exist for declaring and handling auxiliary PO files, and also for showing contexts for the entry under work.

Here are the auxiliary file commands available in PO mode.

a

for the same entry (po-cycle-auxiliary).

C-c C-a

(po-select-auxiliary).

A

(po-consider-as-auxiliary).

M-A

auxiliary files (po-ignore-as-auxiliary).

Mode command po-ignore-as-auxiliary, PO Mode command Command A (po-consider-as-auxiliary) adds the current PO file to the list of auxiliary files, while command M-A (po-ignore-as-auxiliary just removes it.

command The command a (po-cycle-auxiliary) seeks all auxiliary PO files, round-robin, searching for a translated entry in some other language having an msgid field identical as the one for the current entry. The found PO file, if any, takes the place of the current PO file in the display (its window gets on top). Before doing so, the current PO file is also made into an auxiliary file, if not already. So, a in this newly displayed PO file will seek another PO file, and so on, so repeating a will eventually yield back the original PO file.

Mode command The command C-c C-a (po-select-auxiliary) asks the translator for her choice of a particular auxiliary file, with completion, and then switches to that selected PO file. The command also checks if the selected file has an msgid field identical as the one for the current entry, and if yes, this entry becomes current. Otherwise, the cursor of the selected file is left undisturbed.

For all this to work fully, auxiliary PO files will have to be normalized, in that way that msgid fields should be written exactly the same way. It is possible to write msgid fields in various ways for representing the same string, different writing would break the proper behaviour of the auxiliary file commands of PO mode. This is not expected to be much a problem in practice, as most existing PO files have their msgid entries written by the same GNU gettext tools.

by PO mode itself, while marking strings in source files, are normalised differently. So are PO files resulting of the ‘M-x normalize’ command. Until these discrepancies between PO mode and other GNU gettext tools get fully resolved, the translator should stay aware of normalisation issues.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

8.4 Utiliser un compendia de traduction

A compendium is a special PO file containing a set of translations recurring in many different packages. The translator can use gettext tools to build a new compendium, to add entries to her compendium, and to initialize untranslated entries, or to update already translated entries, from translations kept in the compendium.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

8.4.1 Création d'un compendia

Basically every PO file consisting of translated entries only can be declared as a valid compendium. Often the translator wants to have special compendia; let's consider two cases: concatenating PO files and extracting a message subset from a PO file.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

8.4.1.1 Concatenate PO Files

To concatenate several valid PO files into one compendium file you can use ‘msgcomm’ or ‘msgcat’ (the latter preferred):

 
msgcat -o compendium.po file1.po file2.po

By default, msgcat will accumulate divergent translations for the same string. Those occurrences will be marked as fuzzy and highly visible decorated; calling msgcat on ‘file1.po’:

 
#: src/hello.c:200
#, c-format
msgid "Report bugs to <%s>.\n"
msgstr "Comunicar `bugs' a <%s>.\n"

and ‘file2.po’:

 
#: src/bye.c:100
#, c-format
msgid "Report bugs to <%s>.\n"
msgstr "Comunicar \"bugs\" a <%s>.\n"

will result in:

 
#: src/hello.c:200 src/bye.c:100
#, fuzzy, c-format
msgid "Report bugs to <%s>.\n"
msgstr ""
"#-#-#-#-#  file1.po  #-#-#-#-#\n"
"Comunicar `bugs' a <%s>.\n"
"#-#-#-#-#  file2.po  #-#-#-#-#\n"
"Comunicar \"bugs\" a <%s>.\n"

The translator will have to resolve this “conflict” manually; she has to decide whether the first or the second version is appropriate (or provide a new translation), to delete the “marker lines”, and finally to remove the fuzzy mark.

If the translator knows in advance the first found translation of a message is always the best translation she can make use to the ‘--use-first’ switch:

 
msgcat --use-first -o compendium.po file1.po file2.po

A good compendium file must not contain fuzzy or untranslated entries. If input files are “dirty” you must preprocess the input files or postprocess the result using ‘msgattrib --translated --no-fuzzy’.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

8.4.1.2 Extract a Message Subset from a PO File

Nobody wants to translate the same messages again and again; thus you may wish to have a compendium file containing ‘getopt.c’ messages.

To extract a message subset (e.g., all ‘getopt.c’ messages) from an existing PO file into one compendium file you can use ‘msggrep’:

 
msggrep --location src/getopt.c -o compendium.po file.po

[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

8.4.2 Utilisation d'un comendia

You can use a compendium file to initialize a translation from scratch or to update an already existing translation.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

8.4.2.1 Initialize a New Translation File

Since a PO file with translations does not exist the translator can merely use ‘/dev/null’ to fake the “old” translation file.

 
msgmerge --compendium compendium.po -o file.po /dev/null file.pot

[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

8.4.2.2 Update an Existing Translation File

Concatenate the compendium file(s) and the existing PO, merge the result with the POT file and remove the obsolete entries (optional, here done using ‘sed’):

 
msgcat --use-first -o update.po compendium1.po compendium2.po file.po
msgmerge update.po file.pot | msgattrib --no-obsolete > file.po

[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9. La manipulatin d'un fichier PO

Sometimes it is necessary to manipulate PO files in a way that is better performed automatically than by hand. GNU gettext includes a complete set of tools for this purpose.

When merging two packages into a single package, the resulting POT file will be the concatenation of the two packages' POT files. Thus the maintainer must concatenate the two existing package translations into a single translation catalog, for each language. This is best performed using ‘msgcat’. It is then the translators' duty to deal with any possible conflicts that arose during the merge.

When a translator takes over the translation job from another translator, but she uses a different character encoding in her locale, she will convert the catalog to her character encoding. This is best done through the ‘msgconv’ program.

When a maintainer takes a source file with tagged messages from another package, he should also take the existing translations for this source file (and not let the translators do the same job twice). One way to do this is through ‘msggrep’, another is to create a POT file for that source file and use ‘msgmerge’.

When a translator wants to adjust some translation catalog for a special dialect or orthography — for example, German as written in Switzerland versus German as written in Germany — she needs to apply some text processing to every message in the catalog. The tool for doing this is ‘msgfilter’.

Another use of msgfilter is to produce approximately the POT file for which a given PO file was made. This can be done through a filter command like ‘msgfilter sed -e d | sed -e '/^# /d'’. Note that the original POT file may have had different comments and different plural message counts, that's why it's better to use the original POT file if available.

When a translator wants to check her translations, for example according to orthography rules or using a non-interactive spell checker, she can do so using the ‘msgexec’ program.

When third party tools create PO or POT files, sometimes duplicates cannot be avoided. But the GNU gettext tools give an error when they encounter duplicate msgids in the same file and in the same domain. To merge duplicates, the ‘msguniq’ program can be used.

msgcomm’ is a more general tool for keeping or throwing away duplicates, occurring in different files.

msgcmp’ can be used to check whether a translation catalog is completely translated.

msgattrib’ can be used to select and extract only the fuzzy or untranslated messages of a translation catalog.

msgen’ is useful as a first step for preparing English translation catalogs. It copies each message's msgid to its msgstr.

Finally, for those applications where all these various programs are not sufficient, a library ‘libgettextpo’ is provided that can be used to write other specialized programs that process PO files.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.1 Invocation du programme msgcat

 
msgcat [option] [inputfile]...

The msgcat program concatenates and merges the specified PO files. It finds messages which are common to two or more of the specified PO files. By using the --more-than option, greater commonality may be requested before messages are printed. Conversely, the --less-than option may be used to specify less commonality before messages are printed (i.e. ‘--less-than=2’ will only print the unique messages). Translations, comments and extract comments will be cumulated, except that if --use-first is specified, they will be taken from the first PO file to define them. File positions from all PO files will be cumulated.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.1.1 Input file location

inputfile

Input files.

-f file
--files-from=file

Read the names of the input files from file instead of getting them from the command line.

-D directory
--directory=directory

Add directory to the list of directories. Source files are searched relative to this list of directories. The resulting ‘.po’ file will be written relative to the current directory, though.

If inputfile is ‘-’, standard input is read.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.1.2 Output file location

-o file
--output-file=file

Write output to specified file.

The results are written to standard output if no output file is specified or if it is ‘-’.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.1.3 Message selection

-< number
--less-than=number

Print messages with less than number definitions, defaults to infinite if not set.

-> number
--more-than=number

Print messages with more than number definitions, defaults to 0 if not set.

-u
--unique

Shorthand for ‘--less-than=2’. Requests that only unique messages be printed.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.1.4 Input file syntax

-P
--properties-input

Assume the input files are Java ResourceBundles in Java .properties syntax, not in PO file syntax.

--stringtable-input

Assume the input files are NeXTstep/GNUstep localized resource files in .strings syntax, not in PO file syntax.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.1.5 Output details

-t
--to-code=name

Specify encoding for output.

--use-first

Use first available translation for each message. Don't merge several translations into one.

--color
--color=when

Specify whether or when to use colors and other text attributes. See @ref{The --color option} for details.

--style=style_file

Specify the CSS style rule file to use for --color. See @ref{The --style option} for details.

--force-po

Always write an output file even if it contains no message.

-i
--indent

Write the .po file using indented style.

--no-location

Do not write ‘#: filename:line’ lines.

-n
--add-location

Generate ‘#: filename:line’ lines (default).

--strict

Write out a strict Uniforum conforming PO file. Note that this Uniforum format should be avoided because it doesn't support the GNU extensions.

-p
--properties-output

Write out a Java ResourceBundle in Java .properties syntax. Note that this file format doesn't support plural forms and silently drops obsolete messages.

--stringtable-output

Write out a NeXTstep/GNUstep localized resource file in .strings syntax. Note that this file format doesn't support plural forms.

-w number
--width=number

Set the output page width. Long strings in the output files will be split across multiple lines in order to ensure that each line's width (= number of screen columns) is less or equal to the given number.

--no-wrap

Do not break long message lines. Message lines whose width exceeds the output page width will not be split into several lines. Only file reference lines which are wider than the output page width will be split.

-s
--sort-output

Generate sorted output. Note that using this option makes it much harder for the translator to understand each message's context.

-F
--sort-by-file

Sort output by file location.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.1.6 Sortie informative

-h
--help

Display this help and exit.

-V
--version

Output version information and exit.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.2 Invocation du programme msgconv

 
msgconv [option] [inputfile]

The msgconv program converts a translation catalog to a different character encoding.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.2.1 Input file location

inputfile

Input PO file.

-D directory
--directory=directory

Add directory to the list of directories. Source files are searched relative to this list of directories. The resulting ‘.po’ file will be written relative to the current directory, though.

If no inputfile is given or if it is ‘-’, standard input is read.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.2.2 Output file location

-o file
--output-file=file

Write output to specified file.

The results are written to standard output if no output file is specified or if it is ‘-’.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.2.3 Conversion target

-t
--to-code=name

Specify encoding for output.

The default encoding is the current locale's encoding.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.2.4 Input file syntax

-P
--properties-input

Assume the input file is a Java ResourceBundle in Java .properties syntax, not in PO file syntax.

--stringtable-input

Assume the input file is a NeXTstep/GNUstep localized resource file in .strings syntax, not in PO file syntax.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.2.5 Output details

--force-po

Always write an output file even if it contains no message.

-i
--indent

Write the .po file using indented style.

--no-location

Do not write ‘#: filename:line’ lines.

--add-location

Generate ‘#: filename:line’ lines (default).

--strict

Write out a strict Uniforum conforming PO file. Note that this Uniforum format should be avoided because it doesn't support the GNU extensions.

-p
--properties-output

Write out a Java ResourceBundle in Java .properties syntax. Note that this file format doesn't support plural forms and silently drops obsolete messages.

--stringtable-output

Write out a NeXTstep/GNUstep localized resource file in .strings syntax. Note that this file format doesn't support plural forms.

-w number
--width=number

Set the output page width. Long strings in the output files will be split across multiple lines in order to ensure that each line's width (= number of screen columns) is less or equal to the given number.

--no-wrap

Do not break long message lines. Message lines whose width exceeds the output page width will not be split into several lines. Only file reference lines which are wider than the output page width will be split.

-s
--sort-output

Generate sorted output. Note that using this option makes it much harder for the translator to understand each message's context.

-F
--sort-by-file

Sort output by file location.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.2.6 Sortie informative

-h
--help

Display this help and exit.

-V
--version

Output version information and exit.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.3 Invocation du programme msggrep

 
msggrep [option] [inputfile]

The msggrep program extracts all messages of a translation catalog that match a given pattern or belong to some given source files.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.3.1 Input file location

inputfile

Input PO file.

-D directory
--directory=directory

Add directory to the list of directories. Source files are searched relative to this list of directories. The resulting ‘.po’ file will be written relative to the current directory, though.

If no inputfile is given or if it is ‘-’, standard input is read.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.3.2 Output file location

-o file
--output-file=file

Write output to specified file.

The results are written to standard output if no output file is specified or if it is ‘-’.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.3.3 Message selection

 
  [-N sourcefile]... [-M domainname]...
  [-J msgctxt-pattern] [-K msgid-pattern] [-T msgstr-pattern]
  [-C comment-pattern]

A message is selected if

When more than one selection criterion is specified, the set of selected messages is the union of the selected messages of each criterion.

msgctxt-pattern or msgid-pattern or msgstr-pattern syntax:

 
  [-E | -F] [-e pattern | -f file]...

patterns are basic regular expressions by default, or extended regular expressions if -E is given, or fixed strings if -F is given.

-N sourcefile
--location=sourcefile

Select messages extracted from sourcefile. sourcefile can be either a literal file name or a wildcard pattern.

-M domainname
--domain=domainname

Select messages belonging to domain domainname.

-J
--msgctxt

Start of patterns for the msgctxt.

-K
--msgid

Start of patterns for the msgid.

-T
--msgstr

Start of patterns for the msgstr.

-C
--comment

Start of patterns for the translator's comment.

-X
--extracted-comment

Start of patterns for the extracted comments.

-E
--extended-regexp

Specify that pattern is an extended regular expression.

-F
--fixed-strings

Specify that pattern is a set of newline-separated strings.

-e pattern
--regexp=pattern

Use pattern as a regular expression.

-f file
--file=file

Obtain pattern from file.

-i
--ignore-case

Ignore case distinctions.

-v
--invert-match

Output only the messages that do not match any selection criterion, instead of the messages that match a selection criterion.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.3.4 Input file syntax

-P
--properties-input

Assume the input file is a Java ResourceBundle in Java .properties syntax, not in PO file syntax.

--stringtable-input

Assume the input file is a NeXTstep/GNUstep localized resource file in .strings syntax, not in PO file syntax.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.3.5 Output details

--force-po

Always write an output file even if it contains no message.

--indent

Write the .po file using indented style.

--no-location

Do not write ‘#: filename:line’ lines.

--add-location

Generate ‘#: filename:line’ lines (default).

--strict

Write out a strict Uniforum conforming PO file. Note that this Uniforum format should be avoided because it doesn't support the GNU extensions.

-p
--properties-output

Write out a Java ResourceBundle in Java .properties syntax. Note that this file format doesn't support plural forms and silently drops obsolete messages.

--stringtable-output

Write out a NeXTstep/GNUstep localized resource file in .strings syntax. Note that this file format doesn't support plural forms.

-w number
--width=number

Set the output page width. Long strings in the output files will be split across multiple lines in order to ensure that each line's width (= number of screen columns) is less or equal to the given number.

--no-wrap

Do not break long message lines. Message lines whose width exceeds the output page width will not be split into several lines. Only file reference lines which are wider than the output page width will be split.

--sort-output

Generate sorted output. Note that using this option makes it much harder for the translator to understand each message's context.

--sort-by-file

Sort output by file location.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.3.6 Sortie informative

-h
--help

Display this help and exit.

-V
--version

Output version information and exit.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.3.7 Examples

To extract the messages that come from the source files gnulib-lib/error.c and gnulib-lib/getopt.c:

 
msggrep -N gnulib-lib/error.c -N gnulib-lib/getopt.c input.po

To extract the messages that contain the string “Please specify” in the original string:

 
msggrep --msgid -F -e 'Please specify' input.po

To extract the messages that have a context specifier of either “Menu>File” or “Menu>Edit” or a submenu of them:

 
msggrep --msgctxt -E -e '^Menu>(File|Edit)' input.po

To extract the messages whose translation contains one of the strings in the file wordlist.txt:

 
msggrep --msgstr -F -f wordlist.txt input.po

[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.4 Invocation du programme msgfilter

 
msgfilter [option] filter [filter-option]

The msgfilter program applies a filter to all translations of a translation catalog.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.4.1 Input file location

-i inputfile
--input=inputfile

Input PO file.

-D directory
--directory=directory

Add directory to the list of directories. Source files are searched relative to this list of directories. The resulting ‘.po’ file will be written relative to the current directory, though.

If no inputfile is given or if it is ‘-’, standard input is read.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.4.2 Output file location

-o file
--output-file=file

Write output to specified file.

The results are written to standard output if no output file is specified or if it is ‘-’.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.4.3 The filter

The filter can be any program that reads a translation from standard input and writes a modified translation to standard output. A frequently used filter is ‘sed’. A few particular built-in filters are also recognized.

Note: If the filter is not a built-in filter, you have to care about encodings: It is your responsibility to ensure that the filter can cope with input encoded in the translation catalog's encoding. If the filter wants input in a particular encoding, you can in a first step convert the translation catalog to that encoding using the ‘msgconv’ program, before invoking ‘msgfilter’. If the filter wants input in the locale's encoding, but you want to avoid the locale's encoding, then you can first convert the translation catalog to UTF-8 using the ‘msgconv’ program and then make ‘msgfilter’ work in an UTF-8 locale, by using the LC_ALL environment variable.

Note: Most translations in a translation catalog don't end with a newline character. For this reason, it is important that the filter recognizes its last input line even if it ends without a newline, and that it doesn't add an undesired trailing newline at the end. The ‘sed’ program on some platforms is known to ignore the last line of input if it is not terminated with a newline. You can use GNU sed instead; it does not have this limitation.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.4.4 Useful filter-options when the filter is ‘sed

-e script
--expression=script

Add script to the commands to be executed.

-f scriptfile
--file=scriptfile

Add the contents of scriptfile to the commands to be executed.

-n
--quiet
--silent

Suppress automatic printing of pattern space.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.4.5 Built-in filters

The filter ‘recode-sr-latin’ is recognized as a built-in filter. The command ‘recode-sr-latin’ converts Serbian text, written in the Cyrillic script, to the Latin script. The command ‘msgfilter recode-sr-latin’ applies this conversion to the translations of a PO file. Thus, it can be used to convert an ‘sr.po’ file to an ‘sr@latin.po’ file.

The use of built-in filters is not sensitive to the current locale's encoding. Moreover, when used with a built-in filter, ‘msgfilter’ can automatically convert the message catalog to the UTF-8 encoding when needed.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.4.6 Input file syntax

-P
--properties-input

Assume the input file is a Java ResourceBundle in Java .properties syntax, not in PO file syntax.

--stringtable-input

Assume the input file is a NeXTstep/GNUstep localized resource file in .strings syntax, not in PO file syntax.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.4.7 Output details

--force-po

Always write an output file even if it contains no message.

--indent

Write the .po file using indented style.

--keep-header

Keep the header entry, i.e. the message with ‘msgid ""’, unmodified, instead of filtering it. By default, the header entry is subject to filtering like any other message.

--no-location

Do not write ‘#: filename:line’ lines.

--add-location

Generate ‘#: filename:line’ lines (default).

--strict

Write out a strict Uniforum conforming PO file. Note that this Uniforum format should be avoided because it doesn't support the GNU extensions.

-p
--properties-output

Write out a Java ResourceBundle in Java .properties syntax. Note that this file format doesn't support plural forms and silently drops obsolete messages.

--stringtable-output

Write out a NeXTstep/GNUstep localized resource file in .strings syntax. Note that this file format doesn't support plural forms.

-w number
--width=number

Set the output page width. Long strings in the output files will be split across multiple lines in order to ensure that each line's width (= number of screen columns) is less or equal to the given number.

--no-wrap

Do not break long message lines. Message lines whose width exceeds the output page width will not be split into several lines. Only file reference lines which are wider than the output page width will be split.

-s
--sort-output

Generate sorted output. Note that using this option makes it much harder for the translator to understand each message's context.

-F
--sort-by-file

Sort output by file location.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.4.8 Sortie informative

-h
--help

Display this help and exit.

-V
--version

Output version information and exit.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.4.9 Examples

To convert German translations to Swiss orthography (in an UTF-8 locale):

 
msgconv -t UTF-8 de.po | msgfilter sed -e 's/ß/ss/g'

To convert Serbian translations in Cyrillic script to Latin script:

 
msgfilter recode-sr-latin sr.po

[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.5 Invocation du programme msguniq

 
msguniq [option] [inputfile]

The msguniq program unifies duplicate translations in a translation catalog. It finds duplicate translations of the same message ID. Such duplicates are invalid input for other programs like msgfmt, msgmerge or msgcat. By default, duplicates are merged together. When using the ‘--repeated’ option, only duplicates are output, and all other messages are discarded. Comments and extracted comments will be cumulated, except that if ‘--use-first’ is specified, they will be taken from the first translation. File positions will be cumulated. When using the ‘--unique’ option, duplicates are discarded.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.5.1 Input file location

inputfile

Input PO file.

-D directory
--directory=directory

Add directory to the list of directories. Source files are searched relative to this list of directories. The resulting ‘.po’ file will be written relative to the current directory, though.

If no inputfile is given or if it is ‘-’, standard input is read.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.5.2 Output file location

-o file
--output-file=file

Write output to specified file.

The results are written to standard output if no output file is specified or if it is ‘-’.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.5.3 Message selection

-d
--repeated

Print only duplicates.

-u
--unique

Print only unique messages, discard duplicates.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.5.4 Input file syntax

-P
--properties-input

Assume the input file is a Java ResourceBundle in Java .properties syntax, not in PO file syntax.

--stringtable-input

Assume the input file is a NeXTstep/GNUstep localized resource file in .strings syntax, not in PO file syntax.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.5.5 Output details

-t
--to-code=name

Specify encoding for output.

--use-first

Use first available translation for each message. Don't merge several translations into one.

--force-po

Always write an output file even if it contains no message.

-i
--indent

Write the .po file using indented style.

--no-location

Do not write ‘#: filename:line’ lines.

-n
--add-location

Generate ‘#: filename:line’ lines (default).

--strict

Write out a strict Uniforum conforming PO file. Note that this Uniforum format should be avoided because it doesn't support the GNU extensions.

-p
--properties-output

Write out a Java ResourceBundle in Java .properties syntax. Note that this file format doesn't support plural forms and silently drops obsolete messages.

--stringtable-output

Write out a NeXTstep/GNUstep localized resource file in .strings syntax. Note that this file format doesn't support plural forms.

-w number
--width=number

Set the output page width. Long strings in the output files will be split across multiple lines in order to ensure that each line's width (= number of screen columns) is less or equal to the given number.

--no-wrap

Do not break long message lines. Message lines whose width exceeds the output page width will not be split into several lines. Only file reference lines which are wider than the output page width will be split.

-s
--sort-output

Generate sorted output. Note that using this option makes it much harder for the translator to understand each message's context.

-F
--sort-by-file

Sort output by file location.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.5.6 Sortie informative

-h
--help

Display this help and exit.

-V
--version

Output version information and exit.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.6 Invocation du programme msgcomm

 
msgcomm [option] [inputfile]...

The msgcomm program finds messages which are common to two or more of the specified PO files. By using the --more-than option, greater commonality may be requested before messages are printed. Conversely, the --less-than option may be used to specify less commonality before messages are printed (i.e. ‘--less-than=2’ will only print the unique messages). Translations, comments and extract comments will be preserved, but only from the first PO file to define them. File positions from all PO files will be cumulated.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.6.1 Input file location

inputfile

Input files.

-f file
--files-from=file

Read the names of the input files from file instead of getting them from the command line.

-D directory
--directory=directory

Add directory to the list of directories. Source files are searched relative to this list of directories. The resulting ‘.po’ file will be written relative to the current directory, though.

If inputfile is ‘-’, standard input is read.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.6.2 Output file location

-o file
--output-file=file

Write output to specified file.

The results are written to standard output if no output file is specified or if it is ‘-’.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.6.3 Message selection

-< number
--less-than=number

Print messages with less than number definitions, defaults to infinite if not set.

-> number
--more-than=number

Print messages with more than number definitions, defaults to 1 if not set.

-u
--unique

Shorthand for ‘--less-than=2’. Requests that only unique messages be printed.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.6.4 Input file syntax

-P
--properties-input

Assume the input files are Java ResourceBundles in Java .properties syntax, not in PO file syntax.

--stringtable-input

Assume the input files are NeXTstep/GNUstep localized resource files in .strings syntax, not in PO file syntax.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.6.5 Output details

--force-po

Always write an output file even if it contains no message.

-i
--indent

Write the .po file using indented style.

--no-location

Do not write ‘#: filename:line’ lines.

-n
--add-location

Generate ‘#: filename:line’ lines (default).

--strict

Write out a strict Uniforum conforming PO file. Note that this Uniforum format should be avoided because it doesn't support the GNU extensions.

-p
--properties-output

Write out a Java ResourceBundle in Java .properties syntax. Note that this file format doesn't support plural forms and silently drops obsolete messages.

--stringtable-output

Write out a NeXTstep/GNUstep localized resource file in .strings syntax. Note that this file format doesn't support plural forms.

-w number
--width=number

Set the output page width. Long strings in the output files will be split across multiple lines in order to ensure that each line's width (= number of screen columns) is less or equal to the given number.

--no-wrap

Do not break long message lines. Message lines whose width exceeds the output page width will not be split into several lines. Only file reference lines which are wider than the output page width will be split.

-s
--sort-output

Generate sorted output. Note that using this option makes it much harder for the translator to understand each message's context.

-F
--sort-by-file

Sort output by file location.

--omit-header

Don't write header with ‘msgid ""’ entry.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.6.6 Sortie informative

-h
--help

Display this help and exit.

-V
--version

Output version information and exit.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.7 Invocation du programme msgcmp

 
msgcmp [option] def.po ref.pot

The msgcmp program compares two Uniforum style .po files to check that both contain the same set of msgid strings. The def.po file is an existing PO file with the translations. The ref.pot file is the last created PO file, or a PO Template file (generally created by xgettext). This is useful for checking that you have translated each and every message in your program. Where an exact match cannot be found, fuzzy matching is used to produce better diagnostics.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.7.1 Input file location

def.po

Translations.

ref.pot

References to the sources.

-D directory
--directory=directory

Add directory to the list of directories. Source files are searched relative to this list of directories.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.7.2 Operation modifiers

-m
--multi-domain

Apply ref.pot to each of the domains in def.po.

--use-fuzzy

Consider fuzzy messages in the def.po file like translated messages. Note that using this option is usually wrong, because fuzzy messages are exactly those which have not been validated by a human translator.

--use-untranslated

Consider untranslated messages in the def.po file like translated messages. Note that using this option is usually wrong.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.7.3 Input file syntax

-P
--properties-input

Assume the input files are Java ResourceBundles in Java .properties syntax, not in PO file syntax.

--stringtable-input

Assume the input files are NeXTstep/GNUstep localized resource files in .strings syntax, not in PO file syntax.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.7.4 Sortie informative

-h
--help

Display this help and exit.

-V
--version

Output version information and exit.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.8 Invocation du programme msgattrib

 
msgattrib [option] [inputfile]

The msgattrib program filters the messages of a translation catalog according to their attributes, and manipulates the attributes.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.8.1 Input file location

inputfile

Input PO file.

-D directory
--directory=directory

Add directory to the list of directories. Source files are searched relative to this list of directories. The resulting ‘.po’ file will be written relative to the current directory, though.

If no inputfile is given or if it is ‘-’, standard input is read.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.8.2 Output file location

-o file
--output-file=file

Write output to specified file.

The results are written to standard output if no output file is specified or if it is ‘-’.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.8.3 Message selection

--translated

Keep translated messages, remove untranslated messages.

--untranslated

Keep untranslated messages, remove translated messages.

--no-fuzzy

Remove ‘fuzzy’ marked messages.

--only-fuzzy

Keep ‘fuzzy’ marked messages, remove all other messages.

--no-obsolete

Remove obsolete #~ messages.

--only-obsolete

Keep obsolete #~ messages, remove all other messages.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.8.4 Attribute manipulation

Attributes are modified after the message selection/removal has been performed. If the ‘--only-file’ or ‘--ignore-file’ option is specified, the attribute modification is applied only to those messages that are listed in the only-file and not listed in the ignore-file.

--set-fuzzy

Set all messages ‘fuzzy’.

--clear-fuzzy

Set all messages non-‘fuzzy’.

--set-obsolete

Set all messages obsolete.

--clear-obsolete

Set all messages non-obsolete.

--clear-previous

Remove the “previous msgid” (‘#|’) comments from all messages.

--only-file=file

Limit the attribute changes to entries that are listed in file. file should be a PO or POT file.

--ignore-file=file

Limit the attribute changes to entries that are not listed in file. file should be a PO or POT file.

--fuzzy

Synonym for ‘--only-fuzzy --clear-fuzzy’: It keeps only the fuzzy messages and removes their ‘fuzzy’ mark.

--obsolete

Synonym for ‘--only-obsolete --clear-obsolete’: It keeps only the obsolete messages and makes them non-obsolete.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.8.5 Input file syntax

-P
--properties-input

Assume the input file is a Java ResourceBundle in Java .properties syntax, not in PO file syntax.

--stringtable-input

Assume the input file is a NeXTstep/GNUstep localized resource file in .strings syntax, not in PO file syntax.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.8.6 Output details

--force-po

Always write an output file even if it contains no message.

-i
--indent

Write the .po file using indented style.

--no-location

Do not write ‘#: filename:line’ lines.

-n
--add-location

Generate ‘#: filename:line’ lines (default).

--strict

Write out a strict Uniforum conforming PO file. Note that this Uniforum format should be avoided because it doesn't support the GNU extensions.

-p
--properties-output

Write out a Java ResourceBundle in Java .properties syntax. Note that this file format doesn't support plural forms and silently drops obsolete messages.

--stringtable-output

Write out a NeXTstep/GNUstep localized resource file in .strings syntax. Note that this file format doesn't support plural forms.

-w number
--width=number

Set the output page width. Long strings in the output files will be split across multiple lines in order to ensure that each line's width (= number of screen columns) is less or equal to the given number.

--no-wrap

Do not break long message lines. Message lines whose width exceeds the output page width will not be split into several lines. Only file reference lines which are wider than the output page width will be split.

-s
--sort-output

Generate sorted output. Note that using this option makes it much harder for the translator to understand each message's context.

-F
--sort-by-file

Sort output by file location.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.8.7 Sortie informative

-h
--help

Display this help and exit.

-V
--version

Output version information and exit.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.9 Invocation du programme msgen

 
msgen [option] inputfile

The msgen program creates an English translation catalog. The input file is the last created English PO file, or a PO Template file (generally created by xgettext). Untranslated entries are assigned a translation that is identical to the msgid.

Note: ‘msginit --no-translator --locale=en’ performs a very similar task. The main difference is that msginit cares specially about the header entry, whereas msgen doesn't.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.9.1 Input file location

inputfile

Input PO or POT file.

-D directory
--directory=directory

Add directory to the list of directories. Source files are searched relative to this list of directories. The resulting ‘.po’ file will be written relative to the current directory, though.

If inputfile is ‘-’, standard input is read.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.9.2 Output file location

-o file
--output-file=file

Write output to specified file.

The results are written to standard output if no output file is specified or if it is ‘-’.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.9.3 Input file syntax

-P
--properties-input

Assume the input file is a Java ResourceBundle in Java .properties syntax, not in PO file syntax.

--stringtable-input

Assume the input file is a NeXTstep/GNUstep localized resource file in .strings syntax, not in PO file syntax.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.9.4 Output details

--force-po

Always write an output file even if it contains no message.

-i
--indent

Write the .po file using indented style.

--no-location

Do not write ‘#: filename:line’ lines.

--add-location

Generate ‘#: filename:line’ lines (default).

--strict

Write out a strict Uniforum conforming PO file. Note that this Uniforum format should be avoided because it doesn't support the GNU extensions.

-p
--properties-output

Write out a Java ResourceBundle in Java .properties syntax. Note that this file format doesn't support plural forms and silently drops obsolete messages.

--stringtable-output

Write out a NeXTstep/GNUstep localized resource file in .strings syntax. Note that this file format doesn't support plural forms.

-w number
--width=number

Set the output page width. Long strings in the output files will be split across multiple lines in order to ensure that each line's width (= number of screen columns) is less or equal to the given number.

--no-wrap

Do not break long message lines. Message lines whose width exceeds the output page width will not be split into several lines. Only file reference lines which are wider than the output page width will be split.

-s
--sort-output

Generate sorted output. Note that using this option makes it much harder for the translator to understand each message's context.

-F
--sort-by-file

Sort output by file location.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.9.5 Sortie informative

-h
--help

Display this help and exit.

-V
--version

Output version information and exit.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.10 Invocation du programme msgexec

 
msgexec [option] command [command-option]

The msgexec program applies a command to all translations of a translation catalog. The command can be any program that reads a translation from standard input. It is invoked once for each translation. Its output becomes msgexec's output. msgexec's return code is the maximum return code across all invocations.

A special builtin command called ‘0’ outputs the translation, followed by a null byte. The output of ‘msgexec 0’ is suitable as input for ‘xargs -0’.

During each command invocation, the environment variable MSGEXEC_MSGID is bound to the message's msgid, and the environment variable MSGEXEC_LOCATION is bound to the location in the PO file of the message. If the message has a context, the environment variable MSGEXEC_MSGCTXT is bound to the message's msgctxt, otherwise it is unbound.

Note: It is your responsibility to ensure that the command can cope with input encoded in the translation catalog's encoding. If the command wants input in a particular encoding, you can in a first step convert the translation catalog to that encoding using the ‘msgconv’ program, before invoking ‘msgexec’. If the command wants input in the locale's encoding, but you want to avoid the locale's encoding, then you can first convert the translation catalog to UTF-8 using the ‘msgconv’ program and then make ‘msgexec’ work in an UTF-8 locale, by using the LC_ALL environment variable.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.10.1 Input file location

-i inputfile
--input=inputfile

Input PO file.

-D directory
--directory=directory

Add directory to the list of directories. Source files are searched relative to this list of directories. The resulting ‘.po’ file will be written relative to the current directory, though.

If no inputfile is given or if it is ‘-’, standard input is read.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.10.2 Input file syntax

-P
--properties-input

Assume the input file is a Java ResourceBundle in Java .properties syntax, not in PO file syntax.

--stringtable-input

Assume the input file is a NeXTstep/GNUstep localized resource file in .strings syntax, not in PO file syntax.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.10.3 Sortie informative

-h
--help

Display this help and exit.

-V
--version

Output version information and exit.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.11 Mise en surbrillance de parties des fichiers PO

Translators are usually only interested in seeing the untranslated and fuzzy messages of a PO file. Also, when a message is set fuzzy because the msgid changed, they want to see the differences between the previous msgid and the current one (especially if the msgid is long and only few words in it have changed). Finally, it's always welcome to highlight the different sections of a message in a PO file (comments, msgid, msgstr, etc.).

Such highlighting is possible through the msgcat options ‘--color’ and ‘--style’.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.11.1 The --color option

The ‘--color=when’ option specifies under which conditions colorized output should be generated. The when part can be one of the following:

always
yes

The output will be colorized.

never
no

The output will not be colorized.

auto
tty

The output will be colorized if the output device is a tty, i.e. when the output goes directly to a text screen or terminal emulator window.

html

The output will be colorized and be in HTML format.

--color’ is equivalent to ‘--color=yes’. The default is ‘--color=auto’.

Thus, a command like ‘msgcat vi.po’ will produce colorized output when called by itself in a command window. Whereas in a pipe, such as ‘msgcat vi.po | less -R’, it will not produce colorized output. To get colorized output in this situation nevertheless, use the command ‘msgcat --color vi.po | less -R’.

The ‘--color=html’ option will produce output that can be viewed in a browser. This can be useful, for example, for Indic languages, because the renderic of Indic scripts in browser is usually better than in terminal emulators.

Note that the output produced with the --color option is not a valid PO file in itself. It contains additional terminal-specific escape sequences or HTML tags. A PO file reader will give a syntax error when confronted with such content. Except for the ‘--color=html’ case, you therefore normally don't need to save output produced with the --color option in a file.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.11.2 La variable d'environnement TERM

The environment variable TERM contains a identifier for the text window's capabilities. You can get a detailed list of these cababilities by using the ‘infocmp’ command, using ‘man 5 terminfo’ as a reference.

When producing text with embedded color directives, msgcat looks at the TERM variable. Text windows today typically support at least 8 colors. Often, however, the text window supports 16 or more colors, even though the TERM variable is set to a identifier denoting only 8 supported colors. It can be worth setting the TERM variable to a different value in these cases:

xterm

xterm is in most cases built with support for 16 colors. It can also be built with support for 88 or 256 colors (but not both). You can try to set TERM to either xterm-16color, xterm-88color, or xterm-256color.

rxvt

rxvt is often built with support for 16 colors. You can try to set TERM to rxvt-16color.

konsole

konsole too is often built with support for 16 colors. You can try to set TERM to konsole-16color or xterm-16color.

After setting TERM, you can verify it by invoking ‘msgcat --color=test’ and seeing whether the output looks like a reasonable color map.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.11.3 L'option --style

The ‘--style=style_file’ option specifies the style file to use when colorizing. It has an effect only when the --color option is effective.

If the --style option is not specified, the environment variable PO_STYLE is considered. It is meant to point to the user's preferred style for PO files.

The default style file is ‘$prefix/share/gettext/styles/po-default.css’, where $prefix is the installation location.

A few style files are predefined:

po-vim.css

This style imitates the look used by vim 7.

po-emacs-x.css

This style imitates the look used by GNU Emacs 21 and 22 in an X11 window.

po-emacs-xterm.css
po-emacs-xterm16.css
po-emacs-xterm256.css

This style imitates the look used by GNU Emacs 22 in a terminal of type ‘xterm’ (8 colors) or ‘xterm-16color’ (16 colors) or ‘xterm-256color’ (256 colors), respectively.

You can use these styles without specifying a directory. They are actually located in ‘$prefix/share/gettext/styles/’, where $prefix is the installation location.

You can also design your own styles. This is described in the next section.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.11.4 Règle de style des fichiers PO

The same style file can be used for styling of a PO file, for terminal output and for HTML output. It is written in CSS (Cascading Style Sheet) syntax. See http://www.w3.org/TR/css2/cover.html for a formal definition of CSS. Many HTML authoring tutorials also contain explanations of CSS.

In the case of HTML output, the style file is embedded in the HTML output. In the case of text output, the style file is interpreted by the msgcat program. This means, in particular, that when @import is used with relative file names, the file names are

CSS rules are built up from selectors and declarations. The declarations specify graphical properties; the selectors specify specify when they apply.

In PO files, the following simple selectors (based on "CSS classes", see the CSS2 spec, section 5.8.3) are supported.

These selectors can be combined to hierarchical selectors. For example,

 
.msgstr .invalid-format-directive { color: red; }

will highlight the invalid format directives in the translated strings.

In text mode, pseudo-classes (CSS2 spec, section 5.11) and pseudo-elements (CSS2 spec, section 5.12) are not supported.

The declarations in HTML mode are not limited; any graphical attribute supported by the browsers can be used.

The declarations in text mode are limited to the following properties. Other properties will be silently ignored.

color (CSS2 spec, section 14.1)
background-color (CSS2 spec, section 14.2.1)

These properties is supported. Colors will be adjusted to match the terminal's capabilities. Note that many terminals support only 8 colors.

font-weight (CSS2 spec, section 15.2.3)

This property is supported, but most terminals can only render two different weights: normal and bold. Values >= 600 are rendered as bold.

font-style (CSS2 spec, section 15.2.3)

This property is supported. The values italic and oblique are rendered the same way.

text-decoration (CSS2 spec, section 16.3.1)

This property is supported, limited to the values none and underline.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.11.5 Personalisation de less pour visualiser les fichiers PO

The ‘less’ program is a popular text file browser for use in a text screen or terminal emulator. It also supports text with embedded escape sequences for colors and text decorations.

You can use less to view a PO file like this (assuming an UTF-8 environment):

 
msgcat --to-code=UTF-8 --color xyz.po | less -R

You can simplify this to this simple command:

 
less xyz.po

after these three preparations:

  1. Add the options ‘-R’ and ‘-f’ to the LESS environment variable. In sh shells:
     
    $ LESS="$LESS -R -f"
    $ export LESS
    
  2. If your system does not already have the ‘lessopen.sh’ and ‘lessclose.sh’ scripts, create them and set the LESSOPEN and LESSCLOSE environment variables, as indicated in the manual page (‘man less’).
  3. Add to ‘lessopen.sh’ a piece of script that recognizes PO files through their file extension and invokes msgcat on them, producing a temporary file. Like this:
     
    case "$1" in
      *.po)
        tmpfile=`mktemp "${TMPDIR-/tmp}/less.XXXXXX"`
        msgcat --to-code=UTF-8 --color "$1" > "$tmpfile"
        echo "$tmpfile"
        exit 0
        ;;
    esac
    

[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

9.12 Écriture de vos propres programmes qui traitent des fichiers PO

For the tasks for which a combination of ‘msgattrib’, ‘msgcat’ etc. is not sufficient, a set of C functions is provided in a library, to make it possible to process PO files in your own programs. When you use this library, you don't need to write routines to parse the PO file; instead, you retrieve a pointer in memory to each of messages contained in the PO file. Functions for writing PO files are not provided at this time.

The functions are declared in the header file ‘<gettext-po.h>’, and are defined in a library called ‘libgettextpo’.

Data Type: po_file_t

This is a pointer type that refers to the contents of a PO file, after it has been read into memory.

Data Type: po_message_iterator_t

This is a pointer type that refers to an iterator that produces a sequence of messages.

Data Type: po_message_t

This is a pointer type that refers to a message of a PO file, including its translation.

Function: po_file_t po_file_read (const char *filename)

The po_file_read function reads a PO file into memory. The file name is given as argument. The return value is a handle to the PO file's contents, valid until po_file_free is called on it. In case of error, the return value is NULL, and errno is set.

Function: void po_file_free (po_file_t file)

The po_file_free function frees a PO file's contents from memory, including all messages that are only implicitly accessible through iterators.

Function: const char * const * po_file_domains (po_file_t file)

The po_file_domains function returns the domains for which the given PO file has messages. The return value is a NULL terminated array which is valid as long as the file handle is valid. For PO files which contain no ‘domain’ directive, the return value contains only one domain, namely the default domain "messages".

Function: po_message_iterator_t po_message_iterator (po_file_t file, const char *domain)

The po_message_iterator returns an iterator that will produce the messages of file that belong to the given domain. If domain is NULL, the default domain is used instead. To list the messages, use the function po_next_message repeatedly.

Function: void po_message_iterator_free (po_message_iterator_t iterator)

The po_message_iterator_free function frees an iterator previously allocated through the po_message_iterator function.

Function: po_message_t po_next_message (po_message_iterator_t iterator)

The po_next_message function returns the next message from iterator and advances the iterator. It returns NULL when the iterator has reached the end of its message list.

The following functions returns details of a po_message_t. Recall that the results are valid as long as the file handle is valid.

Function: const char * po_message_msgid (po_message_t message)

The po_message_msgid function returns the msgid (untranslated English string) of a message. This is guaranteed to be non-NULL.

Function: const char * po_message_msgid_plural (po_message_t message)

The po_message_msgid_plural function returns the msgid_plural (untranslated English plural string) of a message with plurals, or NULL for a message without plural.

Function: const char * po_message_msgstr (po_message_t message)

The po_message_msgstr function returns the msgstr (translation) of a message. For an untranslated message, the return value is an empty string.

Function: const char * po_message_msgstr_plural (po_message_t message, int index)

The po_message_msgstr_plural function returns the msgstr[index] of a message with plurals, or NULL when the index is out of range or for a message without plural.

Here is an example code how these functions can be used.

 
const char *filename = …;
po_file_t file = po_file_read (filename);

if (file == NULL)
  error (EXIT_FAILURE, errno, "couldn't open the PO file %s", filename);
{
  const char * const *domains = po_file_domains (file);
  const char * const *domainp;

  for (domainp = domains; *domainp; domainp++)
    {
      const char *domain = *domainp;
      po_message_iterator_t iterator = po_message_iterator (file, domain);

      for (;;)
        {
          po_message_t *message = po_next_message (iterator);

          if (message == NULL)
            break;
          {
            const char *msgid = po_message_msgid (message);
            const char *msgstr = po_message_msgstr (message);

            …
          }
        }
      po_message_iterator_free (iterator);
    }
}
po_file_free (file);

[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

10. La production de fichiers binaires MO


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

10.1 Invocation du programme msgfmt

 
msgfmt [option] filename.po …

The msgfmt programs generates a binary message catalog from a textual translation description.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

10.1.1 Input file location

filename.po …
-D directory
--directory=directory

Add directory to the list of directories. Source files are searched relative to this list of directories. The resulting ‘.po’ file will be written relative to the current directory, though.

If an input file is ‘-’, standard input is read.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

10.1.2 Operation mode

-j
--java

Java mode: generate a Java ResourceBundle class.

--java2

Like –java, and assume Java2 (JDK 1.2 or higher).

--csharp

C# mode: generate a .NET .dll file containing a subclass of GettextResourceSet.

--csharp-resources

C# resources mode: generate a .NET ‘.resources’ file.

--tcl

Tcl mode: generate a tcl/msgcat ‘.msg’ file.

--qt

Qt mode: generate a Qt ‘.qm’ file.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

10.1.3 Output file location

-o file
--output-file=file

Write output to specified file.

--strict

Direct the program to work strictly following the Uniforum/Sun implementation. Currently this only affects the naming of the output file. If this option is not given the name of the output file is the same as the domain name. If the strict Uniforum mode is enabled the suffix ‘.mo’ is added to the file name if it is not already present.

We find this behaviour of Sun's implementation rather silly and so by default this mode is not selected.

If the output file is ‘-’, output is written to standard output.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

10.1.4 Output file location in Java mode

-r resource
--resource=resource

Specify the resource name.

-l locale
--locale=locale

Specify the locale name, either a language specification of the form ll or a combined language and country specification of the form ll_CC.

-d directory

Specify the base directory of classes directory hierarchy.

The class name is determined by appending the locale name to the resource name, separated with an underscore. The ‘-d’ option is mandatory. The class is written under the specified directory.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

10.1.5 Output file location in C# mode

-r resource
--resource=resource

Specify the resource name.

-l locale
--locale=locale

Specify the locale name, either a language specification of the form ll or a combined language and country specification of the form ll_CC.

-d directory

Specify the base directory for locale dependent ‘.dll’ files.

The ‘-l’ and ‘-d’ options are mandatory. The ‘.dll’ file is written in a subdirectory of the specified directory whose name depends on the locale.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

10.1.6 Output file location in Tcl mode

-l locale
--locale=locale

Specify the locale name, either a language specification of the form ll or a combined language and country specification of the form ll_CC.

-d directory

Specify the base directory of ‘.msg’ message catalogs.

The ‘-l’ and ‘-d’ options are mandatory. The ‘.msg’ file is written in the specified directory.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

10.1.7 Input file syntax

-P
--properties-input

Assume the input files are Java ResourceBundles in Java .properties syntax, not in PO file syntax.

--stringtable-input

Assume the input files are NeXTstep/GNUstep localized resource files in .strings syntax, not in PO file syntax.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

10.1.8 Input file interpretation

-c
--check

Perform all the checks implied by --check-format, --check-header, --check-domain.

--check-format

Check language dependent format strings.

If the string represents a format string used in a printf-like function both strings should have the same number of ‘%’ format specifiers, with matching types. If the flag c-format or possible-c-format appears in the special comment <#,> for this entry a check is performed. For example, the check will diagnose using ‘%.*s’ against ‘%s’, or ‘%d’ against ‘%s’, or ‘%d’ against ‘%x’. It can even handle positional parameters.

Normally the xgettext program automatically decides whether a string is a format string or not. This algorithm is not perfect, though. It might regard a string as a format string though it is not used in a printf-like function and so msgfmt might report errors where there are none.

To solve this problem the programmer can dictate the decision to the xgettext program (voir la section Format des chaînes en C). The translator should not consider removing the flag from the <#,> line. This "fix" would be reversed again as soon as msgmerge is called the next time.

--check-header

Verify presence and contents of the header entry. @xref{Header Entry}, for a description of the various fields in the header entry.

--check-domain

Check for conflicts between domain directives and the --output-file option

-C
--check-compatibility

Check that GNU msgfmt behaves like X/Open msgfmt. This will give an error when attempting to use the GNU extensions.

--check-accelerators[=char]

Check presence of keyboard accelerators for menu items. This is based on the convention used in some GUIs that a keyboard accelerator in a menu item string is designated by an immediately preceding ‘&’ character. Sometimes a keyboard accelerator is also called "keyboard mnemonic". This check verifies that if the untranslated string has exactly one ‘&’ character, the translated string has exactly one ‘&’ as well. If this option is given with a char argument, this char should be a non-alphanumeric character and is used as keyboard accelerator mark instead of ‘&’.

-f
--use-fuzzy

Use fuzzy entries in output. Note that using this option is usually wrong, because fuzzy messages are exactly those which have not been validated by a human translator.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

10.1.9 Output details

-a number
--alignment=number

Align strings to number bytes (default: 1).

--no-hash

Don't include a hash table in the binary file. Lookup will be more expensive at run time (binary search instead of hash table lookup).


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

10.1.10 Sortie informative

-h
--help

Display this help and exit.

-V
--version

Output version information and exit.

--statistics

Print statistics about translations.

-v
--verbose

Increase verbosity level.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

10.2 Invocation du programme msgunfmt

 
msgunfmt [option] [file]...

The msgunfmt program converts a binary message catalog to a Uniforum style .po file.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

10.2.1 Operation mode

-j
--java

Java mode: input is a Java ResourceBundle class.

--csharp

C# mode: input is a .NET .dll file containing a subclass of GettextResourceSet.

--csharp-resources

C# resources mode: input is a .NET ‘.resources’ file.

--tcl

Tcl mode: input is a tcl/msgcat ‘.msg’ file.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

10.2.2 Input file location

file

Input .mo files.

If no input file is given or if it is ‘-’, standard input is read.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

10.2.3 Input file location in Java mode

-r resource
--resource=resource

Specify the resource name.

-l locale
--locale=locale

Specify the locale name, either a language specification of the form ll or a combined language and country specification of the form ll_CC.

The class name is determined by appending the locale name to the resource name, separated with an underscore. The class is located using the CLASSPATH.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

10.2.4 Input file location in C# mode

-r resource
--resource=resource

Specify the resource name.

-l locale
--locale=locale

Specify the locale name, either a language specification of the form ll or a combined language and country specification of the form ll_CC.

-d directory

Specify the base directory for locale dependent ‘.dll’ files.

The ‘-l’ and ‘-d’ options are mandatory. The ‘.msg’ file is located in a subdirectory of the specified directory whose name depends on the locale.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

10.2.5 Input file location in Tcl mode

-l locale
--locale=locale

Specify the locale name, either a language specification of the form ll or a combined language and country specification of the form ll_CC.

-d directory

Specify the base directory of ‘.msg’ message catalogs.

The ‘-l’ and ‘-d’ options are mandatory. The ‘.msg’ file is located in the specified directory.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

10.2.6 Output file location

-o file
--output-file=file

Write output to specified file.

The results are written to standard output if no output file is specified or if it is ‘-’.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

10.2.7 Output details

--force-po

Always write an output file even if it contains no message.

-i
--indent

Write the .po file using indented style.

--strict

Write out a strict Uniforum conforming PO file. Note that this Uniforum format should be avoided because it doesn't support the GNU extensions.

-p
--properties-output

Write out a Java ResourceBundle in Java .properties syntax. Note that this file format doesn't support plural forms and silently drops obsolete messages.

--stringtable-output

Write out a NeXTstep/GNUstep localized resource file in .strings syntax. Note that this file format doesn't support plural forms.

-w number
--width=number

Set the output page width. Long strings in the output files will be split across multiple lines in order to ensure that each line's width (= number of screen columns) is less or equal to the given number.

--no-wrap

Do not break long message lines. Message lines whose width exceeds the output page width will not be split into several lines. Only file reference lines which are wider than the output page width will be split.

-s
--sort-output

Generate sorted output. Note that using this option makes it much harder for the translator to understand each message's context.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

10.2.8 Sortie informative

-h
--help

Display this help and exit.

-V
--version

Output version information and exit.

-v
--verbose

Increase verbosity level.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

10.3 Le format des fichiers GNU MO

The format of the generated MO files is best described by a picture, which appears below.

The first two words serve the identification of the file. The magic number will always signal GNU MO files. The number is stored in the byte order of the generating machine, so the magic number really is two numbers: 0x950412de and 0xde120495. The second word describes the current revision of the file format. For now the revision is 0. This might change in future versions, and ensures that the readers of MO files can distinguish new formats from old ones, so that both can be handled correctly. The version is kept separate from the magic number, instead of using different magic numbers for different formats, mainly because ‘/etc/magic’ is not updated often. It might be better to have magic separated from internal format version identification.

Follow a number of pointers to later tables in the file, allowing for the extension of the prefix part of MO files without having to recompile programs reading them. This might become useful for later inserting a few flag bits, indication about the charset used, new tables, or other things.

Then, at offset O and offset T in the picture, two tables of string descriptors can be found. In both tables, each string descriptor uses two 32 bits integers, one for the string length, another for the offset of the string in the MO file, counting in bytes from the start of the file. The first table contains descriptors for the original strings, and is sorted so the original strings are in increasing lexicographical order. The second table contains descriptors for the translated strings, and is parallel to the first table: to find the corresponding translation one has to access the array slot in the second array with the same index.

Having the original strings sorted enables the use of simple binary search, for when the MO file does not contain an hashing table, or for when it is not practical to use the hashing table provided in the MO file. This also has another advantage, as the empty string in a PO file GNU gettext is usually translated into some system information attached to that particular MO file, and the empty string necessarily becomes the first in both the original and translated tables, making the system information very easy to find.

The size S of the hash table can be zero. In this case, the hash table itself is not contained in the MO file. Some people might prefer this because a precomputed hashing table takes disk space, and does not win that much speed. The hash table contains indices to the sorted array of strings in the MO file. Conflict resolution is done by double hashing. The precise hashing algorithm used is fairly dependent on GNU gettext code, and is not documented here.

As for the strings themselves, they follow the hash file, and each is terminated with a <NUL>, and this <NUL> is not counted in the length which appears in the string descriptor. The msgfmt program has an option selecting the alignment for MO file strings. With this option, each string is separately aligned so it starts at an offset which is a multiple of the alignment value. On some RISC machines, a correct alignment will speed things up.

Contexts are stored by storing the concatenation of the context, a <EOT> byte, and the original string, instead of the original string.

Plural forms are stored by letting the plural of the original string follow the singular of the original string, separated through a <NUL> byte. The length which appears in the string descriptor includes both. However, only the singular of the original string takes part in the hash table lookup. The plural variants of the translation are all stored consecutively, separated through a <NUL> byte. Here also, the length in the string descriptor includes all of them.

Nothing prevents a MO file from having embedded <NUL>s in strings. However, the program interface currently used already presumes that strings are <NUL> terminated, so embedded <NUL>s are somewhat useless. But the MO file format is general enough so other interfaces would be later possible, if for example, we ever want to implement wide characters right in MO files, where <NUL> bytes may accidentally appear. (No, we don't want to have wide characters in MO files. They would make the file unnecessarily large, and the ‘wchar_t’ type being platform dependent, MO files would be platform dependent as well.)

This particular issue has been strongly debated in the GNU gettext development forum, and it is expectable that MO file format will evolve or change over time. It is even possible that many formats may later be supported concurrently. But surely, we have to start somewhere, and the MO file format described here is a good start. Nothing is cast in concrete, and the format may later evolve fairly easily, so we should feel comfortable with the current approach.

 
        byte
             +------------------------------------------+
          0  | magic number = 0x950412de                |
             |                                          |
          4  | file format revision = 0                 |
             |                                          |
          8  | number of strings                        |  == N
             |                                          |
         12  | offset of table with original strings    |  == O
             |                                          |
         16  | offset of table with translation strings |  == T
             |                                          |
         20  | size of hashing table                    |  == S
             |                                          |
         24  | offset of hashing table                  |  == H
             |                                          |
             .                                          .
             .    (possibly more entries later)         .
             .                                          .
             |                                          |
          O  | length & offset 0th string  ----------------.
      O + 8  | length & offset 1st string  ------------------.
              ...                                    ...   | |
O + ((N-1)*8)| length & offset (N-1)th string           |  | |
             |                                          |  | |
          T  | length & offset 0th translation  ---------------.
      T + 8  | length & offset 1st translation  -----------------.
              ...                                    ...   | | | |
T + ((N-1)*8)| length & offset (N-1)th translation      |  | | | |
             |                                          |  | | | |
          H  | start hash table                         |  | | | |
              ...                                    ...   | | | |
  H + S * 4  | end hash table                           |  | | | |
             |                                          |  | | | |
             | NUL terminated 0th string  <----------------' | | |
             |                                          |    | | |
             | NUL terminated 1st string  <------------------' | |
             |                                          |      | |
              ...                                    ...       | |
             |                                          |      | |
             | NUL terminated 0th translation  <---------------' |
             |                                          |        |
             | NUL terminated 1st translation  <-----------------'
             |                                          |
              ...                                    ...
             |                                          |
             +------------------------------------------+

[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

11. Le point de vue du programmeur

One aim of the current message catalog implementation provided by GNU gettext was to use the system's message catalog handling, if the installer wishes to do so. So we perhaps should first take a look at the solutions we know about. The people in the POSIX committee did not manage to agree on one of the semi-official standards which we'll describe below. In fact they couldn't agree on anything, so they decided only to include an example of an interface. The major Unix vendors are split in the usage of the two most important specifications: X/Open's catgets vs. Uniforum's gettext interface. We'll describe them both and later explain our solution of this dilemma.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

11.1 À propos de catgets

The catgets implementation is defined in the X/Open Portability Guide, Volume 3, XSI Supplementary Definitions, Chapter 5. But the process of creating this standard seemed to be too slow for some of the Unix vendors so they created their implementations on preliminary versions of the standard. Of course this leads again to problems while writing platform independent programs: even the usage of catgets does not guarantee a unique interface.

Another, personal comment on this that only a bunch of committee members could have made this interface. They never really tried to program using this interface. It is a fast, memory-saving implementation, an user can happily live with it. But programmers hate it (at least I and some others do…)

But we must not forget one point: after all the trouble with transferring the rights on Unix(tm) they at last came to X/Open, the very same who published this specification. This leads me to making the prediction that this interface will be in future Unix standards (e.g. Spec1170) and therefore part of all Unix implementation (implementations, which are allowed to wear this name).


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

11.1.1 The Interface

The interface to the catgets implementation consists of three functions which correspond to those used in file access: catopen to open the catalog for using, catgets for accessing the message tables, and catclose for closing after work is done. Prototypes for the functions and the needed definitions are in the <nl_types.h> header file.

catopen is used like in this:

 
nl_catd catd = catopen ("catalog_name", 0);

The function takes as the argument the name of the catalog. This usual refers to the name of the program or the package. The second parameter is not further specified in the standard. I don't even know whether it is implemented consistently among various systems. So the common advice is to use 0 as the value. The return value is a handle to the message catalog, equivalent to handles to file returned by open.

This handle is of course used in the catgets function which can be used like this:

 
char *translation = catgets (catd, set_no, msg_id, "original string");

The first parameter is this catalog descriptor. The second parameter specifies the set of messages in this catalog, in which the message described by msg_id is obtained. catgets therefore uses a three-stage addressing:

 
catalog name ⇒ set number ⇒ message ID ⇒ translation

The fourth argument is not used to address the translation. It is given as a default value in case when one of the addressing stages fail. One important thing to remember is that although the return type of catgets is char * the resulting string must not be changed. It should better be const char *, but the standard is published in 1988, one year before ANSI C.

The last of these functions is used and behaves as expected:

 
catclose (catd);

After this no catgets call using the descriptor is legal anymore.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

11.1.2 Problems with the catgets Interface?!

Now that this description seemed to be really easy — where are the problems we speak of? In fact the interface could be used in a reasonable way, but constructing the message catalogs is a pain. The reason for this lies in the third argument of catgets: the unique message ID. This has to be a numeric value for all messages in a single set. Perhaps you could imagine the problems keeping such a list while changing the source code. Add a new message here, remove one there. Of course there have been developed a lot of tools helping to organize this chaos but one as the other fails in one aspect or the other. We don't want to say that the other approach has no problems but they are far more easy to manage.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

11.2 À propos de gettext

The definition of the gettext interface comes from a Uniforum proposal. It was submitted there by Sun, who had implemented the gettext function in SunOS 4, around 1990. Nowadays, the gettext interface is specified by the OpenI18N standard.

The main point about this solution is that it does not follow the method of normal file handling (open-use-close) and that it does not burden the programmer with so many tasks, especially the unique key handling. Of course here also a unique key is needed, but this key is the message itself (how long or short it is). See @ref{Comparison} for a more detailed comparison of the two methods.

The following section contains a rather detailed description of the interface. We make it that detailed because this is the interface we chose for the GNU gettext Library. Programmers interested in using this library will be interested in this description.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

11.2.1 The Interface

The minimal functionality an interface must have is a) to select a domain the strings are coming from (a single domain for all programs is not reasonable because its construction and maintenance is difficult, perhaps impossible) and b) to access a string in a selected domain.

This is principally the description of the gettext interface. It has a global domain which unqualified usages reference. Of course this domain is selectable by the user.

 
char *textdomain (const char *domain_name);

This provides the possibility to change or query the current status of the current global domain of the LC_MESSAGE category. The argument is a null-terminated string, whose characters must be legal in the use in filenames. If the domain_name argument is NULL, the function returns the current value. If no value has been set before, the name of the default domain is returned: messages. Please note that although the return value of textdomain is of type char * no changing is allowed. It is also important to know that no checks of the availability are made. If the name is not available you will see this by the fact that no translations are provided.

To use a domain set by textdomain the function

 
char *gettext (const char *msgid);

is to be used. This is the simplest reasonable form one can imagine. The translation of the string msgid is returned if it is available in the current domain. If it is not available, the argument itself is returned. If the argument is NULL the result is undefined.

One thing which should come into mind is that no explicit dependency to the used domain is given. The current value of the domain is used. If this changes between two executions of the same gettext call in the program, both calls reference a different message catalog.

For the easiest case, which is normally used in internationalized packages, once at the beginning of execution a call to textdomain is issued, setting the domain to a unique name, normally the package name. In the following code all strings which have to be translated are filtered through the gettext function. That's all, the package speaks your language.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

11.2.2 Solving Ambiguities

While this single name domain works well for most applications there might be the need to get translations from more than one domain. Of course one could switch between different domains with calls to textdomain, but this is really not convenient nor is it fast. A possible situation could be one case subject to discussion during this writing: all error messages of functions in the set of common used functions should go into a separate domain error. By this mean we would only need to translate them once. Another case are messages from a library, as these have to be independent of the current domain set by the application.

For this reasons there are two more functions to retrieve strings:

 
char *dgettext (const char *domain_name, const char *msgid);
char *dcgettext (const char *domain_name, const char *msgid,
                 int category);

Both take an additional argument at the first place, which corresponds to the argument of textdomain. The third argument of dcgettext allows to use another locale category but LC_MESSAGES. But I really don't know where this can be useful. If the domain_name is NULL or category has an value beside the known ones, the result is undefined. It should also be noted that this function is not part of the second known implementation of this function family, the one found in Solaris.

A second ambiguity can arise by the fact, that perhaps more than one domain has the same name. This can be solved by specifying where the needed message catalog files can be found.

 
char *bindtextdomain (const char *domain_name,
                      const char *dir_name);

Calling this function binds the given domain to a file in the specified directory (how this file is determined follows below). Especially a file in the systems default place is not favored against the specified file anymore (as it would be by solely using textdomain). A NULL pointer for the dir_name parameter returns the binding associated with domain_name. If domain_name itself is NULL nothing happens and a NULL pointer is returned. Here again as for all the other functions is true that none of the return value must be changed!

It is important to remember that relative path names for the dir_name parameter can be trouble. Since the path is always computed relative to the current directory different results will be achieved when the program executes a chdir command. Relative paths should always be avoided to avoid dependencies and unreliabilities.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

11.2.3 Locating Message Catalog Files

Because many different languages for many different packages have to be stored we need some way to add these information to file message catalog files. The way usually used in Unix environments is have this encoding in the file name. This is also done here. The directory name given in bindtextdomains second argument (or the default directory), followed by the name of the locale, the locale category, and the domain name are concatenated:

 
dir_name/locale/LC_category/domain_name.mo

The default value for dir_name is system specific. For the GNU library, and for packages adhering to its conventions, it's:

 
/usr/local/share/locale

locale is the name of the locale category which is designated by LC_category. For gettext and dgettext this LC_category is always LC_MESSAGES.(3) The name of the locale category is determined through setlocale (LC_category, NULL). (4) When using the function dcgettext, you can specify the locale category through the third argument.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

11.2.4 How to specify the output character set gettext uses

gettext not only looks up a translation in a message catalog. It also converts the translation on the fly to the desired output character set. This is useful if the user is working in a different character set than the translator who created the message catalog, because it avoids distributing variants of message catalogs which differ only in the character set.

The output character set is, by default, the value of nl_langinfo (CODESET), which depends on the LC_CTYPE part of the current locale. But programs which store strings in a locale independent way (e.g. UTF-8) can request that gettext and related functions return the translations in that encoding, by use of the bind_textdomain_codeset function.

Note that the msgid argument to gettext is not subject to character set conversion. Also, when gettext does not find a translation for msgid, it returns msgid unchanged – independently of the current output character set. It is therefore recommended that all msgids be US-ASCII strings.

Function: char * bind_textdomain_codeset (const char *domainname, const char *codeset)

The bind_textdomain_codeset function can be used to specify the output character set for message catalogs for domain domainname. The codeset argument must be a valid codeset name which can be used for the iconv_open function, or a null pointer.

If the codeset parameter is the null pointer, bind_textdomain_codeset returns the currently selected codeset for the domain with the name domainname. It returns NULL if no codeset has yet been selected.

The bind_textdomain_codeset function can be used several times. If used multiple times with the same domainname argument, the later call overrides the settings made by the earlier one.

The bind_textdomain_codeset function returns a pointer to a string containing the name of the selected codeset. The string is allocated internally in the function and must not be changed by the user. If the system went out of core during the execution of bind_textdomain_codeset, the return value is NULL and the global variable errno is set accordingly.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

11.2.5 Using contexts for solving ambiguities

One place where the gettext functions, if used normally, have big problems is within programs with graphical user interfaces (GUIs). The problem is that many of the strings which have to be translated are very short. They have to appear in pull-down menus which restricts the length. But strings which are not containing entire sentences or at least large fragments of a sentence may appear in more than one situation in the program but might have different translations. This is especially true for the one-word strings which are frequently used in GUI programs.

As a consequence many people say that the gettext approach is wrong and instead catgets should be used which indeed does not have this problem. But there is a very simple and powerful method to handle this kind of problems with the gettext functions.

Contexts can be added to strings to be translated. A context dependent translation lookup is when a translation for a given string is searched, that is limited to a given context. The translation for the same string in a different context can be different. The different translations of the same string in different contexts can be stored in the in the same MO file, and can be edited by the translator in the same PO file.

The ‘gettext.h’ include file contains the lookup macros for strings with contexts. They are implemented as thin macros and inline functions over the functions from <libintl.h>.

 
const char *pgettext (const char *msgctxt, const char *msgid);

In a call of this macro, msgctxt and msgid must be string literals. The macro returns the translation of msgid, restricted to the context given by msgctxt.

The msgctxt string is visible in the PO file to the translator. You should try to make it somehow canonical and never changing. Because every time you change an msgctxt, the translator will have to review the translation of msgid.

Finding a canonical msgctxt string that doesn't change over time can be hard. But you shouldn't use the file name or class name containing the pgettext call – because it is a common development task to rename a file or a class, and it shouldn't cause translator work. Also you shouldn't use a comment in the form of a complete English sentence as msgctxt – because orthography or grammar changes are often applied to such sentences, and again, it shouldn't force the translator to do a review.

The ‘p’ in ‘pgettext’ stands for “particular”: pgettext fetches a particular translation of the msgid.

 
const char *dpgettext (const char *domain_name,
                       const char *msgctxt, const char *msgid);
const char *dcpgettext (const char *domain_name,
                        const char *msgctxt, const char *msgid,
                        int category);

These are generalizations of pgettext. They behave similarly to dgettext and dcgettext, respectively. The domain_name argument defines the translation domain. The category argument allows to use another locale category than LC_MESSAGES.

As as example consider the following fictional situation. A GUI program has a menu bar with the following entries:

 
+------------+------------+--------------------------------------+
| File       | Printer    |                                      |
+------------+------------+--------------------------------------+
| Open     | | Select   |
| New      | | Open     |
+----------+ | Connect  |
             +----------+

To have the strings File, Printer, Open, New, Select, and Connect translated there has to be at some point in the code a call to a function of the gettext family. But in two places the string passed into the function would be Open. The translations might not be the same and therefore we are in the dilemma described above.

What distinguishes the two places is the menu path from the menu root to the particular menu entries:

 
Menu|File
Menu|Printer
Menu|File|Open
Menu|File|New
Menu|Printer|Select
Menu|Printer|Open
Menu|Printer|Connect

The context is thus the menu path without its last part. So, the calls look like this:

 
pgettext ("Menu|", "File")
pgettext ("Menu|", "Printer")
pgettext ("Menu|File|", "Open")
pgettext ("Menu|File|", "New")
pgettext ("Menu|Printer|", "Select")
pgettext ("Menu|Printer|", "Open")
pgettext ("Menu|Printer|", "Connect")

Whether or not to use the ‘|’ character at the end of the context is a matter of style.

For more complex cases, where the msgctxt or msgid are not string literals, more general macros are available:

 
const char *pgettext_expr (const char *msgctxt, const char *msgid);
const char *dpgettext_expr (const char *domain_name,
                            const char *msgctxt, const char *msgid);
const char *dcpgettext_expr (const char *domain_name,
                             const char *msgctxt, const char *msgid,
                             int category);

Here msgctxt and msgid can be arbitrary string-valued expressions. These macros are more general. But in the case that both argument expressions are string literals, the macros without the ‘_expr’ suffix are more efficient.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

11.2.6 Additional functions for plural forms

The functions of the gettext family described so far (and all the catgets functions as well) have one problem in the real world which have been neglected completely in all existing approaches. What is meant here is the handling of plural forms.

Looking through Unix source code before the time anybody thought about internationalization (and, sadly, even afterwards) one can often find code similar to the following:

 
   printf ("%d file%s deleted", n, n == 1 ? "" : "s");

After the first complaints from people internationalizing the code people either completely avoided formulations like this or used strings like "file(s)". Both look unnatural and should be avoided. First tries to solve the problem correctly looked like this:

 
   if (n == 1)
     printf ("%d file deleted", n);
   else
     printf ("%d files deleted", n);

But this does not solve the problem. It helps languages where the plural form of a noun is not simply constructed by adding an ‘s’ but that is all. Once again people fell into the trap of believing the rules their language is using are universal. But the handling of plural forms differs widely between the language families. For example, Rafal Maszkowski <rzm@mat.uni.torun.pl> reports:

In Polish we use e.g. plik (file) this way:

 
1 plik
2,3,4 pliki
5-21 pliko'w
22-24 pliki
25-31 pliko'w

and so on (o' means 8859-2 oacute which should be rather okreska, similar to aogonek).

There are two things which can differ between languages (and even inside language families);

The consequence of this is that application writers should not try to solve the problem in their code. This would be localization since it is only usable for certain, hardcoded language environments. Instead the extended gettext interface should be used.

These extra functions are taking instead of the one key string two strings and a numerical argument. The idea behind this is that using the numerical argument and the first string as a key, the implementation can select using rules specified by the translator the right plural form. The two string arguments then will be used to provide a return value in case no message catalog is found (similar to the normal gettext behavior). In this case the rules for Germanic language is used and it is assumed that the first string argument is the singular form, the second the plural form.

This has the consequence that programs without language catalogs can display the correct strings only if the program itself is written using a Germanic language. This is a limitation but since the GNU C library (as well as the GNU gettext package) are written as part of the GNU package and the coding standards for the GNU project require program being written in English, this solution nevertheless fulfills its purpose.

Function: char * ngettext (const char *msgid1, const char *msgid2, unsigned long int n)

The ngettext function is similar to the gettext function as it finds the message catalogs in the same way. But it takes two extra arguments. The msgid1 parameter must contain the singular form of the string to be converted. It is also used as the key for the search in the catalog. The msgid2 parameter is the plural form. The parameter n is used to determine the plural form. If no message catalog is found msgid1 is returned if n == 1, otherwise msgid2.

An example for the use of this function is:

 
printf (ngettext ("%d file removed", "%d files removed", n), n);

Please note that the numeric value n has to be passed to the printf function as well. It is not sufficient to pass it only to ngettext.

In the English singular case, the number – always 1 – can be replaced with "one":

 
printf (ngettext ("One file removed", "%d files removed", n), n);

This works because the ‘printf’ function discards excess arguments that are not consumed by the format string.

It is also possible to use this function when the strings don't contain a cardinal number:

 
puts (ngettext ("Delete the selected file?",
                "Delete the selected files?",
                n));

In this case the number n is only used to choose the plural form.

Function: char * dngettext (const char *domain, const char *msgid1, const char *msgid2, unsigned long int n)

The dngettext is similar to the dgettext function in the way the message catalog is selected. The difference is that it takes two extra parameter to provide the correct plural form. These two parameters are handled in the same way ngettext handles them.

Function: char * dcngettext (const char *domain, const char *msgid1, const char *msgid2, unsigned long int n, int category)

The dcngettext is similar to the dcgettext function in the way the message catalog is selected. The difference is that it takes two extra parameter to provide the correct plural form. These two parameters are handled in the same way ngettext handles them.

Now, how do these functions solve the problem of the plural forms? Without the input of linguists (which was not available) it was not possible to determine whether there are only a few different forms in which plural forms are formed or whether the number can increase with every new supported language.

Therefore the solution implemented is to allow the translator to specify the rules of how to select the plural form. Since the formula varies with every language this is the only viable solution except for hardcoding the information in the code (which still would require the possibility of extensions to not prevent the use of new languages).

header The information about the plural form selection has to be stored in the header entry of the PO file (the one with the empty msgid string). The plural form information looks like this:

 
Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n == 1 ? 0 : 1;

The nplurals value must be a decimal number which specifies how many different plural forms exist for this language. The string following plural is an expression which is using the C language syntax. Exceptions are that no negative numbers are allowed, numbers must be decimal, and the only variable allowed is n. Spaces are allowed in the expression, but backslash-newlines are not; in the examples below the backslash-newlines are present for formatting purposes only. This expression will be evaluated whenever one of the functions ngettext, dngettext, or dcngettext is called. The numeric value passed to these functions is then substituted for all uses of the variable n in the expression. The resulting value then must be greater or equal to zero and smaller than the value given as the value of nplurals.

The following rules are known at this point. The language with families are listed. But this does not necessarily mean the information can be generalized for the whole family (as can be easily seen in the table below).(5)

Only one form:

Some languages only require one single form. There is no distinction between the singular and plural form. An appropriate header entry would look like this:

 
Plural-Forms: nplurals=1; plural=0;

Languages with this property include:

Asian family

Japanese, Korean, Vietnamese

Turkic/Altaic family

Turkish

Two forms, singular used for one only

This is the form used in most existing programs since it is what English is using. A header entry would look like this:

 
Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n != 1;

(Note: this uses the feature of C expressions that boolean expressions have to value zero or one.)

Languages with this property include:

Germanic family

Danish, Dutch, English, Faroese, German, Norwegian, Swedish

Finno-Ugric family

Estonian, Finnish

Latin/Greek family

Greek

Semitic family

Hebrew

Romanic family

Italian, Portuguese, Spanish

Artificial

Esperanto

Another language using the same header entry is:

Finno-Ugric family

Hungarian

Hungarian does not appear to have a plural if you look at sentences involving cardinal numbers. For example, “1 apple” is “1 alma”, and “123 apples” is “123 alma”. But when the number is not explicit, the distinction between singular and plural exists: “the apple” is “az alma”, and “the apples” is “az almák”. Since ngettext has to support both types of sentences, it is classified here, under “two forms”.

Two forms, singular used for zero and one

Exceptional case in the language family. The header entry would be:

 
Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n>1;

Languages with this property include:

Romanic family

French, Brazilian Portuguese

Three forms, special case for zero

The header entry would be:

 
Plural-Forms: nplurals=3; plural=n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 0 : n != 0 ? 1 : 2;

Languages with this property include:

Baltic family

Latvian

Three forms, special cases for one and two

The header entry would be:

 
Plural-Forms: nplurals=3; plural=n==1 ? 0 : n==2 ? 1 : 2;

Languages with this property include:

Celtic

Gaeilge (Irish)

Three forms, special case for numbers ending in 00 or [2-9][0-9]

The header entry would be:

 
Plural-Forms: nplurals=3; \
    plural=n==1 ? 0 : (n==0 || (n%100 > 0 && n%100 < 20)) ? 1 : 2;

Languages with this property include:

Romanic family

Romanian

Three forms, special case for numbers ending in 1[2-9]

The header entry would look like this:

 
Plural-Forms: nplurals=3; \
    plural=n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 0 : \
           n%10>=2 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 1 : 2;

Languages with this property include:

Baltic family

Lithuanian

Three forms, special cases for numbers ending in 1 and 2, 3, 4, except those ending in 1[1-4]

The header entry would look like this:

 
Plural-Forms: nplurals=3; \
    plural=n%10==1 && n%100!=11 ? 0 : \
           n%10>=2 && n%10<=4 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 1 : 2;

Languages with this property include:

Slavic family

Croatian, Serbian, Russian, Ukrainian

Three forms, special cases for 1 and 2, 3, 4

The header entry would look like this:

 
Plural-Forms: nplurals=3; \
    plural=(n==1) ? 0 : (n>=2 && n<=4) ? 1 : 2;

Languages with this property include:

Slavic family

Slovak, Czech

Three forms, special case for one and some numbers ending in 2, 3, or 4

The header entry would look like this:

 
Plural-Forms: nplurals=3; \
    plural=n==1 ? 0 : \
           n%10>=2 && n%10<=4 && (n%100<10 || n%100>=20) ? 1 : 2;

Languages with this property include:

Slavic family

Polish

Four forms, special case for one and all numbers ending in 02, 03, or 04

The header entry would look like this:

 
Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; \
    plural=n%100==1 ? 0 : n%100==2 ? 1 : n%100==3 || n%100==4 ? 2 : 3;

Languages with this property include:

Slavic family

Slovenian

You might now ask, ngettext handles only numbers n of type ‘unsigned long’. What about larger integer types? What about negative numbers? What about floating-point numbers?

About larger integer types, such as ‘uintmax_t’ or ‘unsigned long long’: they can be handled by reducing the value to a range that fits in an ‘unsigned long’. Simply casting the value to ‘unsigned long’ would not do the right thing, since it would treat ULONG_MAX + 1 like zero, ULONG_MAX + 2 like singular, and the like. Here you can exploit the fact that all mentioned plural form formulas eventually become periodic, with a period that is a divisor of 100 (or 1000 or 1000000). So, when you reduce a large value to another one in the range [1000000, 1999999] that ends in the same 6 decimal digits, you can assume that it will lead to the same plural form selection. This code does this:

 
#include <inttypes.h>
uintmax_t nbytes = ...;
printf (ngettext ("The file has %"PRIuMAX" byte.",
                  "The file has %"PRIuMAX" bytes.",
                  (nbytes > ULONG_MAX
                   ? (nbytes % 1000000) + 1000000
                   : nbytes)),
        nbytes);

Negative and floating-point values usually represent physical entities for which singular and plural don't clearly apply. In such cases, there is no need to use ngettext; a simple gettext call with a form suitable for all values will do. For example:

 
printf (gettext ("Time elapsed: %.3f seconds"),
        num_milliseconds * 0.001);

Even if num_milliseconds happens to be a multiple of 1000, the output

 
Time elapsed: 1.000 seconds

is acceptable in English, and similarly for other languages.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

11.2.7 Optimisation des fonctions *gettext

At this point of the discussion we should talk about an advantage of the GNU gettext implementation. Some readers might have pointed out that an internationalized program might have a poor performance if some string has to be translated in an inner loop. While this is unavoidable when the string varies from one run of the loop to the other it is simply a waste of time when the string is always the same. Take the following example:

 
{
  while (…)
    {
      puts (gettext ("Hello world"));
    }
}

When the locale selection does not change between two runs the resulting string is always the same. One way to use this is:

 
{
  str = gettext ("Hello world");
  while (…)
    {
      puts (str);
    }
}

But this solution is not usable in all situation (e.g. when the locale selection changes) nor does it lead to legible code.

For this reason, GNU gettext caches previous translation results. When the same translation is requested twice, with no new message catalogs being loaded in between, gettext will, the second time, find the result through a single cache lookup.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

11.3 Comparing the Two Interfaces

The following discussion is perhaps a little bit colored. As said above we implemented GNU gettext following the Uniforum proposal and this surely has its reasons. But it should show how we came to this decision.

First we take a look at the developing process. When we write an application using NLS provided by gettext we proceed as always. Only when we come to a string which might be seen by the users and thus has to be translated we use gettext("…") instead of "…". At the beginning of each source file (or in a central header file) we define

 
#define gettext(String) (String)

Even this definition can be avoided when the system supports the gettext function in its C library. When we compile this code the result is the same as if no NLS code is used. When you take a look at the GNU gettext code you will see that we use _("…") instead of gettext("…"). This reduces the number of additional characters per translatable string to 3 (in words: three).

When now a production version of the program is needed we simply replace the definition

 
#define _(String) (String)

by

 
#include <libintl.h>
#define _(String) gettext (String)

Additionally we run the program ‘xgettext’ on all source code file which contain translatable strings and that's it: we have a running program which does not depend on translations to be available, but which can use any that becomes available.

The same procedure can be done for the gettext_noop invocations (@pxref{Special cases}). One usually defines gettext_noop as a no-op macro. So you should consider the following code for your project:

 
#define gettext_noop(String) String
#define N_(String) gettext_noop (String)

N_ is a short form similar to _. The ‘Makefile’ in the ‘po/’ directory of GNU gettext knows by default both of the mentioned short forms so you are invited to follow this proposal for your own ease.

Now to catgets. The main problem is the work for the programmer. Every time he comes to a translatable string he has to define a number (or a symbolic constant) which has also be defined in the message catalog file. He also has to take care for duplicate entries, duplicate message IDs etc. If he wants to have the same quality in the message catalog as the GNU gettext program provides he also has to put the descriptive comments for the strings and the location in all source code files in the message catalog. This is nearly a Mission: Impossible.

But there are also some points people might call advantages speaking for catgets. If you have a single word in a string and this string is used in different contexts it is likely that in one or the other language the word has different translations. Example:

 
printf ("%s: %d", gettext ("number"), number_of_errors)

printf ("you should see %d %s", number_count,
        number_count == 1 ? gettext ("number") : gettext ("numbers"))

Here we have to translate two times the string "number". Even if you do not speak a language beside English it might be possible to recognize that the two words have a different meaning. In German the first appearance has to be translated to "Anzahl" and the second to "Zahl".

Now you can say that this example is really esoteric. And you are right! This is exactly how we felt about this problem and decide that it does not weight that much. The solution for the above problem could be very easy:

 
printf ("%s %d", gettext ("number:"), number_of_errors)

printf (number_count == 1 ? gettext ("you should see %d number")
                          : gettext ("you should see %d numbers"),
        number_count)

We believe that we can solve all conflicts with this method. If it is difficult one can also consider changing one of the conflicting string a little bit. But it is not impossible to overcome.

catgets allows same original entry to have different translations, but gettext has another, scalable approach for solving ambiguities of this kind: @xref{Ambiguities}.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

11.4 Utilisation de libintl.a dans vos propres programmes

Starting with version 0.9.4 the library libintl.h should be self-contained. I.e., you can use it in your own programs without providing additional functions. The ‘Makefile’ will put the header and the library in directories selected using the $(prefix).


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

11.5 Être un passionné de gettext

NOTE: This documentation section is outdated and needs to be revised.

To fully exploit the functionality of the GNU gettext library it is surely helpful to read the source code. But for those who don't want to spend that much time in reading the (sometimes complicated) code here is a list comments:


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

11.6 Notes temporaires pour le chapitres des programmeurs

NOTE: This documentation section is outdated and needs to be revised.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

11.6.1 Deux implémentations temporaires possibles

There are two competing methods for language independent messages: the X/Open catgets method, and the Uniforum gettext method. The catgets method indexes messages by integers; the gettext method indexes them by their English translations. The catgets method has been around longer and is supported by more vendors. The gettext method is supported by Sun, and it has been heard that the COSE multi-vendor initiative is supporting it. Neither method is a POSIX standard; the POSIX.1 committee had a lot of disagreement in this area.

Neither one is in the POSIX standard. There was much disagreement in the POSIX.1 committee about using the gettext routines vs. catgets (XPG). In the end the committee couldn't agree on anything, so no messaging system was included as part of the standard. I believe the informative annex of the standard includes the XPG3 messaging interfaces, “…as an example of a messaging system that has been implemented…”

They were very careful not to say anywhere that you should use one set of interfaces over the other. For more on this topic please see the Programming for Internationalization FAQ.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

11.6.2 Temporairement - Sur catgets

There have been a few discussions of late on the use of catgets as a base. I think it important to present both sides of the argument and hence am opting to play devil's advocate for a little bit.

I'll not deny the fact that catgets could have been designed a lot better. It currently has quite a number of limitations and these have already been pointed out.

However there is a great deal to be said for consistency and standardization. A common recurring problem when writing Unix software is the myriad portability problems across Unix platforms. It seems as if every Unix vendor had a look at the operating system and found parts they could improve upon. Undoubtedly, these modifications are probably innovative and solve real problems. However, software developers have a hard time keeping up with all these changes across so many platforms.

And this has prompted the Unix vendors to begin to standardize their systems. Hence the impetus for Spec1170. Every major Unix vendor has committed to supporting this standard and every Unix software developer waits with glee the day they can write software to this standard and simply recompile (without having to use autoconf) across different platforms.

As I understand it, Spec1170 is roughly based upon version 4 of the X/Open Portability Guidelines (XPG4). Because catgets and friends are defined in XPG4, I'm led to believe that catgets is a part of Spec1170 and hence will become a standardized component of all Unix systems.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

11.6.3 Temporaire - Pourquoi une seule implémentation

Now it seems kind of wasteful to me to have two different systems installed for accessing message catalogs. If we do want to remedy catgets deficiencies why don't we try to expand catgets (in a compatible manner) rather than implement an entirely new system. Otherwise, we'll end up with two message catalog access systems installed with an operating system - one set of routines for packages using GNU gettext for their internationalization, and another set of routines (catgets) for all other software. Bloated?

Supposing another catalog access system is implemented. Which do we recommend? At least for Linux, we need to attract as many software developers as possible. Hence we need to make it as easy for them to port their software as possible. Which means supporting catgets. We will be implementing the libintl code within our libc, but does this mean we also have to incorporate another message catalog access scheme within our libc as well? And what about people who are going to be using the libintl + non-catgets routines. When they port their software to other platforms, they're now going to have to include the front-end (libintl) code plus the back-end code (the non-catgets access routines) with their software instead of just including the libintl code with their software.

Message catalog support is however only the tip of the iceberg. What about the data for the other locale categories? They also have a number of deficiencies. Are we going to abandon them as well and develop another duplicate set of routines (should libintl expand beyond message catalog support)?

Like many parts of Unix that can be improved upon, we're stuck with balancing compatibility with the past with useful improvements and innovations for the future.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

11.6.4 Temporaire - Notes

X/Open agreed very late on the standard form so that many implementations differ from the final form. Both of my system (old Linux catgets and Ultrix-4) have a strange variation.

OK. After incorporating the last changes I have to spend some time on making the GNU/Linux libc gettext functions. So in future Solaris is not the only system having gettext.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

12. Le point de vue de traducteur


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

12.1 Introduction 0

NOTE: This documentation section is outdated and needs to be revised.

Free software is going international! The Translation Project is a way to get maintainers, translators and users all together, so free software will gradually become able to speak many native languages.

The GNU gettext tool set contains everything maintainers need for internationalizing their packages for messages. It also contains quite useful tools for helping translators at localizing messages to their native language, once a package has already been internationalized.

To achieve the Translation Project, we need many interested people who like their own language and write it well, and who are also able to synergize with other translators speaking the same language. If you'd like to volunteer to work at translating messages, please send mail to your translating team.

Each team has its own mailing list, courtesy of Linux International. You may reach your translating team at the address ‘ll@li.org’, replacing ll by the two-letter ISO 639 code for your language. Language codes are not the same as country codes given in ISO 3166. The following translating teams exist:

Chinese zh, Czech cs, Danish da, Dutch nl, Esperanto eo, Finnish fi, French fr, Irish ga, German de, Greek el, Italian it, Japanese ja, Indonesian in, Norwegian no, Polish pl, Portuguese pt, Russian ru, Spanish es, Swedish sv and Turkish tr.

For example, you may reach the Chinese translating team by writing to ‘zh@li.org’. When you become a member of the translating team for your own language, you may subscribe to its list. For example, Swedish people can send a message to ‘sv-request@li.org’, having this message body:

 
subscribe

Keep in mind that team members should be interested in working at translations, or at solving translational difficulties, rather than merely lurking around. If your team does not exist yet and you want to start one, please write to ‘coordinator@translationproject.org’; you will then reach the coordinator for all translator teams.

A handful of GNU packages have already been adapted and provided with message translations for several languages. Translation teams have begun to organize, using these packages as a starting point. But there are many more packages and many languages for which we have no volunteer translators. If you would like to volunteer to work at translating messages, please send mail to ‘coordinator@translationproject.org’ indicating what language(s) you can work on.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

12.2 Introduction 1

NOTE: This documentation section is outdated and needs to be revised.

This is now official, GNU is going international! Here is the announcement submitted for the January 1995 GNU Bulletin:

A handful of GNU packages have already been adapted and provided with message translations for several languages. Translation teams have begun to organize, using these packages as a starting point. But there are many more packages and many languages for which we have no volunteer translators. If you'd like to volunteer to work at translating messages, please send mail to ‘coordinator@translationproject.org’ indicating what language(s) you can work on.

This document should answer many questions for those who are curious about the process or would like to contribute. Please at least skim over it, hoping to cut down a little of the high volume of e-mail generated by this collective effort towards internationalization of free software.

Most free programming which is widely shared is done in English, and currently, English is used as the main communicating language between national communities collaborating to free software. This very document is written in English. This will not change in the foreseeable future.

However, there is a strong appetite from national communities for having more software able to write using national language and habits, and there is an on-going effort to modify free software in such a way that it becomes able to do so. The experiments driven so far raised an enthusiastic response from pretesters, so we believe that internationalization of free software is dedicated to succeed.

For suggestion clarifications, additions or corrections to this document, please e-mail to ‘coordinator@translationproject.org’.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

12.3 Discussions

NOTE: This documentation section is outdated and needs to be revised.

Facing this internationalization effort, a few users expressed their concerns. Some of these doubts are presented and discussed, here.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

12.4 Organisation

NOTE: This documentation section is outdated and needs to be revised.

On a larger scale, the true solution would be to organize some kind of fairly precise set up in which volunteers could participate. I gave some thought to this idea lately, and realize there will be some touchy points. I thought of writing to Richard Stallman to launch such a project, but feel it might be good to shake out the ideas between ourselves first. Most probably that Linux International has some experience in the field already, or would like to orchestrate the volunteer work, maybe. Food for thought, in any case!

I guess we have to setup something early, somehow, that will help many possible contributors of the same language to interlock and avoid work duplication, and further be put in contact for solving together problems particular to their tongue (in most languages, there are many difficulties peculiar to translating technical English). My Swedish contributor acknowledged these difficulties, and I'm well aware of them for French.

This is surely not a technical issue, but we should manage so the effort of locale contributors be maximally useful, despite the national team layer interface between contributors and maintainers.

The Translation Project needs some setup for coordinating language coordinators. Localizing evolving programs will surely become a permanent and continuous activity in the free software community, once well started. The setup should be minimally completed and tested before GNU gettext becomes an official reality. The e-mail address ‘coordinator@translationproject.org’ has been set up for receiving offers from volunteers and general e-mail on these topics. This address reaches the Translation Project coordinator.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

12.4.1 Coordination contrale

I also think GNU will need sooner than it thinks, that someone set up a way to organize and coordinate these groups. Some kind of group of groups. My opinion is that it would be good that GNU delegates this task to a small group of collaborating volunteers, shortly. Perhaps in ‘gnu.announce’ a list of this national committee's can be published.

My role as coordinator would simply be to refer to Ulrich any German speaking volunteer interested to localization of free software packages, and maybe helping national groups to initially organize, while maintaining national registries for until national groups are ready to take over. In fact, the coordinator should ease volunteers to get in contact with one another for creating national teams, which should then select one coordinator per language, or country (regionalized language). If well done, the coordination should be useful without being an overwhelming task, the time to put delegations in place.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

12.4.2 Équipes nationales

I suggest we look for volunteer coordinators/editors for individual languages. These people will scan contributions of translation files for various programs, for their own languages, and will ensure high and uniform standards of diction.

From my current experience with other people in these days, those who provide localizations are very enthusiastic about the process, and are more interested in the localization process than in the program they localize, and want to do many programs, not just one. This seems to confirm that having a coordinator/editor for each language is a good idea.

We need to choose someone who is good at writing clear and concise prose in the language in question. That is hard—we can't check it ourselves. So we need to ask a few people to judge each others' writing and select the one who is best.

I announce my prerelease to a few dozen people, and you would not believe all the discussions it generated already. I shudder to think what will happen when this will be launched, for true, officially, world wide. Who am I to arbitrate between two Czekolsovak users contradicting each other, for example?

I assume that your German is not much better than my French so that I would not be able to judge about these formulations. What I would suggest is that for each language there is a group for people who maintain the PO files and judge about changes. I suspect there will be cultural differences between how such groups of people will behave. Some will have relaxed ways, reach consensus easily, and have anyone of the group relate to the maintainers, while others will fight to death, organize heavy administrations up to national standards, and use strict channels.

The German team is putting out a good example. Right now, they are maybe half a dozen people revising translations of each other and discussing the linguistic issues. I do not even have all the names. Ulrich Drepper is taking care of coordinating the German team. He subscribed to all my pretest lists, so I do not even have to warn him specifically of incoming releases.

I'm sure, that is a good idea to get teams for each language working on translations. That will make the translations better and more consistent.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

12.4.2.1 Cultures rattachées

Taking French for example, there are a few sub-cultures around computers which developed diverging vocabularies. Picking volunteers here and there without addressing this problem in an organized way, soon in the project, might produce a distasteful mix of internationalized programs, and possibly trigger endless quarrels among those who really care.

Keeping some kind of unity in the way French localization of internationalized programs is achieved is a difficult (and delicate) job. Knowing the latin character of French people (:-), if we take this the wrong way, we could end up nowhere, or spoil a lot of energies. Maybe we should begin to address this problem seriously before GNU gettext become officially published. And I suspect that this means soon!


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

12.4.2.2 Idées d'organisation

I expect the next big changes after the official release. Please note that I use the German translation of the short GPL message. We need to set a few good examples before the localization goes out for true in the free software community. Here are a few points to discuss:


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

12.4.3 Listes de diffusion

If we get any inquiries about GNU gettext, send them on to:

 
coordinator@translationproject.org

The ‘*-pretest’ lists are quite useful to me, maybe the idea could be generalized to many GNU, and non-GNU packages. But each maintainer his/her way!

François, we have a mechanism in place here at ‘gnu.ai.mit.edu’ to track teams, support mailing lists for them and log members. We have a slight preference that you use it. If this is OK with you, I can get you clued in.

Things are changing! A few years ago, when Daniel Fekete and I asked for a mailing list for GNU localization, nested at the FSF, we were politely invited to organize it anywhere else, and so did we. For communicating with my pretesters, I later made a handful of mailing lists located at iro.umontreal.ca and administrated by majordomo. These lists have been very dependable so far…

I suspect that the German team will organize itself a mailing list located in Germany, and so forth for other countries. But before they organize for true, it could surely be useful to offer mailing lists located at the FSF to each national team. So yes, please explain me how I should proceed to create and handle them.

We should create temporary mailing lists, one per country, to help people organize. Temporary, because once regrouped and structured, it would be fair the volunteers from country bring back their list in there and manage it as they want. My feeling is that, in the long run, each team should run its own list, from within their country. There also should be some central list to which all teams could subscribe as they see fit, as long as each team is represented in it.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

12.5 Flux de l'information

NOTE: This documentation section is outdated and needs to be revised.

There will surely be some discussion about this messages after the packages are finally released. If people now send you some proposals for better messages, how do you proceed? Jim, please note that right now, as I put forward nearly a dozen of localizable programs, I receive both the translations and the coordination concerns about them.

If I put one of my things to pretest, Ulrich receives the announcement and passes it on to the German team, who make last minute revisions. Then he submits the translation files to me as the maintainer. For free packages I do not maintain, I would not even hear about it. This scheme could be made to work for the whole Translation Project, I think. For security reasons, maybe Ulrich (national coordinators, in fact) should update central registry kept at the Translation Project (Jim, me, or Len's recruits) once in a while.

In December/January, I was aggressively ready to internationalize all of GNU, giving myself the duty of one small GNU package per week or so, taking many weeks or months for bigger packages. But it does not work this way. I first did all the things I'm responsible for. I've nothing against some missionary work on other maintainers, but I'm also loosing a lot of energy over it—same debates over again.

And when the first localized packages are released we'll get a lot of responses about ugly translations :-). Surely, and we need to have beforehand a fairly good idea about how to handle the information flow between the national teams and the package maintainers.

Please start saving somewhere a quick history of each PO file. I know for sure that the file format will change, allowing for comments. It would be nice that each file has a kind of log, and references for those who want to submit comments or gripes, or otherwise contribute. I sent a proposal for a fast and flexible format, but it is not receiving acceptance yet by the GNU deciders. I'll tell you when I have more information about this.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

12.6 Prioritizing messages: How to determine which messages to translate first

A translator sometimes has only a limited amount of time per week to spend on a package, and some packages have quite large message catalogs (over 1000 messages). Therefore she wishes to translate the messages first that are the most visible to the user, or that occur most frequently. This section describes how to determine these "most urgent" messages. It also applies to determine the "next most urgent" messages after the message catalog has already been partially translated.

In a first step, she uses the programs like a user would do. While she does this, the GNU gettext library logs into a file the not yet translated messages for which a translation was requested from the program.

In a second step, she uses the PO mode to translate precisely this set of messages.

Here a more details. The GNU libintl library (but not the corresponding functions in GNU libc) supports an environment variable GETTEXT_LOG_UNTRANSLATED. The GNU libintl library will log into this file the messages for which gettext() and related functions couldn't find the translation. If the file doesn't exist, it will be created as needed. On systems with GNU libc a shared library ‘preloadable_libintl.so’ is provided that can be used with the ELF ‘LD_PRELOAD’ mechanism.

So, in the first step, the translator uses these commands on systems with GNU libc:

 
$ LD_PRELOAD=/usr/local/lib/preloadable_libintl.so
$ export LD_PRELOAD
$ GETTEXT_LOG_UNTRANSLATED=$HOME/gettextlogused
$ export GETTEXT_LOG_UNTRANSLATED

and these commands on other systems:

 
$ GETTEXT_LOG_UNTRANSLATED=$HOME/gettextlogused
$ export GETTEXT_LOG_UNTRANSLATED

Then she uses and peruses the programs. (It is a good and recommended practice to use the programs for which you provide translations: it gives you the needed context.) When done, she removes the environment variables:

 
$ unset LD_PRELOAD
$ unset GETTEXT_LOG_UNTRANSLATED

The second step starts with removing duplicates:

 
$ msguniq $HOME/gettextlogused > missing.po

The result is a PO file, but needs some preprocessing before a PO file editor can be used with it. First, it is a multi-domain PO file, containing messages from many translation domains. Second, it lacks all translator comments and source references. Here is how to get a list of the affected translation domains:

 
$ sed -n -e 's,^domain "\(.*\)"$,\1,p' < missing.po | sort | uniq

Then the translator can handle the domains one by one. For simplicity, let's use environment variables to denote the language, domain and source package.

 
$ lang=nl             # your language
$ domain=coreutils    # the name of the domain to be handled
$ package=/usr/src/gnu/coreutils-4.5.4   # the package where it comes from

She takes the latest copy of ‘$lang.po’ from the Translation Project, or from the package (in most cases, ‘$package/po/$lang.po’), or creates a fresh one if she's the first translator (see @ref{Creating}). She then uses the following commands to mark the not urgent messages as "obsolete". (This doesn't mean that these messages - translated and untranslated ones - will go away. It simply means that the PO file editor will ignore them in the following editing session.)

 
$ msggrep --domain=$domain missing.po | grep -v '^domain' \
  > $domain-missing.po
$ msgattrib --set-obsolete --ignore-file $domain-missing.po $domain.$lang.po \
  > $domain.$lang-urgent.po

The she translates ‘$domain.$lang-urgent.po’ by use of a PO file editor (@pxref{Editing}). (FIXME: I don't know whether KBabel and gtranslator also preserve obsolete messages, as they should.) Finally she restores the not urgent messages (with their earlier translations, for those which were already translated) through this command:

 
$ msgmerge --no-fuzzy-matching $domain.$lang-urgent.po $package/po/$domain.pot \
  > $domain.$lang.po

Then she can submit ‘$domain.$lang.po’ and proceed to the next domain.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

13. Le point de vue des mainteneurs du programme

The maintainer of a package has many responsibilities. One of them is ensuring that the package will install easily on many platforms, and that the magic we described earlier (@pxref{Users}) will work for installers and end users.

Of course, there are many possible ways by which GNU gettext might be integrated in a distribution, and this chapter does not cover them in all generality. Instead, it details one possible approach which is especially adequate for many free software distributions following GNU standards, or even better, Gnits standards, because GNU gettext is purposely for helping the internationalization of the whole GNU project, and as many other good free packages as possible. So, the maintainer's view presented here presumes that the package already has a ‘configure.ac’ file and uses GNU Autoconf.

Nevertheless, GNU gettext may surely be useful for free packages not following GNU standards and conventions, but the maintainers of such packages might have to show imagination and initiative in organizing their distributions so gettext work for them in all situations. There are surely many, out there.

Even if gettext methods are now stabilizing, slight adjustments might be needed between successive gettext versions, so you should ideally revise this chapter in subsequent releases, looking for changes.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

13.1 Structure hiérarchisée des répertoires ou non

Some free software packages are distributed as tar files which unpack in a single directory, these are said to be flat distributions. Other free software packages have a one level hierarchy of subdirectories, using for example a subdirectory named ‘doc/’ for the Texinfo manual and man pages, another called ‘lib/’ for holding functions meant to replace or complement C libraries, and a subdirectory ‘src/’ for holding the proper sources for the package. These other distributions are said to be non-flat.

We cannot say much about flat distributions. A flat directory structure has the disadvantage of increasing the difficulty of updating to a new version of GNU gettext. Also, if you have many PO files, this could somewhat pollute your single directory. Also, GNU gettext's libintl sources consist of C sources, shell scripts, sed scripts and complicated Makefile rules, which don't fit well into an existing flat structure. For these reasons, we recommend to use non-flat approach in this case as well.

Maybe because GNU gettext itself has a non-flat structure, we have more experience with this approach, and this is what will be described in the remaining of this chapter. Some maintainers might use this as an opportunity to unflatten their package structure.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

13.2 Travail pré-requis

There are some works which are required for using GNU gettext in one of your package. These works have some kind of generality that escape the point by point descriptions used in the remainder of this chapter. So, we describe them here.

It is worth adding here a few words about how the maintainer should ideally behave with PO files submissions. As a maintainer, your role is to authenticate the origin of the submission as being the representative of the appropriate translating teams of the Translation Project (forward the submission to ‘coordinator@translationproject.org’ in case of doubt), to ensure that the PO file format is not severely broken and does not prevent successful installation, and for the rest, to merely put these PO files in ‘po/’ for distribution.

As a maintainer, you do not have to take on your shoulders the responsibility of checking if the translations are adequate or complete, and should avoid diving into linguistic matters. Translation teams drive themselves and are fully responsible of their linguistic choices for the Translation Project. Keep in mind that translator teams are not driven by maintainers. You can help by carefully redirecting all communications and reports from users about linguistic matters to the appropriate translation team, or explain users how to reach or join their team. The simplest might be to send them the ‘ABOUT-NLS’ file.

Maintainers should never ever apply PO file bug reports themselves, short-cutting translation teams. If some translator has difficulty to get some of her points through her team, it should not be an option for her to directly negotiate translations with maintainers. Teams ought to settle their problems themselves, if any. If you, as a maintainer, ever think there is a real problem with a team, please never try to solve a team's problem on your own.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

13.3 Invcation du programme gettextize

Le programme gettextize est un outil interactif qui aide le mainteneur d'un progiciel internationalisé à travers GNU gettext. Il est utilisé pour deux usages :

Ce programme réalise les tâches suivantes :

Il peut être invoqué de la manière suivante :

 
gettextize [ option… ] [ directory ]

et accèpte les options suivantes :

-f
--force

Force replacement of files which already exist.

--intl

Install the libintl sources in a subdirectory named ‘intl/’. This libintl will be used to provide internationalization on systems that don't have GNU libintl installed. If this option is omitted, the call to AM_GNU_GETTEXT in ‘configure.ac’ should read: ‘AM_GNU_GETTEXT([external])’, and internationalization will not be enabled on systems lacking GNU gettext.

--po-dir=répertoire

Specify a directory containing PO files. Such a directory contains the translations into various languages of a particular POT file. This option can be specified multiple times, once for each translation domain. If it is not specified, the directory named ‘po/’ is updated.

--no-changelog

Don't update or create ChangeLog files. By default, gettextize logs all changes (file additions, modifications and removals) in a file called ‘ChangeLog’ in each affected directory.

--symlink

Make symbolic links instead of copying the needed files. This can be useful to save a few kilobytes of disk space, but it requires extra effort to create self-contained tarballs, it may disturb some mechanism the maintainer applies to the sources, and it is likely to introduce bugs when a newer version of gettext is installed on the system.

-n
--dry-run

Print modifications but don't perform them. All actions that gettextize would normally execute are inhibited and instead only listed on standard output.

--help

Display this help and exit.

--version

Output version information and exit.

Si le répertoire est donnée, ce sera la répertoire de plus haut niveau d'un progicielse préparant utiliser GNU gettext. S'il n'est pas donné, il est assumé que le répertoirecourant est le répertoire de plus haut niveau de ce progiciel.

Le programme gettextize fournit les fichiers qui suivent. Cependant, aucun fichierexistant ne sera remplacé, sauf si l'option --force (-f) a été spécifiée.

  1. Le fichier ‘ABOUT-NLS’ est copié dans le répertoire principal de votre progiciel, celui qui est au plus haut niveau hiérachique. Ce fichier donne les informationsprincipales sur la façon d'installer et d'utiliser le fonctionalité du Support des Langues Nationales de votre programme. Vous pouvez choisir d'utiliserune copie plus récente de ce fichier ‘ABOUT-NLS’, que celle qui est fournieavec gettextize, si vous en avez une de disponible. Vous pouvez aussi allerchercher une copie plus récente de ce fichier ‘ABOUT-NLS’ sur les sites duProjet de traductions et sur la plupart des sites des archives GNU.
  2. Un répertoire ‘/po’ est crée pour contenir à la fin tous les fichiers de traduction, mais au début il ne contiendra que le fichier ‘po/Makefile.in.in’ de la distribution de GNU gettext (faites attention au double ‘.in’ dans le nom de fichier) et quelques fichiers auxiliaires. Si le répertoire ‘/po’ existe déjà, il sera préservé avec les fichiers qu'il contient et seulement lefichier ‘Makefile.in.in’ et les fichiers auxiliaires seront remplacés.

    Si ‘--po-dir’ a été spécifiée, ceci sera valable pour tous les répertoires listés par ‘--po-dir’ à la place du répertoire ‘po/’.

  3. Si (et seulement si) ‘--intl] a été spécifié, un répertoire ‘intl/’ est crée et rempli avec la plupart des fichiers qui sont à l'origine dans le répertoire ‘intl/’ de la distribution GNU gettext. Si l'option --force (-f) est aussi donnée, le répertoire ‘intl/’ est d'abord vidé.
  4. Le fichier ‘config.path’ est copié dans le répertoire contenant les fichiers de support de configuration. Il est requis par la macro d'autoconfiguration AM_GNU_GETTEXT.
  5. Si (et seulement si) le projet utilise GNU automake : un jeu de fichiers macro autoconf est copié dans le dépot de macro autoconf du progiciel, habituellement dans un répertoire appelé ‘m4/’.

Si votre site supporte les liens symboliques, gettextize ne copiera pas réellement les fichiers dans votre progiciel mais il établira à la place un lien symbolique. Ceci évite les duplications et diminue l'espace disque nécessaire pour tous les progiciels. Utiliser seulement l'option ‘-h’ pendant la création de l'archive tar de votre distribution remplacera de fait chaque lien par la copie effective dans l'archive de la distribution. C'est pourquoi, pour insister, vous devriez vraiment utiliser l'option ‘-h’ avec tar à l'intérieur la cible de votre distribution de votre fichier principal ‘Makefile.in’.

D'autre part, gettextize mettra à jour tous les fichiers ‘Makefile.am’ dans chacun des répertoires affectés, comme aussi le fichier ‘configure.ac’ ou @file[configue.in’ du niveau hiéarchique le plus élevé.

Il est intéressant de comprendre que la plupart des nouveaux fichiers crées pour supporter les fonctionalité de GNU gettext dans un progiciel, vont dans les sous répertoires ‘intl’, ‘po/’ et ‘m4/’. Une distinction entre ‘intl/’ et les deux autres répertoires es que le fichier ‘intl/’ est prévu pour être complètement identique dans tous les progiciels utilisant GNU gettext, alors quels autres répertoires contiendront principalement les fichiers dépendants du progiciel.

Le programme gettextize fait des fichiers de sauvergarde pour tous les fichiers qu'il remplace ou change et il écrit aussi des entrées dans le ChangeLog pour ces modifications.De cette manière, un mainteneur prudent peut vérifier après avoir fait tourner gettextize si les changements sont acceptables pour lui et il peut les ajuster. Une exception à cette règle est le répertoire ‘intl/’, qui est ajouté, remplacé ou enlevé en entier.

Il est important de comprendre que gettextize ne peut pas faire tout le travail d'adaptation d'un progiciel pour utiliser GNU gettext. La quantité de travail restant à faire dépend si le progiciel utilise GNU automake ou non.Mais dans tous les cas, le mainteneur devrait lir la section si après avoir utilisé ‘gettextize’ vous avez une erreur ‘AC_COMPILE_IFELSE was called before AC_GNU_SOURCE’ ou ‘AC_RUN_IFELSE was called before AC_GNU_SOURCE’: (comme décrit dans configure.ac’ au niveau sommet. Il est aussi important de comprendre que gettextize ne fait pas partie du système d'intégration GNU)ajustement des fichiers]après avoir invoqué gettextize. En particulier section `vous pouvez le corrigez en modifiant ‘configure.ac’' dans au sens qu'il ne ne devrait pas être invoqué automatiquement et ne devrait pas être invoqué par quelqu'un qui n'assume pas la responsabilité du maintien d'un progiciel. Pour les utilisations futures, un outil séparré est fourni, voir @ref{invocation d'autopoint}


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

13.4 Les fichiers que vous devez modifier ou créer

Besides files which are automatically added through gettextize, there are many files needing revision for properly interacting with GNU gettext. If you are closely following GNU standards for Makefile engineering and auto-configuration, the adaptations should be easier to achieve. Here is a point by point description of the changes needed in each.

So, here comes a list of files, each one followed by a description of all alterations it needs. Many examples are taken out from the GNU gettext 0.17 distribution itself, or from the GNU hello distribution (http://www.franken.de/users/gnu/ke/hello or http://www.gnu.franken.de/ke/hello/) You may indeed refer to the source code of the GNU gettext and GNU hello packages, as they are intended to be good examples for using GNU gettext functionality.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

13.4.1 ‘POTFILES.in’ dans ‘po/

The ‘po/’ directory should receive a file named ‘POTFILES.in’. This file tells which files, among all program sources, have marked strings needing translation. Here is an example of such a file:

 
# List of source files containing translatable strings.
# Copyright (C) 1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc.

# Common library files
lib/error.c
lib/getopt.c
lib/xmalloc.c

# Package source files
src/gettext.c
src/msgfmt.c
src/xgettext.c

Hash-marked comments and white lines are ignored. All other lines list those source files containing strings marked for translation (@pxref{Mark Keywords}), in a notation relative to the top level of your whole distribution, rather than the location of the ‘POTFILES.in’ file itself.

When a C file is automatically generated by a tool, like flex or bison, that doesn't introduce translatable strings by itself, it is recommended to list in ‘po/POTFILES.in’ the real source file (ending in ‘.l’ in the case of flex, or in ‘.y’ in the case of bison), not the generated C file.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

13.4.2 ‘LINGUAS’ dans ‘po/

The ‘po/’ directory should also receive a file named ‘LINGUAS’. This file contains the list of available translations. It is a whitespace separated list. Hash-marked comments and white lines are ignored. Here is an example file:

 
# Set of available languages.
de fr

This example means that German and French PO files are available, so that these languages are currently supported by your package. If you want to further restrict, at installation time, the set of installed languages, this should not be done by modifying the ‘LINGUAS’ file, but rather by using the LINGUAS environment variable (@pxref{Installers}).

It is recommended that you add the "languages" ‘en@quot’ and ‘en@boldquot’ to the LINGUAS file. en@quot is a variant of English message catalogs (en) which uses real quotation marks instead of the ugly looking asymmetric ASCII substitutes ‘`’ and ‘'’. en@boldquot is a variant of en@quot that additionally outputs quoted pieces of text in a bold font, when used in a terminal emulator which supports the VT100 escape sequences (such as xterm or the Linux console, but not Emacs in M-x shell mode).

These extra message catalogs ‘en@quot’ and ‘en@boldquot’ are constructed automatically, not by translators; to support them, you need the files ‘Rules-quot’, ‘quot.sed’, ‘boldquot.sed’, ‘en@quot.header’, ‘en@boldquot.header’, ‘insert-header.sin’ in the ‘po/’ directory. You can copy them from GNU gettext's ‘po/’ directory; they are also installed by running gettextize.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

13.4.3 ‘Makevars’ dans ‘po/

The ‘po/’ directory also has a file named ‘Makevars’. It contains variables that are specific to your project. ‘po/Makevars’ gets inserted into the ‘po/Makefile’ when the latter is created. The variables thus take effect when the POT file is created or updated, and when the message catalogs get installed.

The first three variables can be left unmodified if your package has a single message domain and, accordingly, a single ‘po/’ directory. Only packages which have multiple ‘po/’ directories at different locations need to adjust the three first variables defined in ‘Makevars’.

As an alternative to the XGETTEXT_OPTIONS variables, it is also possible to specify xgettext options through the AM_XGETTEXT_OPTION autoconf macro. See AM_XGETTEXT_OPTION in ‘po.m4.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

13.4.4 Étendre ‘Makefile’ dans ‘po/

All files called ‘Rules-*’ in the ‘po/’ directory get appended to the ‘po/Makefile’ when it is created. They present an opportunity to add rules for special PO files to the Makefile, without needing to mess with ‘po/Makefile.in.in’.

GNU gettext comes with a ‘Rules-quot’ file, containing rules for building catalogs ‘en@quot.po’ and ‘en@boldquot.po’. The effect of ‘en@quot.po’ is that people who set their LANGUAGE environment variable to ‘en@quot’ will get messages with proper looking symmetric Unicode quotation marks instead of abusing the ASCII grave accent and the ASCII apostrophe for indicating quotations. To enable this catalog, simply add en@quot to the ‘po/LINGUAS’ file. The effect of ‘en@boldquot.po’ is that people who set LANGUAGE to ‘en@boldquot’ will get not only proper quotation marks, but also the quoted text will be shown in a bold font on terminals and consoles. This catalog is useful only for command-line programs, not GUI programs. To enable it, similarly add en@boldquot to the ‘po/LINGUAS’ file.

Similarly, you can create rules for building message catalogs for the ‘sr@latin’ locale – Serbian written with the Latin alphabet – from those for the ‘sr’ locale – Serbian written with Cyrillic letters. See @ref{msgfilter Invocation}.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

13.4.5 ‘configure.ac’ au niveau sommet

configure.ac’ or ‘configure.in’ - this is the source from which autoconf generates the ‘configure’ script.

  1. Declare the package and version.

    This is done by a set of lines like these:

     
    PACKAGE=gettext
    VERSION=0.17
    AC_DEFINE_UNQUOTED(PACKAGE, "$PACKAGE")
    AC_DEFINE_UNQUOTED(VERSION, "$VERSION")
    AC_SUBST(PACKAGE)
    AC_SUBST(VERSION)
    

    or, if you are using GNU automake, by a line like this:

     
    AM_INIT_AUTOMAKE(gettext, 0.17)
    

    Of course, you replace ‘gettext’ with the name of your package, and ‘0.17’ by its version numbers, exactly as they should appear in the packaged tar file name of your distribution (‘gettext-0.17.tar.gz’, here).

  2. Check for internationalization support.

    Here is the main m4 macro for triggering internationalization support. Just add this line to ‘configure.ac’:

     
    AM_GNU_GETTEXT
    

    This call is purposely simple, even if it generates a lot of configure time checking and actions.

    If you have suppressed the ‘intl/’ subdirectory by calling gettextize without ‘--intl’ option, this call should read

     
    AM_GNU_GETTEXT([external])
    
  3. Have output files created.

    The AC_OUTPUT directive, at the end of your ‘configure.ac’ file, needs to be modified in two ways:

     
    AC_OUTPUT([existing configuration files intl/Makefile po/Makefile.in],
    [existing additional actions])
    

    The modification to the first argument to AC_OUTPUT asks for substitution in the ‘intl/’ and ‘po/’ directories. Note the ‘.in’ suffix used for ‘po/’ only. This is because the distributed file is really ‘po/Makefile.in.in’.

    If you have suppressed the ‘intl/’ subdirectory by calling gettextize without ‘--intl’ option, then you don't need to add intl/Makefile to the AC_OUTPUT line.

If, after doing the recommended modifications, a command like ‘aclocal -I m4’ or ‘autoconf’ or ‘autoreconf’ fails with a trace similar to this:

 
configure.ac:44: warning: AC_COMPILE_IFELSE was called before AC_GNU_SOURCE
../../lib/autoconf/specific.m4:335: AC_GNU_SOURCE is expanded from...
m4/lock.m4:224: gl_LOCK is expanded from...
m4/gettext.m4:571: gt_INTL_SUBDIR_CORE is expanded from...
m4/gettext.m4:472: AM_INTL_SUBDIR is expanded from...
m4/gettext.m4:347: AM_GNU_GETTEXT is expanded from...
configure.ac:44: the top level
configure.ac:44: warning: AC_RUN_IFELSE was called before AC_GNU_SOURCE

you need to add an explicit invocation of ‘AC_GNU_SOURCE’ in the ‘configure.ac’ file - after ‘AC_PROG_CC’ but before ‘AM_GNU_GETTEXT’, most likely very close to the ‘AC_PROG_CC’ invocation. This is necessary because of ordering restrictions imposed by GNU autoconf.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

13.4.6 ‘config.guess’, ‘config.sub’ au niveau sommet

If you haven't suppressed the ‘intl/’ subdirectory, you need to add the GNU ‘config.guess’ and ‘config.sub’ files to your distribution. They are needed because the ‘intl/’ directory has platform dependent support for determining the locale's character encoding and therefore needs to identify the platform.

You can obtain the newest version of ‘config.guess’ and ‘config.sub’ from the CVS of the ‘config’ project at ‘http://savannah.gnu.org/’. The commands to fetch them are

 
$ wget 'http://savannah.gnu.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs/*checkout*/config/config/config.guess'
$ wget 'http://savannah.gnu.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs/*checkout*/config/config/config.sub'

Less recent versions are also contained in the GNU automake and GNU libtool packages.

Normally, ‘config.guess’ and ‘config.sub’ are put at the top level of a distribution. But it is also possible to put them in a subdirectory, altogether with other configuration support files like ‘install-sh’, ‘ltconfig’, ‘ltmain.sh’ or ‘missing’. All you need to do, other than moving the files, is to add the following line to your ‘configure.ac’.

 
AC_CONFIG_AUX_DIR([subdir])

[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

13.4.7 ‘mkinstalldirs’ au niveau sommet

With earlier versions of GNU gettext, you needed to add the GNU ‘mkinstalldirs’ script to your distribution. This is not needed any more. You can remove it if you not also using an automake version older than automake 1.9.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

13.4.8 ‘aclocal.m4’ au niveau sommet

If you do not have an ‘aclocal.m4’ file in your distribution, the simplest is to concatenate the files ‘codeset.m4’, ‘gettext.m4’, ‘glibc2.m4’, ‘glibc21.m4’, ‘iconv.m4’, ‘intdiv0.m4’, ‘intl.m4’, ‘intldir.m4’, ‘intlmacosx.m4’, ‘intmax.m4’, ‘inttypes_h.m4’, ‘inttypes-pri.m4’, ‘lcmessage.m4’, ‘lib-ld.m4’, ‘lib-link.m4’, ‘lib-prefix.m4’, ‘lock.m4’, ‘longlong.m4’, ‘nls.m4’, ‘po.m4’, ‘printf-posix.m4’, ‘progtest.m4’, ‘size_max.m4’, ‘stdint_h.m4’, ‘uintmax_t.m4’, ‘visibility.m4’, ‘wchar_t.m4’, ‘wint_t.m4’, ‘xsize.m4’ from GNU gettext's ‘m4/’ directory into a single file. If you have suppressed the ‘intl/’ directory, only ‘gettext.m4’, ‘iconv.m4’, ‘lib-ld.m4’, ‘lib-link.m4’, ‘lib-prefix.m4’, ‘nls.m4’, ‘po.m4’, ‘progtest.m4’ need to be concatenated.

If you are not using GNU automake 1.8 or newer, you will need to add a file ‘mkdirp.m4’ from a newer automake distribution to the list of files above.

If you already have an ‘aclocal.m4’ file, then you will have to merge the said macro files into your ‘aclocal.m4’. Note that if you are upgrading from a previous release of GNU gettext, you should most probably replace the macros (AM_GNU_GETTEXT, etc.), as they usually change a little from one release of GNU gettext to the next. Their contents may vary as we get more experience with strange systems out there.

If you are using GNU automake 1.5 or newer, it is enough to put these macro files into a subdirectory named ‘m4/’ and add the line

 
ACLOCAL_AMFLAGS = -I m4

to your top level ‘Makefile.am’.

These macros check for the internationalization support functions and related informations. Hopefully, once stabilized, these macros might be integrated in the standard Autoconf set, because this piece of m4 code will be the same for all projects using GNU gettext.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

13.4.9 ‘acconfig.h’ au niveau sommet

Earlier GNU gettext releases required to put definitions for ENABLE_NLS, HAVE_GETTEXT and HAVE_LC_MESSAGES, HAVE_STPCPY, PACKAGE and VERSION into an ‘acconfig.h’ file. This is not needed any more; you can remove them from your ‘acconfig.h’ file unless your package uses them independently from the ‘intl/’ directory.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

13.4.10 ‘config.h.in’ au niveau sommet

The include file template that holds the C macros to be defined by configure is usually called ‘config.h.in’ and may be maintained either manually or automatically.

If gettextize has created an ‘intl/’ directory, this file must be called ‘config.h.in’ and must be at the top level. If, however, you have suppressed the ‘intl/’ directory by calling gettextize without ‘--intl’ option, then you can choose the name of this file and its location freely.

If it is maintained automatically, by use of the ‘autoheader’ program, you need to do nothing about it. This is the case in particular if you are using GNU automake.

If it is maintained manually, and if gettextize has created an ‘intl/’ directory, you should switch to using ‘autoheader’. The list of C macros to be added for the sake of the ‘intl/’ directory is just too long to be maintained manually; it also changes between different versions of GNU gettext.

If it is maintained manually, and if on the other hand you have suppressed the ‘intl/’ directory by calling gettextize without ‘--intl’ option, then you can get away by adding the following lines to ‘config.h.in’:

 
/* Define to 1 if translation of program messages to the user's
   native language is requested. */
#undef ENABLE_NLS

[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

13.4.11 ‘Makefile.in’ au niveau sommet

Here are a few modifications you need to make to your main, top-level ‘Makefile.in’ file.

  1. Add the following lines near the beginning of your ‘Makefile.in’, so the ‘dist:’ goal will work properly (as explained further down):
     
    PACKAGE = @PACKAGE@
    VERSION = @VERSION@
    
  2. Add file ‘ABOUT-NLS’ to the DISTFILES definition, so the file gets distributed.
  3. Wherever you process subdirectories in your ‘Makefile.in’, be sure you also process the subdirectories ‘intl’ and ‘po’. Special rules in the ‘Makefiles’ take care for the case where no internationalization is wanted.

    If you are using Makefiles, either generated by automake, or hand-written so they carefully follow the GNU coding standards, the effected goals for which the new subdirectories must be handled include ‘installdirs’, ‘install’, ‘uninstall’, ‘clean’, ‘distclean’.

    Here is an example of a canonical order of processing. In this example, we also define SUBDIRS in Makefile.in for it to be further used in the ‘dist:’ goal.

     
    SUBDIRS = doc intl lib src po
    

    Note that you must arrange for ‘make’ to descend into the intl directory before descending into other directories containing code which make use of the libintl.h header file. For this reason, here we mention intl before lib and src.

  4. A delicate point is the ‘dist:’ goal, as both ‘intl/Makefile’ and ‘po/Makefile’ will later assume that the proper directory has been set up from the main ‘Makefile’. Here is an example at what the ‘dist:’ goal might look like:
     
    distdir = $(PACKAGE)-$(VERSION)
    dist: Makefile
    	rm -fr $(distdir)
    	mkdir $(distdir)
    	chmod 777 $(distdir)
    	for file in $(DISTFILES); do \
    	  ln $$file $(distdir) 2>/dev/null || cp -p $$file $(distdir); \
    	done
    	for subdir in $(SUBDIRS); do \
    	  mkdir $(distdir)/$$subdir || exit 1; \
    	  chmod 777 $(distdir)/$$subdir; \
    	  (cd $$subdir && $(MAKE) $@) || exit 1; \
    	done
    	tar chozf $(distdir).tar.gz $(distdir)
    	rm -fr $(distdir)
    

Note that if you are using GNU automake, ‘Makefile.in’ is automatically generated from ‘Makefile.am’, and all needed changes to ‘Makefile.am’ are already made by running ‘gettextize’.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

13.4.12 ‘Makefile.in’ dans ‘src/

Some of the modifications made in the main ‘Makefile.in’ will also be needed in the ‘Makefile.in’ from your package sources, which we assume here to be in the ‘src/’ subdirectory. Here are all the modifications needed in ‘src/Makefile.in’:

  1. In view of the ‘dist:’ goal, you should have these lines near the beginning of ‘src/Makefile.in’:
     
    PACKAGE = @PACKAGE@
    VERSION = @VERSION@
    
  2. If not done already, you should guarantee that top_srcdir gets defined. This will serve for cpp include files. Just add the line:
     
    top_srcdir = @top_srcdir@
    
  3. You might also want to define subdir as ‘src’, later allowing for almost uniform ‘dist:’ goals in all your ‘Makefile.in’. At list, the ‘dist:’ goal below assume that you used:
     
    subdir = src
    
  4. The main function of your program will normally call bindtextdomain (see @pxref{Triggering}), like this:
     
    bindtextdomain (PACKAGE, LOCALEDIR);
    textdomain (PACKAGE);
    

    To make LOCALEDIR known to the program, add the following lines to ‘Makefile.in’:

     
    datadir = @datadir@
    localedir = $(datadir)/locale
    DEFS = -DLOCALEDIR=\"$(localedir)\" @DEFS@
    

    Note that @datadir@ defaults to ‘$(prefix)/share’, thus $(localedir) defaults to ‘$(prefix)/share/locale’.

  5. You should ensure that the final linking will use @LIBINTL@ or @LTLIBINTL@ as a library. @LIBINTL@ is for use without libtool, @LTLIBINTL@ is for use with libtool. An easy way to achieve this is to manage that it gets into LIBS, like this:
     
    LIBS = @LIBINTL@ @LIBS@
    

    In most packages internationalized with GNU gettext, one will find a directory ‘lib/’ in which a library containing some helper functions will be build. (You need at least the few functions which the GNU gettext Library itself needs.) However some of the functions in the ‘lib/’ also give messages to the user which of course should be translated, too. Taking care of this, the support library (say ‘libsupport.a’) should be placed before @LIBINTL@ and @LIBS@ in the above example. So one has to write this:

     
    LIBS = ../lib/libsupport.a @LIBINTL@ @LIBS@
    
  6. You should also ensure that directory ‘intl/’ will be searched for C preprocessor include files in all circumstances. So, you have to manage so both ‘-I../intl’ and ‘-I$(top_srcdir)/intl’ will be given to the C compiler.
  7. Your ‘dist:’ goal has to conform with others. Here is a reasonable definition for it:
     
    distdir = ../$(PACKAGE)-$(VERSION)/$(subdir)
    dist: Makefile $(DISTFILES)
    	for file in $(DISTFILES); do \
    	  ln $$file $(distdir) 2>/dev/null || cp -p $$file $(distdir) || exit 1; \
    	done
    

Note that if you are using GNU automake, ‘Makefile.in’ is automatically generated from ‘Makefile.am’, and the first three changes and the last change are not necessary. The remaining needed ‘Makefile.am’ modifications are the following:

  1. To make LOCALEDIR known to the program, add the following to ‘Makefile.am’:
     
    <module>_CPPFLAGS = -DLOCALEDIR=\"$(localedir)\"
    

    for each specific module or compilation unit, or

     
    AM_CPPFLAGS = -DLOCALEDIR=\"$(localedir)\"
    

    for all modules and compilation units together. Furthermore, add this line to define ‘localedir’:

     
    localedir = $(datadir)/locale
    
  2. To ensure that the final linking will use @LIBINTL@ or @LTLIBINTL@ as a library, add the following to ‘Makefile.am’:
     
    <program>_LDADD = @LIBINTL@
    

    for each specific program, or

     
    LDADD = @LIBINTL@
    

    for all programs together. Remember that when you use libtool to link a program, you need to use @LTLIBINTL@ instead of @LIBINTL@ for that program.

  3. If you have an ‘intl/’ directory, whose contents is created by gettextize, then to ensure that it will be searched for C preprocessor include files in all circumstances, add something like this to ‘Makefile.am’:
     
    AM_CPPFLAGS = -I../intl -I$(top_srcdir)/intl
    

[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

13.4.13 ‘gettext.h’ dans ‘lib/

Internationalization of packages, as provided by GNU gettext, is optional. It can be turned off in two situations:

A C preprocessor macro can be used to detect these two cases. Usually, when libintl.h was found and not explicitly disabled, the ENABLE_NLS macro will be defined to 1 in the autoconf generated configuration file (usually called ‘config.h’). In the two negative situations, however, this macro will not be defined, thus it will evaluate to 0 in C preprocessor expressions.

gettext.h’ is a convenience header file for conditional use of ‘<libintl.h>’, depending on the ENABLE_NLS macro. If ENABLE_NLS is set, it includes ‘<libintl.h>’; otherwise it defines no-op substitutes for the libintl.h functions. We recommend the use of "gettext.h" over direct use of ‘<libintl.h>’, so that portability to older systems is guaranteed and installers can turn off internationalization if they want to. In the C code, you will then write

 
#include "gettext.h"

instead of

 
#include <libintl.h>

The location of gettext.h is usually in a directory containing auxiliary include files. In many GNU packages, there is a directory ‘lib/’ containing helper functions; ‘gettext.h’ fits there. In other packages, it can go into the ‘src’ directory.

Do not install the gettext.h file in public locations. Every package that needs it should contain a copy of it on its own.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

13.5 les macros autoconf pour utiliser dans ‘configure.ac

GNU gettext installs macros for use in a package's ‘configure.ac’ or ‘configure.in’. Voir (autoconf)Top section `Introduction' dans The Autoconf Manual. The primary macro is, of course, AM_GNU_GETTEXT.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

13.5.1 AM_GNU_GETTEXT dans ‘gettext.m4

presence of the GNU gettext function family in either the C library or a separate libintl library (shared or static libraries are both supported) or in the package's ‘intl/’ directory. It also invokes AM_PO_SUBDIRS, thus preparing the ‘po/’ directories of the package for building.

AM_GNU_GETTEXT accepts up to three optional arguments. The general syntax is

 
AM_GNU_GETTEXT([intlsymbol], [needsymbol], [intldir])

intlsymbol can be ‘external’ or ‘no-libtool’. The default (if it is not specified or empty) is ‘no-libtool’. intlsymbol should be ‘external’ for packages with no ‘intl/’ directory. For packages with an ‘intl/’ directory, you can either use an intlsymbol equal to ‘no-libtool’, or you can use ‘external’ and override by using the macro AM_GNU_GETTEXT_INTL_SUBDIR elsewhere. The two ways to specify the existence of an ‘intl/’ directory are equivalent. At build time, a static library $(top_builddir)/intl/libintl.a will then be created.

If needsymbol is specified and is ‘need-ngettext’, then GNU gettext implementations (in libc or libintl) without the ngettext() function will be ignored. If needsymbol is specified and is ‘need-formatstring-macros’, then GNU gettext implementations that don't support the ISO C 99 ‘<inttypes.h>’ formatstring macros will be ignored. Only one needsymbol can be specified. These requirements can also be specified by using the macro AM_GNU_GETTEXT_NEED elsewhere. To specify more than one requirement, just specify the strongest one among them, or invoke the AM_GNU_GETTEXT_NEED macro several times. The hierarchy among the various alternatives is as follows: ‘need-formatstring-macros’ implies ‘need-ngettext’.

intldir is used to find the intl libraries. If empty, the value ‘$(top_builddir)/intl/’ is used.

The AM_GNU_GETTEXT macro determines whether GNU gettext is available and should be used. If so, it sets the USE_NLS variable to ‘yes’; it defines ENABLE_NLS to 1 in the autoconf generated configuration file (usually called ‘config.h’); it sets the variables LIBINTL and LTLIBINTL to the linker options for use in a Makefile (LIBINTL for use without libtool, LTLIBINTL for use with libtool); it adds an ‘-I’ option to CPPFLAGS if necessary. In the negative case, it sets USE_NLS to ‘no’; it sets LIBINTL and LTLIBINTL to empty and doesn't change CPPFLAGS.

The complexities that AM_GNU_GETTEXT deals with are the following:


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

13.5.2 AM_GNU_GETTEXT_VERSION dans ‘gettext.m4

declares the version number of the GNU gettext infrastructure that is used by the package.

The use of this macro is optional; only the autopoint program makes use of it (@pxref{CVS Issues}).


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

13.5.3 AM_GNU_GETTEXT_NEED dans ‘gettext.m4

constraint regarding the GNU gettext implementation. The syntax is

 
AM_GNU_GETTEXT_NEED([needsymbol])

If needsymbol is ‘need-ngettext’, then GNU gettext implementations (in libc or libintl) without the ngettext() function will be ignored. If needsymbol is ‘need-formatstring-macros’, then GNU gettext implementations that don't support the ISO C 99 ‘<inttypes.h>’ formatstring macros will be ignored.

The optional second argument of AM_GNU_GETTEXT is also taken into account.

The AM_GNU_GETTEXT_NEED invocations can occur before or after the AM_GNU_GETTEXT invocation; the order doesn't matter.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

13.5.4 AM_GNU_GETTEXT_INTL_SUBDIR dans ‘intldir.m4

macro specifies that the AM_GNU_GETTEXT macro, although invoked with the first argument ‘external’, should also prepare for building the ‘intl/’ subdirectory.

The AM_GNU_GETTEXT_INTL_SUBDIR invocation can occur before or after the AM_GNU_GETTEXT invocation; the order doesn't matter.

The use of this macro requires GNU automake 1.10 or newer and GNU autoconf 2.61 or newer.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

13.5.5 AM_PO_SUBDIRS dans ‘po.m4

po/’ directories of the package for building. This macro should be used in internationalized programs written in other programming languages than C, C++, Objective C, for example sh, Python, Lisp. See @ref{Programming Languages} for a list of programming languages that support localization through PO files.

The AM_PO_SUBDIRS macro determines whether internationalization should be used. If so, it sets the USE_NLS variable to ‘yes’, otherwise to ‘no’. It also determines the right values for Makefile variables in each ‘po/’ directory.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

13.5.6 AM_XGETTEXT_OPTION in ‘po.m4

command-line option to be used in the invocations of xgettext in the ‘po/’ directories of the package.

For example, if you have a source file that defines a function ‘error_at_line’ whose fifth argument is a format string, you can use

 
AM_XGETTEXT_OPTION([--flag=error_at_line:5:c-format])

to instruct xgettext to mark all translatable strings in ‘gettext’ invocations that occur as fifth argument to this function as ‘c-format’.

See @ref{xgettext Invocation} for the list of options that xgettext accepts.

The use of this macro is an alternative to the use of the ‘XGETTEXT_OPTIONS’ variable in ‘po/Makevars’.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

13.5.7 AM_ICONV dans ‘iconv.m4

POSIX/XSI iconv function family in either the C library or a separate libiconv library. If found, it sets the am_cv_func_iconv variable to ‘yes’; it defines HAVE_ICONV to 1 in the autoconf generated configuration file (usually called ‘config.h’); it defines ICONV_CONST to ‘const’ or to empty, depending on whether the second argument of iconv() is of type ‘const char **’ or ‘char **’; it sets the variables LIBICONV and LTLIBICONV to the linker options for use in a Makefile (LIBICONV for use without libtool, LTLIBICONV for use with libtool); it adds an ‘-I’ option to CPPFLAGS if necessary. If not found, it sets LIBICONV and LTLIBICONV to empty and doesn't change CPPFLAGS.

The complexities that AM_ICONV deals with are the following:

iconv.m4’ is distributed with the GNU gettext package because ‘gettext.m4’ relies on it.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

13.6 Intégration avec CSV

Many projects use CVS for distributed development, version control and source backup. This section gives some advice how to manage the uses of cvs, gettextize, autopoint and autoconf.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

13.6.1 Éviter les incohérences dans un développement distribué.

In a project development with multiple developers, using CVS, there should be a single developer who occasionally - when there is desire to upgrade to a new gettext version - runs gettextize and performs the changes listed in @ref{Adjusting Files}, and then commits his changes to the CVS.

It is highly recommended that all developers on a project use the same version of GNU gettext in the package. In other words, if a developer runs gettextize, he should go the whole way, make the necessary remaining changes and commit his changes to the CVS. Otherwise the following damages will likely occur:


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

13.6.2 Les fichiers à mettre sous le control de version CVS

There are basically three ways to deal with generated files in the context of a CVS repository, such as ‘configure’ generated from ‘configure.ac’, parser.c generated from parser.y, or po/Makefile.in.in autoinstalled by gettextize or autopoint.

  1. All generated files are always committed into the repository.
  2. All generated files are committed into the repository occasionally, for example each time a release is made.
  3. Generated files are never committed into the repository.

Each of these three approaches has different advantages and drawbacks.

  1. The advantage is that anyone can check out the CVS at any moment and gets a working build. The drawbacks are: 1a. It requires some frequent "cvs commit" actions by the maintainers. 1b. The repository grows in size quite fast.
  2. The advantage is that anyone can check out the CVS, and the usual "./configure; make" will work. The drawbacks are: 2a. The one who checks out the repository needs tools like GNU automake, GNU autoconf, GNU m4 installed in his PATH; sometimes he even needs particular versions of them. 2b. When a release is made and a commit is made on the generated files, the other developers get conflicts on the generated files after doing "cvs update". Although these conflicts are easy to resolve, they are annoying.
  3. The advantage is less work for the maintainers. The drawback is that anyone who checks out the CVS not only needs tools like GNU automake, GNU autoconf, GNU m4 installed in his PATH, but also that he needs to perform a package specific pre-build step before being able to "./configure; make".

For the first and second approach, all files modified or brought in by the occasional gettextize invocation and update should be committed into the CVS.

For the third approach, the maintainer can omit from the CVS repository all the files that gettextize mentions as "copy". Instead, he adds to the ‘configure.ac’ or ‘configure.in’ a line of the form

 
AM_GNU_GETTEXT_VERSION(0.17)

and adds to the package's pre-build script an invocation of ‘autopoint’. For everyone who checks out the CVS, this autopoint invocation will copy into the right place the gettext infrastructure files that have been omitted from the CVS.

The version number used as argument to AM_GNU_GETTEXT_VERSION is the version of the gettext infrastructure that the package wants to use. It is also the minimum version number of the ‘autopoint’ program. So, if you write AM_GNU_GETTEXT_VERSION(0.11.5) then the developers can have any version >= 0.11.5 installed; the package will work with the 0.11.5 infrastructure in all developers' builds. When the maintainer then runs gettextize from, say, version 0.12.1 on the package, the occurrence of AM_GNU_GETTEXT_VERSION(0.11.5) will be changed into AM_GNU_GETTEXT_VERSION(0.12.1), and all other developers that use the CVS will henceforth need to have GNU gettext 0.12.1 or newer installed.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

13.6.3 Invocation du programme autopoint

 
autopoint [option]...

Le programme autopoint copie les fichiers standards de l'infrastructure de gettext dans le paquet des fichiers sources. Il extrait la version de gettext utilisée par le progiciel depuis un appel par macro de la forme AM_GNU_GETTEXT_VERSION(version) – macros que l'on trouve dans les fichiers ‘configure.in’ ou ‘configure.ac’ du progiciel – et il copie les fichiers de l'infrastructure correspondant à cette version de gettext dans le progiciel.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

13.6.3.1 Options

-f
--force

Force overwriting of files that already exist.

-n
--dry-run

Print modifications but don't perform them. All file copying actions that autopoint would normally execute are inhibited and instead only listed on standard output.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

13.6.3.2 Sortie informative

--help

Display this help and exit.

--version

Output version information and exit.

autopoint supporte les versions de GNU gettext allant de 0.10.35 à la version courante, 0.17. Pour appliquer apply autopoint à un progiciel utilisant une version de gettext postérieure à 0.17, vous aurez besoin d'installer au moins cette même version de GNU gettext.

Dans les progiciels utilisant GNU automake, une invocation de autopoint devrait être suivie par des invocations de aclocal et ensuite autoconf et autoheader. La raison en est que autopoint installe certains fichiers de macros autoconf, qui sont utilisés par aclocal pour créer le fichier ‘aclocal.m4’ et ce dernier est utilisé par autoconf pour créer les fichiers de script ‘configure’ du progiciel et l'entête automatique (ndt autoheader) pour créer les fichiers modèles include ‘config.h.in’ du progiciel.

Le nom ‘autopoint’ est une abréviation pour ‘auto-po-intl-m4’ ; l'outil copie ou met presque à jour les fichiers dans les répertoires ‘po’, ‘intl’, ‘m4’.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

13.7 Créer un fichier de distribution tarball

In projects that use GNU automake, the usual commands for creating a distribution tarball, ‘make dist’ or ‘make distcheck’, automatically update the PO files as needed.

If GNU automake is not used, the maintainer needs to perform this update before making a release:

 
$ ./configure
$ (cd po; make update-po)
$ make distclean

[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

14. Le point de vue des installateurs et des distributeurs

By default, packages fully using GNU gettext, internally, are installed in such a way that they to allow translation of messages. At configuration time, those packages should automatically detect whether the underlying host system already provides the GNU gettext functions. If not, the GNU gettext library should be automatically prepared and used. Installers may use special options at configuration time for changing this behavior. The command ‘./configure --with-included-gettext’ bypasses system gettext to use the included GNU gettext instead, while ‘./configure --disable-nls’ produces programs totally unable to translate messages.

Internationalized packages have usually many ‘ll.po’ files. Unless translations are disabled, all those available are installed together with the package. However, the environment variable LINGUAS may be set, prior to configuration, to limit the installed set. LINGUAS should then contain a space separated list of two-letter codes, stating which languages are allowed.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15. Autres languages de programmation

While the presentation of gettext focuses mostly on C and implicitly applies to C++ as well, its scope is far broader than that: Many programming languages, scripting languages and other textual data like GUI resources or package descriptions can make use of the gettext approach.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.1 Le point de vue de l'implémentaire d'une langue

All programming and scripting languages that have the notion of strings are eligible to supporting gettext. Supporting gettext means the following:

  1. You should add to the language a syntax for translatable strings. In principle, a function call of gettext would do, but a shorthand syntax helps keeping the legibility of internationalized programs. For example, in C we use the syntax _("string"), and in GNU awk we use the shorthand _"string".
  2. You should arrange that evaluation of such a translatable string at runtime calls the gettext function, or performs equivalent processing.
  3. Similarly, you should make the functions ngettext, dcgettext, dcngettext available from within the language. These functions are less often used, but are nevertheless necessary for particular purposes: ngettext for correct plural handling, and dcgettext and dcngettext for obeying other locale-related environment variables than LC_MESSAGES, such as LC_TIME or LC_MONETARY. For these latter functions, you need to make the LC_* constants, available in the C header <locale.h>, referenceable from within the language, usually either as enumeration values or as strings.
  4. You should allow the programmer to designate a message domain, either by making the textdomain function available from within the language, or by introducing a magic variable called TEXTDOMAIN. Similarly, you should allow the programmer to designate where to search for message catalogs, by providing access to the bindtextdomain function.
  5. You should either perform a setlocale (LC_ALL, "") call during the startup of your language runtime, or allow the programmer to do so. Remember that gettext will act as a no-op if the LC_MESSAGES and LC_CTYPE locale categories are not both set.
  6. A programmer should have a way to extract translatable strings from a program into a PO file. The GNU xgettext program is being extended to support very different programming languages. Please contact the GNU gettext maintainers to help them doing this. If the string extractor is best integrated into your language's parser, GNU xgettext can function as a front end to your string extractor.
  7. The language's library should have a string formatting facility where the arguments of a format string are denoted by a positional number or a name. This is needed because for some languages and some messages with more than one substitutable argument, the translation will need to output the substituted arguments in different order. @xref{c-format Flag}.
  8. If the language has more than one implementation, and not all of the implementations use gettext, but the programs should be portable across implementations, you should provide a no-i18n emulation, that makes the other implementations accept programs written for yours, without actually translating the strings.
  9. To help the programmer in the task of marking translatable strings, which is sometimes performed using the Emacs PO mode (@pxref{Marking}), you are welcome to contact the GNU gettext maintainers, so they can add support for your language to ‘po-mode.el’.

On the implementation side, three approaches are possible, with different effects on portability and copyright:


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.2 Le point de vue du programmeur

For the programmer, the general procedure is the same as for the C language. The Emacs PO mode marking supports other languages, and the GNU xgettext string extractor recognizes other languages based on the file extension or a command-line option. In some languages, setlocale is not needed because it is already performed by the underlying language runtime.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.3 Le point de vue de traducteur

The translator works exactly as in the C language case. The only difference is that when translating format strings, she has to be aware of the language's particular syntax for positional arguments in format strings.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.3.1 Format des chaînes en C

C format strings are described in POSIX (IEEE P1003.1 2001), section XSH 3 fprintf(), http://www.opengroup.org/onlinepubs/007904975/functions/fprintf.html. See also the fprintf() manual page, http://www.linuxvalley.it/encyclopedia/ldp/manpage/man3/printf.3.php, http://informatik.fh-wuerzburg.de/student/i510/man/printf.html.

Although format strings with positions that reorder arguments, such as

 
"Only %2$d bytes free on '%1$s'."

which is semantically equivalent to

 
"'%s' has only %d bytes free."

are a POSIX/XSI feature and not specified by ISO C 99, translators can rely on this reordering ability: On the few platforms where printf(), fprintf() etc. don't support this feature natively, ‘libintl.a’ or ‘libintl.so’ provides replacement functions, and GNU <libintl.h> activates these replacement functions automatically.

As a special feature for Farsi (Persian) and maybe Arabic, translators can insert an ‘I’ flag into numeric format directives. For example, the translation of "%d" can be "%Id". The effect of this flag, on systems with GNU libc, is that in the output, the ASCII digits are replaced with the ‘outdigits’ defined in the LC_CTYPE locale category. On other systems, the gettext function removes this flag, so that it has no effect.

Note that the programmer should not put this flag into the untranslated string. (Putting the ‘I’ format directive flag into an msgid string would lead to undefined behaviour on platforms without glibc when NLS is disabled.)


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.3.2 Le format des chaînes en Objective C

Objective C format strings are like C format strings. They support an additional format directive: "$@", which when executed consumes an argument of type Object *.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.3.3 Le format des chaînes en Shell

Shell format strings, as supported by GNU gettext and the ‘envsubst’ program, are strings with references to shell variables in the form $variable or ${variable}. References of the form ${variable-default}, ${variable:-default}, ${variable=default}, ${variable:=default}, ${variable+replacement}, ${variable:+replacement}, ${variable?ignored}, ${variable:?ignored}, that would be valid inside shell scripts, are not supported. The variable names must consist solely of alphanumeric or underscore ASCII characters, not start with a digit and be nonempty; otherwise such a variable reference is ignored.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.3.4 Le format des chaînes en Python

Python format strings are described in Python Library reference / 2. Built-in Types, Exceptions and Functions / 2.2. Built-in Types / 2.2.6. Sequence Types / 2.2.6.2. String Formatting Operations. http://www.python.org/doc/2.2.1/lib/typesseq-strings.html.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.3.5 Le format des chaînes en Lisp

Lisp format strings are described in the Common Lisp HyperSpec, chapter 22.3 Formatted Output, http://www.lisp.org/HyperSpec/Body/sec_22-3.html.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.3.6 Le format des chaînes en Emacs Lisp

Emacs Lisp format strings are documented in the Emacs Lisp reference, section Formatting Strings, http://www.gnu.org/manual/elisp-manual-21-2.8/html_chapter/elisp_4.html#SEC75. Note that as of version 21, XEmacs supports numbered argument specifications in format strings while FSF Emacs doesn't.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.3.7 Le format des chaînes en librep

librep format strings are documented in the librep manual, section Formatted Output, http://librep.sourceforge.net/librep-manual.html#Formatted%20Output, http://www.gwinnup.org/research/docs/librep.html#SEC122.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.3.8 Le format des chaînes Scheme

Scheme format strings are documented in the SLIB manual, section Format Specification.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.3.9 Le format des chaînes Smalltalk

Smalltalk format strings are described in the GNU Smalltalk documentation, class CharArray, methods ‘bindWith:’ and ‘bindWithArguments:’. http://www.gnu.org/software/smalltalk/gst-manual/gst_68.html#SEC238. In summary, a directive starts with ‘%’ and is followed by ‘%’ or a nonzero digit (‘1’ to ‘9’).


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.3.10 Le format des chaînes Java

Java format strings are described in the JDK documentation for class java.text.MessageFormat, http://java.sun.com/j2se/1.4/docs/api/java/text/MessageFormat.html. See also the ICU documentation http://oss.software.ibm.com/icu/apiref/classMessageFormat.html.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.3.11 Le format des chaînes C#

C# format strings are described in the .NET documentation for class System.String and in http://msdn.microsoft.com/library/default.asp?url=/library/en-us/cpguide/html/cpConFormattingOverview.asp.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.3.12 Le format des chaînes Awk

awk format strings are described in the gawk documentation, section Printf, http://www.gnu.org/manual/gawk/html_node/Printf.html#Printf.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.3.13 Le format des chaînes Object Pascal

Where is this documented?


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.3.14 Le format des chaînes YCP

YCP sformat strings are described in the libycp documentation file:/usr/share/doc/packages/libycp/YCP-builtins.html. In summary, a directive starts with ‘%’ and is followed by ‘%’ or a nonzero digit (‘1’ to ‘9’).


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.3.15 Le format des chaînes Tcl

Tcl format strings are described in the ‘format.n’ manual page, http://www.scriptics.com/man/tcl8.3/TclCmd/format.htm.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.3.16 Le format des chaînes Perl

There are two kinds format strings in Perl: those acceptable to the Perl built-in function printf, labelled as ‘perl-format’, and those acceptable to the libintl-perl function __x, labelled as ‘perl-brace-format’.

Perl printf format strings are described in the sprintf section of ‘man perlfunc’.

Perl brace format strings are described in the ‘Locale::TextDomain(3pm)’ manual page of the CPAN package libintl-perl. In brief, Perl format uses placeholders put between braces (‘{’ and ‘}’). The placeholder must have the syntax of simple identifiers.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.3.17 Le format des chaînes PHP

PHP format strings are described in the documentation of the PHP function sprintf, in ‘phpdoc/manual/function.sprintf.html’ or http://www.php.net/manual/en/function.sprintf.php.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.3.18 Le format interne des chaînes de GCC

These format strings are used inside the GCC sources. In such a format string, a directive starts with ‘%’, is optionally followed by a size specifier ‘l’, an optional flag ‘+’, another optional flag ‘#’, and is finished by a specifier: ‘%’ denotes a literal percent sign, ‘c’ denotes a character, ‘s’ denotes a string, ‘i’ and ‘d’ denote an integer, ‘o’, ‘u’, ‘x’ denote an unsigned integer, ‘.*s’ denotes a string preceded by a width specification, ‘H’ denotes a ‘location_t *’ pointer, ‘D’ denotes a general declaration, ‘F’ denotes a function declaration, ‘T’ denotes a type, ‘A’ denotes a function argument, ‘C’ denotes a tree code, ‘E’ denotes an expression, ‘L’ denotes a programming language, ‘O’ denotes a binary operator, ‘P’ denotes a function parameter, ‘Q’ denotes an assignment operator, ‘V’ denotes a const/volatile qualifier.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.3.19 Le format des chaînes Qt

Qt format strings are described in the documentation of the QString class file:/usr/lib/qt-4.3.0/doc/html/qstring.html. In summary, a directive consists of a ‘%’ followed by a digit. The same directive cannot occur more than once in a format string.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.3.20 Le format des chaînes de KDE

KDE 4 format strings are defined as follows: A directive consists of a ‘%’ followed by a non-zero decimal number. If a ‘%n’ occurs in a format strings, all of ‘%1’, ..., ‘%(n-1)’ must occur as well, except possibly one of them.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.3.21 Le format des chaînes Boost

Boost format strings are described in the documentation of the boost::format class, at http://www.boost.org/libs/format/doc/format.html. In summary, a directive has either the same syntax as in a C format string, such as ‘%1$+5d’, or may be surrounded by vertical bars, such as ‘%|1$+5d|’ or ‘%|1$+5|’, or consists of just an argument number between percent signs, such as ‘%1%’.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.4 Le point de vue des mainteneurs du programme

For the maintainer, the general procedure differs from the C language case in two ways.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.5 Languages de programmation individuels


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.5.1 C, C++, Objective C

RPMs

gcc, gpp, gobjc, glibc, gettext

File extension

For C: c, h.
For C++: C, c++, cc, cxx, cpp, hpp.
For Objective C: m.

String syntax

"abc"

gettext shorthand

_("abc")

gettext/ngettext functions

gettext, dgettext, dcgettext, ngettext, dngettext, dcngettext

textdomain

textdomain function

bindtextdomain

bindtextdomain function

setlocale

Programmer must call setlocale (LC_ALL, "")

Prerequisite

#include <libintl.h>
#include <locale.h>
#define _(string) gettext (string)

Use or emulate GNU gettext

Use

Extractor

xgettext -k_

Formatting with positions

fprintf "%2$d %1$d"
In C++: autosprintf "%2$d %1$d" (voir (autosprintf)Top section `Introduction' dans GNU autosprintf)

Portability

autoconf (gettext.m4) and #if ENABLE_NLS

po-mode marking

yes

The following examples are available in the ‘examples’ directory: hello-c, hello-c-gnome, hello-c++, hello-c++-qt, hello-c++-kde, hello-c++-gnome, hello-c++-wxwidgets, hello-objc, hello-objc-gnustep, hello-objc-gnome.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.5.2 sh - Shell Script

RPMs

bash, gettext

File extension

sh

String syntax

"abc", 'abc', abc

gettext shorthand

"`gettext \"abc\"`"

gettext/ngettext functions

gettext, ngettext programs
eval_gettext, eval_ngettext shell functions

textdomain

environment variable TEXTDOMAIN

bindtextdomain

environment variable TEXTDOMAINDIR

setlocale

automatic

Prerequisite

. gettext.sh

Use or emulate GNU gettext

use

Extractor

xgettext

Formatting with positions

Portability

fully portable

po-mode marking

An example is available in the ‘examples’ directory: hello-sh.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.5.2.1 Préparation des scripts Shell pour l'internationalisation

Preparing a shell script for internationalization is conceptually similar to the steps described in @ref{Sources}. The concrete steps for shell scripts are as follows.

  1. Insert the line
     
    . gettext.sh
    

    near the top of the script. gettext.sh is a shell function library that provides the functions eval_gettext (see @ref{eval_gettext Invocation}) and eval_ngettext (see @ref{eval_ngettext Invocation}). You have to ensure that gettext.sh can be found in the PATH.

  2. Set and export the TEXTDOMAIN and TEXTDOMAINDIR environment variables. Usually TEXTDOMAIN is the package or program name, and TEXTDOMAINDIR is the absolute pathname corresponding to $prefix/share/locale, where $prefix is the installation location.
     
    TEXTDOMAIN=@PACKAGE@
    export TEXTDOMAIN
    TEXTDOMAINDIR=@LOCALEDIR@
    export TEXTDOMAINDIR
    
  3. Prepare the strings for translation, as described in @ref{Preparing Strings}.
  4. Simplify translatable strings so that they don't contain command substitution ("`...`" or "$(...)"), variable access with defaulting (like ${variable-default}), access to positional arguments (like $0, $1, ...) or highly volatile shell variables (like $?). This can always be done through simple local code restructuring. For example,
     
    echo "Usage: $0 [OPTION] FILE..."
    

    becomes

     
    program_name=$0
    echo "Usage: $program_name [OPTION] FILE..."
    

    Similarly,

     
    echo "Remaining files: `ls | wc -l`"
    

    becomes

     
    filecount="`ls | wc -l`"
    echo "Remaining files: $filecount"
    
  5. For each translatable string, change the output command ‘echo’ or ‘$echo’ to ‘gettext’ (if the string contains no references to shell variables) or to ‘eval_gettext’ (if it refers to shell variables), followed by a no-argument ‘echo’ command (to account for the terminating newline). Similarly, for cases with plural handling, replace a conditional ‘echo’ command with an invocation of ‘ngettext’ or ‘eval_ngettext’, followed by a no-argument ‘echo’ command.

    When doing this, you also need to add an extra backslash before the dollar sign in references to shell variables, so that the ‘eval_gettext’ function receives the translatable string before the variable values are substituted into it. For example,

     
    echo "Remaining files: $filecount"
    

    becomes

     
    eval_gettext "Remaining files: \$filecount"; echo
    

    If the output command is not ‘echo’, you can make it use ‘echo’ nevertheless, through the use of backquotes. However, note that inside backquotes, backslashes must be doubled to be effective (because the backquoting eats one level of backslashes). For example, assuming that ‘error’ is a shell function that signals an error,

     
    error "file not found: $filename"
    

    is first transformed into

     
    error "`echo \"file not found: \$filename\"`"
    

    which then becomes

     
    error "`eval_gettext \"file not found: \\\$filename\"`"
    

[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.5.2.2 Contenu de gettext.sh

gettext.sh, contained in the run-time package of GNU gettext, provides the following:


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.5.2.3 Invocation du programme gettext

 
gettext [option] [[textdomain] msgid]
gettext [option] -s [msgid]...

The gettext program displays the native language translation of a textual message.

Arguments

-d textdomain
--domain=textdomain

Retrieve translated messages from textdomain. Usually a textdomain corresponds to a package, a program, or a module of a program.

-e

Enable expansion of some escape sequences. This option is for compatibility with the ‘echo’ program or shell built-in. The escape sequences ‘\a’, ‘\b’, ‘\c’, ‘\f’, ‘\n’, ‘\r’, ‘\t’, ‘\v’, ‘\\’, and ‘\’ followed by one to three octal digits, are interpreted like the System V ‘echo’ program did.

-E

This option is only for compatibility with the ‘echo’ program or shell built-in. It has no effect.

-h
--help

Display this help and exit.

-n

Suppress trailing newline. By default, gettext adds a newline to the output.

-V
--version

Output version information and exit.

[textdomain] msgid

Retrieve translated message corresponding to msgid from textdomain.

If the textdomain parameter is not given, the domain is determined from the environment variable TEXTDOMAIN. If the message catalog is not found in the regular directory, another location can be specified with the environment variable TEXTDOMAINDIR.

When used with the -s option the program behaves like the ‘echo’ command. But it does not simply copy its arguments to stdout. Instead those messages found in the selected catalog are translated.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.5.2.4 Invocation du programme ngettext

 
ngettext [option] [textdomain] msgid msgid-plural count

The ngettext program displays the native language translation of a textual message whose grammatical form depends on a number.

Arguments

-d textdomain
--domain=textdomain

Retrieve translated messages from textdomain. Usually a textdomain corresponds to a package, a program, or a module of a program.

-e

Enable expansion of some escape sequences. This option is for compatibility with the ‘gettext’ program. The escape sequences ‘\a’, ‘\b’, ‘\c’, ‘\f’, ‘\n’, ‘\r’, ‘\t’, ‘\v’, ‘\\’, and ‘\’ followed by one to three octal digits, are interpreted like the System V ‘echo’ program did.

-E

This option is only for compatibility with the ‘gettext’ program. It has no effect.

-h
--help

Display this help and exit.

-V
--version

Output version information and exit.

textdomain

Retrieve translated message from textdomain.

msgid msgid-plural

Translate msgid (English singular) / msgid-plural (English plural).

count

Choose singular/plural form based on this value.

If the textdomain parameter is not given, the domain is determined from the environment variable TEXTDOMAIN. If the message catalog is not found in the regular directory, another location can be specified with the environment variable TEXTDOMAINDIR.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.5.2.5 Invocation du programme envsubst

 
envsubst [option] [shell-format]

The envsubst program substitutes the values of environment variables.

Operation mode

-v
--variables

Output the variables occurring in shell-format.

Informative output

-h
--help

Display this help and exit.

-V
--version

Output version information and exit.

In normal operation mode, standard input is copied to standard output, with references to environment variables of the form $VARIABLE or ${VARIABLE} being replaced with the corresponding values. If a shell-format is given, only those environment variables that are referenced in shell-format are substituted; otherwise all environment variables references occurring in standard input are substituted.

These substitutions are a subset of the substitutions that a shell performs on unquoted and double-quoted strings. Other kinds of substitutions done by a shell, such as ${variable-default} or $(command-list) or `command-list`, are not performed by the envsubst program, due to security reasons.

When --variables is used, standard input is ignored, and the output consists of the environment variables that are referenced in shell-format, one per line.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.5.2.6 Invocation de la fonction eval_gettext

 
eval_gettext msgid

This function outputs the native language translation of a textual message, performing dollar-substitution on the result. Note that only shell variables mentioned in msgid will be dollar-substituted in the result.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.5.2.7 Invocation de la fonction eval_ngettext

 
eval_ngettext msgid msgid-plural count

This function outputs the native language translation of a textual message whose grammatical form depends on a number, performing dollar-substitution on the result. Note that only shell variables mentioned in msgid or msgid-plural will be dollar-substituted in the result.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.5.3 bash - Bourne-Again Shell Script

GNU bash 2.0 or newer has a special shorthand for translating a string and substituting variable values in it: $"msgid". But the use of this construct is discouraged, due to the security holes it opens and due to its portability problems.

The security holes of $"..." come from the fact that after looking up the translation of the string, bash processes it like it processes any double-quoted string: dollar and backquote processing, like ‘eval’ does.

  1. In a locale whose encoding is one of BIG5, BIG5-HKSCS, GBK, GB18030, SHIFT_JIS, JOHAB, some double-byte characters have a second byte whose value is 0x60. For example, the byte sequence \xe0\x60 is a single character in these locales. Many versions of bash (all versions up to bash-2.05, and newer versions on platforms without mbsrtowcs() function) don't know about character boundaries and see a backquote character where there is only a particular Chinese character. Thus it can start executing part of the translation as a command list. This situation can occur even without the translator being aware of it: if the translator provides translations in the UTF-8 encoding, it is the gettext() function which will, during its conversion from the translator's encoding to the user's locale's encoding, produce the dangerous \x60 bytes.
  2. A translator could - voluntarily or inadvertently - use backquotes "`...`" or dollar-parentheses "$(...)" in her translations. The enclosed strings would be executed as command lists by the shell.

The portability problem is that bash must be built with internationalization support; this is normally not the case on systems that don't have the gettext() function in libc.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.5.4 Python

RPMs

python

File extension

py

String syntax

'abc', u'abc', r'abc', ur'abc',
"abc", u"abc", r"abc", ur"abc",
'''abc''', u'''abc''', r'''abc''', ur'''abc''',
"""abc""", u"""abc""", r"""abc""", ur"""abc"""

gettext shorthand

_('abc') etc.

gettext/ngettext functions

gettext.gettext, gettext.dgettext, gettext.ngettext, gettext.dngettext, also ugettext, ungettext

textdomain

gettext.textdomain function, or gettext.install(domain) function

bindtextdomain

gettext.bindtextdomain function, or gettext.install(domain,localedir) function

setlocale

not used by the gettext emulation

Prerequisite

import gettext

Use or emulate GNU gettext

emulate

Extractor

xgettext

Formatting with positions

'...%(ident)d...' % { 'ident': value }

Portability

fully portable

po-mode marking

An example is available in the ‘examples’ directory: hello-python.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.5.5 Gnu clisp - Comon Lisp

RPMs

clisp 2.28 or newer

File extension

lisp

String syntax

"abc"

gettext shorthand

(_ "abc"), (ENGLISH "abc")

gettext/ngettext functions

i18n:gettext, i18n:ngettext

textdomain

i18n:textdomain

bindtextdomain

i18n:textdomaindir

setlocale

automatic

Prerequisite

Use or emulate GNU gettext

use

Extractor

xgettext -k_ -kENGLISH

Formatting with positions

format "~1@*~D ~0@*~D"

Portability

On platforms without gettext, no translation.

po-mode marking

An example is available in the ‘examples’ directory: hello-clisp.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.5.6 sources GNU cliso C

RPMs

clisp

File extension

d

String syntax

"abc"

gettext shorthand

ENGLISH ? "abc" : ""
GETTEXT("abc")
GETTEXTL("abc")

gettext/ngettext functions

clgettext, clgettextl

textdomain

bindtextdomain

setlocale

automatic

Prerequisite

#include "lispbibl.c"

Use or emulate GNU gettext

use

Extractor

clisp-xgettext

Formatting with positions

fprintf "%2$d %1$d"

Portability

On platforms without gettext, no translation.

po-mode marking


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.5.7 Emacs Lisp

RPMs

emacs, xemacs

File extension

el

String syntax

"abc"

gettext shorthand

(_"abc")

gettext/ngettext functions

gettext, dgettext (xemacs only)

textdomain

domain special form (xemacs only)

bindtextdomain

bind-text-domain function (xemacs only)

setlocale

automatic

Prerequisite

Use or emulate GNU gettext

use

Extractor

xgettext

Formatting with positions

format "%2$d %1$d"

Portability

Only XEmacs. Without I18N3 defined at build time, no translation.

po-mode marking


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.5.8 librep

RPMs

librep 0.15.3 or newer

File extension

jl

String syntax

"abc"

gettext shorthand

(_"abc")

gettext/ngettext functions

gettext

textdomain

textdomain function

bindtextdomain

bindtextdomain function

setlocale

Prerequisite

(require 'rep.i18n.gettext)

Use or emulate GNU gettext

use

Extractor

xgettext

Formatting with positions

format "%2$d %1$d"

Portability

On platforms without gettext, no translation.

po-mode marking

An example is available in the ‘examples’ directory: hello-librep.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.5.9 Gnu guile - Scheme

RPMs

guile

File extension

scm

String syntax

"abc"

gettext shorthand

(_ "abc")

gettext/ngettext functions

gettext, ngettext

textdomain

textdomain

bindtextdomain

bindtextdomain

setlocale

(catch #t (lambda () (setlocale LC_ALL "")) (lambda args #f))

Prerequisite

(use-modules (ice-9 format))

Use or emulate GNU gettext

use

Extractor

xgettext -k_

Formatting with positions

Portability

On platforms without gettext, no translation.

po-mode marking

An example is available in the ‘examples’ directory: hello-guile.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.5.10 GNU Smalltalk

RPMs

smalltalk

File extension

st

String syntax

'abc'

gettext shorthand

NLS ? 'abc'

gettext/ngettext functions

LcMessagesDomain>>#at:, LcMessagesDomain>>#at:plural:with:

textdomain

LcMessages>>#domain:localeDirectory: (returns a LcMessagesDomain object).
Example: I18N Locale default messages domain: 'gettext' localeDirectory: /usr/local/share/locale'

bindtextdomain

LcMessages>>#domain:localeDirectory:, see above.

setlocale

Automatic if you use I18N Locale default.

Prerequisite

PackageLoader fileInPackage: 'I18N'!

Use or emulate GNU gettext

emulate

Extractor

xgettext

Formatting with positions

'%1 %2' bindWith: 'Hello' with: 'world'

Portability

fully portable

po-mode marking

An example is available in the ‘examples’ directory: hello-smalltalk.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.5.11 Java

RPMs

java, java2

File extension

java

String syntax

"abc"

gettext shorthand

_("abc")

gettext/ngettext functions

GettextResource.gettext, GettextResource.ngettext, GettextResource.pgettext, GettextResource.npgettext

textdomain

—, use ResourceBundle.getResource instead

bindtextdomain

—, use CLASSPATH instead

setlocale

automatic

Prerequisite

Use or emulate GNU gettext

—, uses a Java specific message catalog format

Extractor

xgettext -k_

Formatting with positions

MessageFormat.format "{1,number} {0,number}"

Portability

fully portable

po-mode marking

Before marking strings as internationalizable, uses of the string concatenation operator need to be converted to MessageFormat applications. For example, "file "+filename+" not found" becomes MessageFormat.format("file {0} not found", new Object[] { filename }). Only after this is done, can the strings be marked and extracted.

GNU gettext uses the native Java internationalization mechanism, namely ResourceBundles. There are two formats of ResourceBundles: .properties files and .class files. The .properties format is a text file which the translators can directly edit, like PO files, but which doesn't support plural forms. Whereas the .class format is compiled from .java source code and can support plural forms (provided it is accessed through an appropriate API, see below).

To convert a PO file to a .properties file, the msgcat program can be used with the option --properties-output. To convert a .properties file back to a PO file, the msgcat program can be used with the option --properties-input. All the tools that manipulate PO files can work with .properties files as well, if given the --properties-input and/or --properties-output option.

To convert a PO file to a ResourceBundle class, the msgfmt program can be used with the option --java or --java2. To convert a ResourceBundle back to a PO file, the msgunfmt program can be used with the option --java.

Two different programmatic APIs can be used to access ResourceBundles. Note that both APIs work with all kinds of ResourceBundles, whether GNU gettext generated classes, or other .class or .properties files.

  1. The java.util.ResourceBundle API.

    In particular, its getString function returns a string translation. Note that a missing translation yields a MissingResourceException.

    This has the advantage of being the standard API. And it does not require any additional libraries, only the msgcat generated .properties files or the msgfmt generated .class files. But it cannot do plural handling, even if the resource was generated by msgfmt from a PO file with plural handling.

  2. The gnu.gettext.GettextResource API.

    Reference documentation in Javadoc 1.1 style format is in the javadoc2 directory.

    Its gettext function returns a string translation. Note that when a translation is missing, the msgid argument is returned unchanged.

    This has the advantage of having the ngettext function for plural handling and the pgettext and npgettext for strings constraint to a particular context.

    To use this API, one needs the libintl.jar file which is part of the GNU gettext package and distributed under the LGPL.

Four examples, using the second API, are available in the ‘examples’ directory: hello-java, hello-java-awt, hello-java-swing, hello-java-qtjambi.

Now, to make use of the API and define a shorthand for ‘getString’, there are three idioms that you can choose from:

Which of the three idioms you choose, will depend on whether your project requires portability to Java versions prior to Java 1.5 and, if so, whether copying two lines of codes into every class is more acceptable in your project than a class with a single-letter name.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.5.12 C#

RPMs

pnet, pnetlib 0.6.2 or newer, or mono 0.29 or newer

File extension

cs

String syntax

"abc", @"abc"

gettext shorthand

_("abc")

gettext/ngettext functions

GettextResourceManager.GetString, GettextResourceManager.GetPluralString GettextResourceManager.GetParticularString GettextResourceManager.GetParticularPluralString

textdomain

new GettextResourceManager(domain)

bindtextdomain

—, compiled message catalogs are located in subdirectories of the directory containing the executable

setlocale

automatic

Prerequisite

Use or emulate GNU gettext

—, uses a C# specific message catalog format

Extractor

xgettext -k_

Formatting with positions

String.Format "{1} {0}"

Portability

fully portable

po-mode marking

Before marking strings as internationalizable, uses of the string concatenation operator need to be converted to String.Format invocations. For example, "file "+filename+" not found" becomes String.Format("file {0} not found", filename). Only after this is done, can the strings be marked and extracted.

GNU gettext uses the native C#/.NET internationalization mechanism, namely the classes ResourceManager and ResourceSet. Applications use the ResourceManager methods to retrieve the native language translation of strings. An instance of ResourceSet is the in-memory representation of a message catalog file. The ResourceManager loads and accesses ResourceSet instances as needed to look up the translations.

There are two formats of ResourceSets that can be directly loaded by the C# runtime: .resources files and .dll files.

Note that these .NET .dll and .exe files are not tied to a particular platform; their file format and GNU gettext for C# can be used on any platform.

To convert a PO file to a .resources file, the msgfmt program can be used with the option ‘--csharp-resources’. To convert a .resources file back to a PO file, the msgunfmt program can be used with the option ‘--csharp-resources’. You can also, in some cases, use the resgen program (from the pnet package) or the monoresgen program (from the mono/mcs package). These programs can also convert a .resources file back to a PO file. But beware: as of this writing (January 2004), the monoresgen converter is quite buggy and the resgen converter ignores the encoding of the PO files.

To convert a PO file to a .dll file, the msgfmt program can be used with the option --csharp. The result will be a .dll file containing a subclass of GettextResourceSet, which itself is a subclass of ResourceSet. To convert a .dll file containing a GettextResourceSet subclass back to a PO file, the msgunfmt program can be used with the option --csharp.

The advantages of the .dll format over the .resources format are:

  1. Freedom to localize: Users can add their own translations to an application after it has been built and distributed. Whereas when the programmer uses a ResourceManager constructor provided by the system, the set of .resources files for an application must be specified when the application is built and cannot be extended afterwards.
  2. Plural handling: A message catalog in .dll format supports the plural handling function GetPluralString. Whereas .resources files can only contain data and only support lookups that depend on a single string.
  3. Context handling: A message catalog in .dll format supports the query-with-context functions GetParticularString and GetParticularPluralString. Whereas .resources files can only contain data and only support lookups that depend on a single string.
  4. The GettextResourceManager that loads the message catalogs in .dll format also provides for inheritance on a per-message basis. For example, in Austrian (de_AT) locale, translations from the German (de) message catalog will be used for messages not found in the Austrian message catalog. This has the consequence that the Austrian translators need only translate those few messages for which the translation into Austrian differs from the German one. Whereas when working with .resources files, each message catalog must provide the translations of all messages by itself.
  5. The GettextResourceManager that loads the message catalogs in .dll format also provides for a fallback: The English msgid is returned when no translation can be found. Whereas when working with .resources files, a language-neutral .resources file must explicitly be provided as a fallback.

On the side of the programmatic APIs, the programmer can use either the standard ResourceManager API and the GNU GettextResourceManager API. The latter is an extension of the former, because GettextResourceManager is a subclass of ResourceManager.

  1. The System.Resources.ResourceManager API.

    This API works with resources in .resources format.

    The creation of the ResourceManager is done through

     
      new ResourceManager(domainname, Assembly.GetExecutingAssembly())
    

    The GetString function returns a string's translation. Note that this function returns null when a translation is missing (i.e. not even found in the fallback resource file).

  2. The GNU.Gettext.GettextResourceManager API.

    This API works with resources in .dll format.

    Reference documentation is in the csharpdoc directory.

    The creation of the ResourceManager is done through

     
      new GettextResourceManager(domainname)
    

    The GetString function returns a string's translation. Note that when a translation is missing, the msgid argument is returned unchanged.

    The GetPluralString function returns a string translation with plural handling, like the ngettext function in C.

    The GetParticularString function returns a string's translation, specific to a particular context, like the pgettext function in C. Note that when a translation is missing, the msgid argument is returned unchanged.

    The GetParticularPluralString function returns a string translation, specific to a particular context, with plural handling, like the npgettext function in C.

    To use this API, one needs the GNU.Gettext.dll file which is part of the GNU gettext package and distributed under the LGPL.

You can also mix both approaches: use the GNU.Gettext.GettextResourceManager constructor, but otherwise use only the ResourceManager type and only the GetString method. This is appropriate when you want to profit from the tools for PO files, but don't want to change an existing source code that uses ResourceManager and don't (yet) need the GetPluralString method.

Two examples, using the second API, are available in the ‘examples’ directory: hello-csharp, hello-csharp-forms.

Now, to make use of the API and define a shorthand for ‘GetString’, there are two idioms that you can choose from:

Which of the two idioms you choose, will depend on whether copying two lines of codes into every class is more acceptable in your project than a class with a single-letter name.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.5.13 GNU awk

RPMs

gawk 3.1 or newer

File extension

awk

String syntax

"abc"

gettext shorthand

_"abc"

gettext/ngettext functions

dcgettext, missing dcngettext in gawk-3.1.0

textdomain

TEXTDOMAIN variable

bindtextdomain

bindtextdomain function

setlocale

automatic, but missing setlocale (LC_MESSAGES, "") in gawk-3.1.0

Prerequisite

Use or emulate GNU gettext

use

Extractor

xgettext

Formatting with positions

printf "%2$d %1$d" (GNU awk only)

Portability

On platforms without gettext, no translation. On non-GNU awks, you must define dcgettext, dcngettext and bindtextdomain yourself.

po-mode marking

An example is available in the ‘examples’ directory: hello-gawk.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.5.14 Pascal - le compilateur libre Pascal

RPMs

fpk

File extension

pp, pas

String syntax

'abc'

gettext shorthand

automatic

gettext/ngettext functions

—, use ResourceString data type instead

textdomain

—, use TranslateResourceStrings function instead

bindtextdomain

—, use TranslateResourceStrings function instead

setlocale

automatic, but uses only LANG, not LC_MESSAGES or LC_ALL

Prerequisite

{$mode delphi} or {$mode objfpc}
uses gettext;

Use or emulate GNU gettext

emulate partially

Extractor

ppc386 followed by xgettext or rstconv

Formatting with positions

uses sysutils;
format "%1:d %0:d"

Portability

?

po-mode marking

The Pascal compiler has special support for the ResourceString data type. It generates a .rst file. This is then converted to a .pot file by use of xgettext or rstconv. At runtime, a .mo file corresponding to translations of this .pot file can be loaded using the TranslateResourceStrings function in the gettext unit.

An example is available in the ‘examples’ directory: hello-pascal.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.5.15 bibliothèque de wxWidgets

RPMs

wxGTK, gettext

File extension

cpp

String syntax

"abc"

gettext shorthand

_("abc")

gettext/ngettext functions

wxLocale::GetString, wxGetTranslation

textdomain

wxLocale::AddCatalog

bindtextdomain

wxLocale::AddCatalogLookupPathPrefix

setlocale

wxLocale::Init, wxSetLocale

Prerequisite

#include <wx/intl.h>

Use or emulate GNU gettext

emulate, see include/wx/intl.h and src/common/intl.cpp

Extractor

xgettext

Formatting with positions

wxString::Format supports positions if and only if the system has wprintf(), vswprintf() functions and they support positions according to POSIX.

Portability

fully portable

po-mode marking

yes


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.5.16 YCP - langage de script YaST2

RPMs

libycp, libycp-devel, yast2-core, yast2-core-devel

File extension

ycp

String syntax

"abc"

gettext shorthand

_("abc")

gettext/ngettext functions

_() with 1 or 3 arguments

textdomain

textdomain statement

bindtextdomain

setlocale

Prerequisite

Use or emulate GNU gettext

use

Extractor

xgettext

Formatting with positions

sformat "%2 %1"

Portability

fully portable

po-mode marking

An example is available in the ‘examples’ directory: hello-ycp.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.5.17 Language de script Tcl - Tk

RPMs

tcl

File extension

tcl

String syntax

"abc"

gettext shorthand

[_ "abc"]

gettext/ngettext functions

::msgcat::mc

textdomain

bindtextdomain

—, use ::msgcat::mcload instead

setlocale

automatic, uses LANG, but ignores LC_MESSAGES and LC_ALL

Prerequisite

package require msgcat
proc _ {s} {return [::msgcat::mc $s]}

Use or emulate GNU gettext

—, uses a Tcl specific message catalog format

Extractor

xgettext -k_

Formatting with positions

format "%2\$d %1\$d"

Portability

fully portable

po-mode marking

Two examples are available in the ‘examples’ directory: hello-tcl, hello-tcl-tk.

Before marking strings as internationalizable, substitutions of variables into the string need to be converted to format applications. For example, "file $filename not found" becomes [format "file %s not found" $filename]. Only after this is done, can the strings be marked and extracted. After marking, this example becomes [format [_ "file %s not found"] $filename] or [msgcat::mc "file %s not found" $filename]. Note that the msgcat::mc function implicitly calls format when more than one argument is given.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.5.18 Perl

RPMs

perl

File extension

pl, PL, pm, cgi

String syntax
gettext shorthand

__ (double underscore)

gettext/ngettext functions

gettext, dgettext, dcgettext, ngettext, dngettext, dcngettext

textdomain

textdomain function

bindtextdomain

bindtextdomain function

bind_textdomain_codeset

bind_textdomain_codeset function

setlocale

Use setlocale (LC_ALL, "");

Prerequisite

use POSIX;
use Locale::TextDomain; (included in the package libintl-perl which is available on the Comprehensive Perl Archive Network CPAN, http://www.cpan.org/).

Use or emulate GNU gettext

platform dependent: gettext_pp emulates, gettext_xs uses GNU gettext

Extractor

xgettext -k__ -k\$__ -k%__ -k__x -k__n:1,2 -k__nx:1,2 -k__xn:1,2 -kN__ -k

Formatting with positions

Both kinds of format strings support formatting with positions.
printf "%2\$d %1\$d", ... (requires Perl 5.8.0 or newer)
__expand("[new] replaces [old]", old => $oldvalue, new => $newvalue)

Portability

The libintl-perl package is platform independent but is not part of the Perl core. The programmer is responsible for providing a dummy implementation of the required functions if the package is not installed on the target system.

po-mode marking

Documentation

Included in libintl-perl, available on CPAN (http://www.cpan.org/).

An example is available in the ‘examples’ directory: hello-perl.

The xgettext parser backend for Perl differs significantly from the parser backends for other programming languages, just as Perl itself differs significantly from other programming languages. The Perl parser backend offers many more string marking facilities than the other backends but it also has some Perl specific limitations, the worst probably being its imperfectness.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.5.18.1 Problèmes généraux pour l'analyse syntaxique du code Perl

It is often heard that only Perl can parse Perl. This is not true. Perl cannot be parsed at all, it can only be executed. Perl has various built-in ambiguities that can only be resolved at runtime.

The following example may illustrate one common problem:

 
print gettext "Hello World!";

Although this example looks like a bullet-proof case of a function invocation, it is not:

 
open gettext, ">testfile" or die;
print gettext "Hello world!"

In this context, the string gettext looks more like a file handle. But not necessarily:

 
use Locale::Messages qw (:libintl_h);
open gettext ">testfile" or die;
print gettext "Hello world!";

Now, the file is probably syntactically incorrect, provided that the module Locale::Messages found first in the Perl include path exports a function gettext. But what if the module Locale::Messages really looks like this?

 
use vars qw (*gettext);

1;

In this case, the string gettext will be interpreted as a file handle again, and the above example will create a file ‘testfile’ and write the string “Hello world!” into it. Even advanced control flow analysis will not really help:

 
if (0.5 < rand) {
   eval "use Sane";
} else {
   eval "use InSane";
}
print gettext "Hello world!";

If the module Sane exports a function gettext that does what we expect, and the module InSane opens a file for writing and associates the handle gettext with this output stream, we are clueless again about what will happen at runtime. It is completely unpredictable. The truth is that Perl has so many ways to fill its symbol table at runtime that it is impossible to interpret a particular piece of code without executing it.

Of course, xgettext will not execute your Perl sources while scanning for translatable strings, but rather use heuristics in order to guess what you meant.

Another problem is the ambiguity of the slash and the question mark. Their interpretation depends on the context:

 
# A pattern match.
print "OK\n" if /foobar/;

# A division.
print 1 / 2;

# Another pattern match.
print "OK\n" if ?foobar?;

# Conditional.
print $x ? "foo" : "bar";

The slash may either act as the division operator or introduce a pattern match, whereas the question mark may act as the ternary conditional operator or as a pattern match, too. Other programming languages like awk present similar problems, but the consequences of a misinterpretation are particularly nasty with Perl sources. In awk for instance, a statement can never exceed one line and the parser can recover from a parsing error at the next newline and interpret the rest of the input stream correctly. Perl is different, as a pattern match is terminated by the next appearance of the delimiter (the slash or the question mark) in the input stream, regardless of the semantic context. If a slash is really a division sign but mis-interpreted as a pattern match, the rest of the input file is most probably parsed incorrectly.

If you find that xgettext fails to extract strings from portions of your sources, you should therefore look out for slashes and/or question marks preceding these sections. You may have come across a bug in xgettext's Perl parser (and of course you should report that bug). In the meantime you should consider to reformulate your code in a manner less challenging to xgettext.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.5.18.2 Which keywords will xgettext look for?

Unless you instruct xgettext otherwise by invoking it with one of the options --keyword or -k, it will recognize the following keywords in your Perl sources:


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.5.18.3 Comment extraire les clés de hachage

Translating messages at runtime is normally performed by looking up the original string in the translation database and returning the translated version. The “natural” Perl implementation is a hash lookup, and, of course, xgettext supports such practice.

 
print __"Hello world!";
print $__{"Hello world!"};
print $__->{"Hello world!"};
print $$__{"Hello world!"};

The above four lines all do the same thing. The Perl module Locale::TextDomain exports by default a hash %__ that is tied to the function __(). It also exports a reference $__ to %__.

If an argument to the xgettext option --keyword, resp. -k starts with a percent sign, the rest of the keyword is interpreted as the name of a hash. If it starts with a dollar sign, the rest of the keyword is interpreted as a reference to a hash.

Note that you can omit the quotation marks (single or double) around the hash key (almost) whenever Perl itself allows it:

 
print $gettext{Error};

The exact rule is: You can omit the surrounding quotes, when the hash key is a valid C (!) identifier, i.e. when it starts with an underscore or an ASCII letter and is followed by an arbitrary number of underscores, ASCII letters or digits. Other Unicode characters are not allowed, regardless of the use utf8 pragma.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.5.18.4 Quelles sont les chaînes et les expressions comme les guillemets ?

Perl offers a plethora of different string constructs. Those that can be used either as arguments to functions or inside braces for hash lookups are generally supported by xgettext.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.5.18.5 Invalid Uses Of String Interpolation

Perl is capable of interpolating variables into strings. This offers some nice features in localized programs but can also lead to problems.

A common error is a construct like the following:

 
print gettext "This is the program $0!\n";

Perl will interpolate at runtime the value of the variable $0 into the argument of the gettext() function. Hence, this argument is not a string constant but a variable argument ($0 is a global variable that holds the name of the Perl script being executed). The interpolation is performed by Perl before the string argument is passed to gettext() and will therefore depend on the name of the script which can only be determined at runtime. Consequently, it is almost impossible that a translation can be looked up at runtime (except if, by accident, the interpolated string is found in the message catalog).

The xgettext program will therefore terminate parsing with a fatal error if it encounters a variable inside of an extracted string. In general, this will happen for all kinds of string interpolations that cannot be safely performed at compile time. If you absolutely know what you are doing, you can always circumvent this behavior:

 
my $know_what_i_am_doing = "This is program $0!\n";
print gettext $know_what_i_am_doing;

Since the parser only recognizes strings and quote-like expressions, but not variables or other terms, the above construct will be accepted. You will have to find another way, however, to let your original string make it into your message catalog.

If invoked with the option --extract-all, resp. -a, variable interpolation will be accepted. Rationale: You will generally use this option in order to prepare your sources for internationalization.

Please see the manual page ‘man perlop’ for details of strings and quote-like expressions that are subject to interpolation and those that are not. Safe interpolations (that will not lead to a fatal error) are:

The following escapes are considered partially safe:

These escapes are only considered safe if the string consists of ASCII characters only. Translation of characters outside the range defined by ASCII is locale-dependent and can actually only be performed at runtime; xgettext doesn't do these locale-dependent translations at extraction time.

Except for the modifier \Q, these translations, albeit valid, are generally useless and only obfuscate your sources. If a translation can be safely performed at compile time you can just as well write what you mean.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.5.18.6 Valid Uses Of String Interpolation

Perl is often used to generate sources for other programming languages or arbitrary file formats. Web applications that output HTML code make a prominent example for such usage.

You will often come across situations where you want to intersperse code written in the target (programming) language with translatable messages, like in the following HTML example:

 
print gettext <<EOF;
<h1>My Homepage</h1>
<script language="JavaScript"><!--
for (i = 0; i < 100; ++i) {
    alert ("Thank you so much for visiting my homepage!");
}
//--></script>
EOF

The parser will extract the entire here document, and it will appear entirely in the resulting PO file, including the JavaScript snippet embedded in the HTML code. If you exaggerate with constructs like the above, you will run the risk that the translators of your package will look out for a less challenging project. You should consider an alternative expression here:

 
print <<EOF;
<h1>$gettext{"My Homepage"}</h1>
<script language="JavaScript"><!--
for (i = 0; i < 100; ++i) {
    alert ("$gettext{'Thank you so much for visiting my homepage!'}");
}
//--></script>
EOF

Only the translatable portions of the code will be extracted here, and the resulting PO file will begrudgingly improve in terms of readability.

You can interpolate hash lookups in all strings or quote-like expressions that are subject to interpolation (see the manual page ‘man perlop’ for details). Double interpolation is invalid, however:

 
# TRANSLATORS: Replace "the earth" with the name of your planet.
print gettext qq{Welcome to $gettext->{"the earth"}};

The qq-quoted string is recognized as an argument to xgettext in the first place, and checked for invalid variable interpolation. The dollar sign of hash-dereferencing will therefore terminate the parser with an “invalid interpolation” error.

It is valid to interpolate hash lookups in regular expressions:

 
if ($var =~ /$gettext{"the earth"}/) {
   print gettext "Match!\n";
}
s/$gettext{"U. S. A."}/$gettext{"U. S. A."} $gettext{"(dial +0)"}/g;

[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.5.18.7 Quand utiliser des parenthèses

In Perl, parentheses around function arguments are mostly optional. xgettext will always assume that all recognized keywords (except for hashes and hash references) are names of properly prototyped functions, and will (hopefully) only require parentheses where Perl itself requires them. All constructs in the following example are therefore ok to use:

 
print gettext ("Hello World!\n");
print gettext "Hello World!\n";
print dgettext ($package => "Hello World!\n");
print dgettext $package, "Hello World!\n";

# The "fat comma" => turns the left-hand side argument into a
# single-quoted string!
print dgettext smellovision => "Hello World!\n";

# The following assignment only works with prototyped functions.
# Otherwise, the functions will act as "greedy" list operators and
# eat up all following arguments.
my $anonymous_hash = {
   planet => gettext "earth",
   cakes => ngettext "one cake", "several cakes", $n,
   still => $works,
};
# The same without fat comma:
my $other_hash = {
   'planet', gettext "earth",
   'cakes', ngettext "one cake", "several cakes", $n,
   'still', $works,
};

# Parentheses are only significant for the first argument.
print dngettext 'package', ("one cake", "several cakes", $n), $discarded;

[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.5.18.8 Comment couper les lignes longues

The necessity of long messages can often lead to a cumbersome or unreadable coding style. Perl has several options that may prevent you from writing unreadable code, and xgettext does its best to do likewise. This is where the dot operator (the string concatenation operator) may come in handy:

 
print gettext ("This is a very long"
               . " message that is still"
               . " readable, because"
               . " it is split into"
               . " multiple lines.\n");

Perl is smart enough to concatenate these constant string fragments into one long string at compile time, and so is xgettext. You will only find one long message in the resulting POT file.

Note that the future Perl 6 will probably use the underscore (‘_’) as the string concatenation operator, and the dot (‘.’) for dereferencing. This new syntax is not yet supported by xgettext.

If embedded newline characters are not an issue, or even desired, you may also insert newline characters inside quoted strings wherever you feel like it:

 
print gettext ("<em>In HTML output
embedded newlines are generally no
problem, since adjacent whitespace
is always rendered into a single
space character.</em>");

You may also consider to use here documents:

 
print gettext <<EOF;
<em>In HTML output
embedded newlines are generally no
problem, since adjacent whitespace
is always rendered into a single
space character.</em>
EOF

Please do not forget that the line breaks are real, i.e. they translate into newline characters that will consequently show up in the resulting POT file.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.5.18.9 Bugs, Pitfalls, And Things That Do Not Work

The foregoing sections should have proven that xgettext is quite smart in extracting translatable strings from Perl sources. Yet, some more or less exotic constructs that could be expected to work, actually do not work.

One of the more relevant limitations can be found in the implementation of variable interpolation inside quoted strings. Only simple hash lookups can be used there:

 
print <<EOF;
$gettext{"The dot operator"
          . " does not work"
          . "here!"}
Likewise, you cannot @{[ gettext ("interpolate function calls") ]}
inside quoted strings or quote-like expressions.
EOF

This is valid Perl code and will actually trigger invocations of the gettext function at runtime. Yet, the Perl parser in xgettext will fail to recognize the strings. A less obvious example can be found in the interpolation of regular expressions:

 
s/<!--START_OF_WEEK-->/gettext ("Sunday")/e;

The modifier e will cause the substitution to be interpreted as an evaluable statement. Consequently, at runtime the function gettext() is called, but again, the parser fails to extract the string “Sunday”. Use a temporary variable as a simple workaround if you really happen to need this feature:

 
my $sunday = gettext "Sunday";
s/<!--START_OF_WEEK-->/$sunday/;

Hash slices would also be handy but are not recognized:

 
my @weekdays = @gettext{'Sunday', 'Monday', 'Tuesday', 'Wednesday',
                        'Thursday', 'Friday', 'Saturday'};
# Or even:
@weekdays = @gettext{qw (Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday
                         Friday Saturday) };

This is perfectly valid usage of the tied hash %gettext but the strings are not recognized and therefore will not be extracted.

Another caveat of the current version is its rudimentary support for non-ASCII characters in identifiers. You may encounter serious problems if you use identifiers with characters outside the range of 'A'-'Z', 'a'-'z', '0'-'9' and the underscore '_'.

Maybe some of these missing features will be implemented in future versions, but since you can always make do without them at minimal effort, these todos have very low priority.

A nasty problem are brace format strings that already contain braces as part of the normal text, for example the usage strings typically encountered in programs:

 
die "usage: $0 {OPTIONS} FILENAME...\n";

If you want to internationalize this code with Perl brace format strings, you will run into a problem:

 
die __x ("usage: {program} {OPTIONS} FILENAME...\n", program => $0);

Whereas ‘{program}’ is a placeholder, ‘{OPTIONS}’ is not and should probably be translated. Yet, there is no way to teach the Perl parser in xgettext to recognize the first one, and leave the other one alone.

There are two possible work-arounds for this problem. If you are sure that your program will run under Perl 5.8.0 or newer (these Perl versions handle positional parameters in printf()) or if you are sure that the translator will not have to reorder the arguments in her translation – for example if you have only one brace placeholder in your string, or if it describes a syntax, like in this one –, you can mark the string as no-perl-brace-format and use printf():

 
# xgettext: no-perl-brace-format
die sprintf ("usage: %s {OPTIONS} FILENAME...\n", $0);

If you want to use the more portable Perl brace format, you will have to do put placeholders in place of the literal braces:

 
die __x ("usage: {program} {[}OPTIONS{]} FILENAME...\n",
         program => $0, '[' => '{', ']' => '}');

Perl brace format strings know no escaping mechanism. No matter how this escaping mechanism looked like, it would either give the programmer a hard time, make translating Perl brace format strings heavy-going, or result in a performance penalty at runtime, when the format directives get executed. Most of the time you will happily get along with printf() for this special case.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.5.19 Pré-processeur hyper-texte PHP

RPMs

mod_php4, mod_php4-core, phpdoc

File extension

php, php3, php4

String syntax

"abc", 'abc'

gettext shorthand

_("abc")

gettext/ngettext functions

gettext, dgettext, dcgettext; starting with PHP 4.2.0 also ngettext, dngettext, dcngettext

textdomain

textdomain function

bindtextdomain

bindtextdomain function

setlocale

Programmer must call setlocale (LC_ALL, "")

Prerequisite

Use or emulate GNU gettext

use

Extractor

xgettext

Formatting with positions

printf "%2\$d %1\$d"

Portability

On platforms without gettext, the functions are not available.

po-mode marking

An example is available in the ‘examples’ directory: hello-php.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.5.20 Pike

RPMs

roxen

File extension

pike

String syntax

"abc"

gettext shorthand

gettext/ngettext functions

gettext, dgettext, dcgettext

textdomain

textdomain function

bindtextdomain

bindtextdomain function

setlocale

setlocale function

Prerequisite

import Locale.Gettext;

Use or emulate GNU gettext

use

Extractor

Formatting with positions

Portability

On platforms without gettext, the functions are not available.

po-mode marking


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.5.21 Collection de sources du compilateur GNU

RPMs

gcc

File extension

c, h.

String syntax

"abc"

gettext shorthand

_("abc")

gettext/ngettext functions

gettext, dgettext, dcgettext, ngettext, dngettext, dcngettext

textdomain

textdomain function

bindtextdomain

bindtextdomain function

setlocale

Programmer must call setlocale (LC_ALL, "")

Prerequisite

#include "intl.h"

Use or emulate GNU gettext

Use

Extractor

xgettext -k_

Formatting with positions

Portability

Uses autoconf macros

po-mode marking

yes


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.6 Données internationalisables

Here is a list of other data formats which can be internationalized using GNU gettext.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.6.1 MOP (-ndt POT) Modèle d'Objet Portable (-ndt Potable Object Template)

RPMs

gettext

File extension

pot, po

Extractor

xgettext


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.6.2 Table des Chaînes Ressource

RPMs

fpk

File extension

rst

Extractor

xgettext, rstconv


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

15.6.3 Glade - description de l'interface utilisateur GNOME

RPMs

glade, libglade, glade2, libglade2, intltool

File extension

glade, glade2

Extractor

xgettext, libglade-xgettext, xml-i18n-extract, intltool-extract


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

16. Remarques conclusives

We would like to conclude this GNU gettext manual by presenting an history of the Translation Project so far. We finally give a few pointers for those who want to do further research or readings about Native Language Support matters.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

16.1 Historique de GNU gettext

Internationalization concerns and algorithms have been informally and casually discussed for years in GNU, sometimes around GNU libc, maybe around the incoming Hurd, or otherwise (nobody clearly remembers). And even then, when the work started for real, this was somewhat independently of these previous discussions.

This all began in July 1994, when Patrick D'Cruze had the idea and initiative of internationalizing version 3.9.2 of GNU fileutils. He then asked Jim Meyering, the maintainer, how to get those changes folded into an official release. That first draft was full of #ifdefs and somewhat disconcerting, and Jim wanted to find nicer ways. Patrick and Jim shared some tries and experimentations in this area. Then, feeling that this might eventually have a deeper impact on GNU, Jim wanted to know what standards were, and contacted Richard Stallman, who very quickly and verbally described an overall design for what was meant to become glocale, at that time.

Jim implemented glocale and got a lot of exhausting feedback from Patrick and Richard, of course, but also from Mitchum DSouza (who wrote a catgets-like package), Roland McGrath, maybe David MacKenzie, François Pinard, and Paul Eggert, all pushing and pulling in various directions, not always compatible, to the extent that after a couple of test releases, glocale was torn apart. In particular, Paul Eggert – always keeping an eye on developments in Solaris – advocated the use of the gettext API over glocale's catgets-based API.

While Jim took some distance and time and became dad for a second time, Roland wanted to get GNU libc internationalized, and got Ulrich Drepper involved in that project. Instead of starting from glocale, Ulrich rewrote something from scratch, but more conforming to the set of guidelines who emerged out of the glocale effort. Then, Ulrich got people from the previous forum to involve themselves into this new project, and the switch from glocale to what was first named msgutils, renamed nlsutils, and later gettext, became officially accepted by Richard in May 1995 or so.

Let's summarize by saying that Ulrich Drepper wrote GNU gettext in April 1995. The first official release of the package, including PO mode, occurred in July 1995, and was numbered 0.7. Other people contributed to the effort by providing a discussion forum around Ulrich, writing little pieces of code, or testing. These are quoted in the THANKS file which comes with the GNU gettext distribution.

While this was being done, François adapted half a dozen of GNU packages to glocale first, then later to gettext, putting them in pretest, so providing along the way an effective user environment for fine tuning the evolving tools. He also took the responsibility of organizing and coordinating the Translation Project. After nearly a year of informal exchanges between people from many countries, translator teams started to exist in May 1995, through the creation and support by Patrick D'Cruze of twenty unmoderated mailing lists for that many native languages, and two moderated lists: one for reaching all teams at once, the other for reaching all willing maintainers of internationalized free software packages.

François also wrote PO mode in June 1995 with the collaboration of Greg McGary, as a kind of contribution to Ulrich's package. He also gave a hand with the GNU gettext Texinfo manual.

In 1997, Ulrich Drepper released the GNU libc 2.0, which included the gettext, textdomain and bindtextdomain functions.

In 2000, Ulrich Drepper added plural form handling (the ngettext function) to GNU libc. Later, in 2001, he released GNU libc 2.2.x, which is the first free C library with full internationalization support.

Ulrich being quite busy in his role of General Maintainer of GNU libc, he handed over the GNU gettext maintenance to Bruno Haible in 2000. Bruno added the plural form handling to the tools as well, added support for UTF-8 and CJK locales, and wrote a few new tools for manipulating PO files.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

16.2 Lectures connexes

NOTE: This documentation section is outdated and needs to be revised.

Eugene H. Dorr (‘dorre@well.com’) maintains an interesting bibliography on internationalization matters, called Internationalization Reference List, which is available as:

 
ftp://ftp.ora.com/pub/examples/nutshell/ujip/doc/i18n-books.txt

Michael Gschwind (‘mike@vlsivie.tuwien.ac.at’) maintains a Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) list, entitled Programming for Internationalisation. This FAQ discusses writing programs which can handle different language conventions, character sets, etc.; and is applicable to all character set encodings, with particular emphasis on ISO 8859-1. It is regularly published in Usenet groups ‘comp.unix.questions’, ‘comp.std.internat’, ‘comp.software.international’, ‘comp.lang.c’, ‘comp.windows.x’, ‘comp.std.c’, ‘comp.answers’ and ‘news.answers’. The home location of this document is:

 
ftp://ftp.vlsivie.tuwien.ac.at/pub/8bit/ISO-programming

Patrick D'Cruze (‘pdcruze@li.org’) wrote a tutorial about NLS matters, and Jochen Hein (‘Hein@student.tu-clausthal.de’) took over the responsibility of maintaining it. It may be found as:

 
ftp://sunsite.unc.edu/pub/Linux/utils/nls/catalogs/Incoming/...
     ...locale-tutorial-0.8.txt.gz

This site is mirrored in:

 
ftp://ftp.ibp.fr/pub/linux/sunsite/

A French version of the same tutorial should be findable at:

 
ftp://ftp.ibp.fr/pub/linux/french/docs/

together with French translations of many Linux-related documents.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

A. Codes d'identification des langues

The ISO 639 standard defines two-letter codes for many languages, and three-letter codes for more rarely used languages. All abbreviations for languages used in the Translation Project should come from this standard.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

A.1 Les codes de langage habituels

For the commonly used languages, the ISO 639-1 standard defines two-letter codes.

aa

Afar.

ab

Abkhazian.

ad

Adangme.

ae

Avestan.

af

Afrikaans.

ak

Akan.

am

Amharic.

an

Aragonese.

ar

Arabic.

as

Assamese.

av

Avaric.

ay

Aymara.

az

Azerbaijani.

ba

Bashkir.

be

Byelorussian; Belarusian.

bg

Bulgarian.

bh

Bihari.

bi

Bislama.

bm

Bambara.

bn

Bengali; Bangla.

bo

Tibetan.

br

Breton.

bs

Bosnian.

ca

Catalan.

ce

Chechen.

ch

Chamorro.

co

Corsican.

cr

Cree.

cs

Czech.

cu

Church Slavic.

cv

Chuvash.

cy

Welsh.

da

Danish.

de

German.

dv

Divehi; Maldivian.

dz

Dzongkha; Bhutani.

ee

Éwé.

el

Greek.

en

English.

eo

Esperanto.

es

Spanish.

et

Estonian.

eu

Basque.

fa

Persian.

ff

Fulah.

fi

Finnish.

fj

Fijian; Fiji.

fo

Faroese.

fr

French.

fy

Western Frisian.

ga

Irish.

gd

Scots; Gaelic.

gl

Galician.

gn

Guarani.

gu

Gujarati.

gv

Manx.

ha

Hausa.

he

Hebrew (formerly iw).

hi

Hindi.

ho

Hiri Motu.

hr

Croatian.

ht

Haitian; Haitian Creole.

hu

Hungarian.

hy

Armenian.

hz

Herero.

ia

Interlingua.

id

Indonesian (formerly in).

ie

Interlingue.

ig

Igbo.

ii

Sichuan Yi.

ik

Inupiak; Inupiaq.

io

Ido.

is

Icelandic.

it

Italian.

iu

Inuktitut.

ja

Japanese.

jv

Javanese.

ka

Georgian.

kg

Kongo.

ki

Kikuyu; Gikuyu.

kj

Kuanyama; Kwanyama.

kk

Kazakh.

kl

Kalaallisut; Greenlandic.

km

Khmer; Cambodian.

kn

Kannada.

ko

Korean.

kr

Kanuri.

ks

Kashmiri.

ku

Kurdish.

kv

Komi.

kw

Cornish.

ky

Kirghiz.

la

Latin.

lb

Letzeburgesch; Luxembourgish.

lg

Ganda.

li

Limburgish; Limburger; Limburgan.

ln

Lingala.

lo

Lao; Laotian.

lt

Lithuanian.

lu

Luba-Katanga.

lv

Latvian; Lettish.

mg

Malagasy.

mh

Marshallese.

mi

Maori.

mk

Macedonian.

ml

Malayalam.

mn

Mongolian.

mo

Moldavian.

mr

Marathi.

ms

Malay.

mt

Maltese.

my

Burmese.

na

Nauru.

nb

Norwegian Bokmål.

nd

Ndebele, North.

ne

Nepali.

ng

Ndonga.

nl

Dutch.

nn

Norwegian Nynorsk.

no

Norwegian.

nr

Ndebele, South.

nv

Navajo; Navaho.

ny

Chichewa; Nyanja.

oc

Occitan; Provençal.

oj

Ojibwa.

om

(Afan) Oromo.

or

Oriya.

os

Ossetian; Ossetic.

pa

Panjabi; Punjabi.

pi

Pali.

pl

Polish.

ps

Pashto, Pushto.

pt

Portuguese.

qu

Quechua.

rm

Rhaeto-Romance.

rn

Rundi; Kirundi.

ro

Romanian.

ru

Russian.

rw

Kinyarwanda.

sa

Sanskrit.

sc

Sardinian.

sd

Sindhi.

se

Northern Sami.

sg

Sango; Sangro.

si

Sinhala; Sinhalese.

sk

Slovak.

sl

Slovenian.

sm

Samoan.

sn

Shona.

so

Somali.

sq

Albanian.

sr

Serbian.

ss

Swati; Siswati.

st

Sesotho; Sotho, Southern.

su

Sundanese.

sv

Swedish.

sw

Swahili.

ta

Tamil.

te

Telugu.

tg

Tajik.

th

Thai.

ti

Tigrinya.

tk

Turkmen.

tl

Tagalog.

tn

Tswana; Setswana.

to

Tonga.

tr

Turkish.

ts

Tsonga.

tt

Tatar.

tw

Twi.

ty

Tahitian.

ug

Uighur.

uk

Ukrainian.

ur

Urdu.

uz

Uzbek.

ve

Venda.

vi

Vietnamese.

vo

Volapük; Volapuk.

wa

Walloon.

wo

Wolof.

xh

Xhosa.

yi

Yiddish (formerly ji).

yo

Yoruba.

za

Zhuang.

zh

Chinese.

zu

Zulu.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

A.2 Les codes de langues rares

For rarely used languages, the ISO 639-2 standard defines three-letter codes. Here is the current list, reduced to only living languages with at least one million of speakers.

ace

Achinese.

awa

Awadhi.

bad

Banda.

bal

Baluchi.

ban

Balinese.

bem

Bemba.

bho

Bhojpuri.

bik

Bikol.

bin

Bini.

btk

Batak (Indonesia).

bug

Buginese.

ceb

Cebuano.

din

Dinka.

doi

Dogri.

fil

Filipino; Pilipino.

fon

Fon.

gon

Gondi.

gsw

Alemani; Swiss German.

hil

Hiligaynon.

hmn

Hmong.

ilo

Iloko.

kab

Kabyle.

kam

Kamba.

kbd

Kabardian.

kmb

Kimbundu.

kok

Konkani.

kru

Kurukh.

lua

Luba-Lulua.

luo

Luo (Kenya and Tanzania).

mad

Madurese.

mag

Magahi.

mai

Maithili.

mak

Makasar.

man

Mandingo.

men

Mende.

min

Minangkabau.

mni

Manipuri.

mos

Mossi.

mwr

Marwari.

nap

Neapolitan.

nso

Pedi; Sepedi; Northern Sotho.

nym

Nyamwezi.

nyn

Nyankole.

pag

Pangasinan.

pam

Pampanga.

raj

Rajasthani.

sas

Sasak.

sat

Santali.

scn

Sicilian.

shn

Shan.

sid

Sidamo.

srr

Serer.

suk

Sukuma.

sus

Susu.

tem

Timne.

tiv

Tiv.

tum

Tumbuka.

umb

Umbundu.

wal

Walamo.

war

Waray.

yao

Yao.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

B. Codes d'identification des pays

The ISO 3166 standard defines two character codes for many countries and territories. All abbreviations for countries used in the Translation Project should come from this standard.

AD

Andorra.

AE

United Arab Emirates.

AF

Afghanistan.

AG

Antigua and Barbuda.

AI

Anguilla.

AL

Albania.

AM

Armenia.

AN

Netherlands Antilles.

AO

Angola.

AQ

Antarctica.

AR

Argentina.

AS

Samoa (American).

AT

Austria.

AU

Australia.

AW

Aruba.

AX

Aaland Islands.

AZ

Azerbaijan.

BA

Bosnia and Herzegovina.

BB

Barbados.

BD

Bangladesh.

BE

Belgium.

BF

Burkina Faso.

BG

Bulgaria.

BH

Bahrain.

BI

Burundi.

BJ

Benin.

BM

Bermuda.

BN

Brunei.

BO

Bolivia.

BR

Brazil.

BS

Bahamas.

BT

Bhutan.

BV

Bouvet Island.

BW

Botswana.

BY

Belarus.

BZ

Belize.

CA

Canada.

CC

Cocos (Keeling) Islands.

CD

Congo (Dem. Rep.).

CF

Central African Republic.

CG

Congo (Rep.).

CH

Switzerland.

CI

Côte d'Ivoire.

CK

Cook Islands.

CL

Chile.

CM

Cameroon.

CN

China.

CO

Colombia.

CR

Costa Rica.

CU

Cuba.

CV

Cape Verde.

CX

Christmas Island.

CY

Cyprus.

CZ

Czech Republic.

DE

Germany.

DJ

Djibouti.

DK

Denmark.

DM

Dominica.

DO

Dominican Republic.

DZ

Algeria.

EC

Ecuador.

EE

Estonia.

EG

Egypt.

EH

Western Sahara.

ER

Eritrea.

ES

Spain.

ET

Ethiopia.

FI

Finland.

FJ

Fiji.

FK

Falkland Islands.

FM

Micronesia.

FO

Faeroe Islands.

FR

France.

GA

Gabon.

GB

Britain (United Kingdom).

GD

Grenada.

GE

Georgia.

GF

French Guiana.

GG

Guernsey.

GH

Ghana.

GI

Gibraltar.

GL

Greenland.

GM

Gambia.

GN

Guinea.

GP

Guadeloupe.

GQ

Equatorial Guinea.

GR

Greece.

GS

South Georgia and the South Sandwich Islands.

GT

Guatemala.

GU

Guam.

GW

Guinea-Bissau.

GY

Guyana.

HK

Hong Kong.

HM

Heard Island and McDonald Islands.

HN

Honduras.

HR

Croatia.

HT

Haiti.

HU

Hungary.

ID

Indonesia.

IE

Ireland.

IL

Israel.

IM

Isle of Man.

IN

India.

IO

British Indian Ocean Territory.

IQ

Iraq.

IR

Iran.

IS

Iceland.

IT

Italy.

JE

Jersey.

JM

Jamaica.

JO

Jordan.

JP

Japan.

KE

Kenya.

KG

Kyrgyzstan.

KH

Cambodia.

KI

Kiribati.

KM

Comoros.

KN

St Kitts and Nevis.

KP

Korea (North).

KR

Korea (South).

KW

Kuwait.

KY

Cayman Islands.

KZ

Kazakhstan.

LA

Laos.

LB

Lebanon.

LC

St Lucia.

LI

Liechtenstein.

LK

Sri Lanka.

LR

Liberia.

LS

Lesotho.

LT

Lithuania.

LU

Luxembourg.

LV

Latvia.

LY

Libya.

MA

Morocco.

MC

Monaco.

MD

Moldova.

ME

Montenegro.

MG

Madagascar.

MH

Marshall Islands.

MK

Macedonia.

ML

Mali.

MM

Myanmar (Burma).

MN

Mongolia.

MO

Macao.

MP

Northern Mariana Islands.

MQ

Martinique.

MR

Mauritania.

MS

Montserrat.

MT

Malta.

MU

Mauritius.

MV

Maldives.

MW

Malawi.

MX

Mexico.

MY

Malaysia.

MZ

Mozambique.

NA

Namibia.

NC

New Caledonia.

NE

Niger.

NF

Norfolk Island.

NG

Nigeria.

NI

Nicaragua.

NL

Netherlands.

NO

Norway.

NP

Nepal.

NR

Nauru.

NU

Niue.

NZ

New Zealand.

OM

Oman.

PA

Panama.

PE

Peru.

PF

French Polynesia.

PG

Papua New Guinea.

PH

Philippines.

PK

Pakistan.

PL

Poland.

PM

St Pierre and Miquelon.

PN

Pitcairn.

PR

Puerto Rico.

PS

Palestine.

PT

Portugal.

PW

Palau.

PY

Paraguay.

QA

Qatar.

RE

Reunion.

RO

Romania.

RS

Serbia.

RU

Russia.

RW

Rwanda.

SA

Saudi Arabia.

SB

Solomon Islands.

SC

Seychelles.

SD

Sudan.

SE

Sweden.

SG

Singapore.

SH

St Helena.

SI

Slovenia.

SJ

Svalbard and Jan Mayen.

SK

Slovakia.

SL

Sierra Leone.

SM

San Marino.

SN

Senegal.

SO

Somalia.

SR

Suriname.

ST

Sao Tome and Principe.

SV

El Salvador.

SY

Syria.

SZ

Swaziland.

TC

Turks and Caicos Islands.

TD

Chad.

TF

French Southern and Antarctic Lands.

TG

Togo.

TH

Thailand.

TJ

Tajikistan.

TK

Tokelau.

TL

Timor-Leste.

TM

Turkmenistan.

TN

Tunisia.

TO

Tonga.

TR

Turkey.

TT

Trinidad and Tobago.

TV

Tuvalu.

TW

Taiwan.

TZ

Tanzania.

UA

Ukraine.

UG

Uganda.

UM

US minor outlying islands.

US

United States.

UY

Uruguay.

UZ

Uzbekistan.

VA

Vatican City.

VC

St Vincent and the Grenadines.

VE

Venezuela.

VG

Virgin Islands (UK).

VI

Virgin Islands (US).

VN

Vietnam.

VU

Vanuatu.

WF

Wallis and Futuna.

WS

Samoa (Western).

YE

Yemen.

YT

Mayotte.

ZA

South Africa.

ZM

Zambia.

ZW

Zimbabwe.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

C. Licenses

The files of this package are covered by the licenses indicated in each particular file or directory. Here is a summary:


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

C.1 GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

Version 2, June 1991

 
Copyright © 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA  02110-1301, USA

Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.

[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

Preamble

The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software—to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.

When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.

To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.

For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.

We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.

Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors' reputations.

Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.

The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.

  1. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The “Program”, below, refers to any such program or work, and a “work based on the Program” means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term “modification”.) Each licensee is addressed as “you”.

    Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.

  2. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program.

    You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.

  3. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
    1. You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
    2. You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.
    3. If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement.)

    These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.

    Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program.

    In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.

  4. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
    1. Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
    2. Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
    3. Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)

    The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable.

    If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.

  5. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
  6. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it.
  7. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License.
  8. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.

    If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.

    It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.

    This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.

  9. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
  10. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.

    Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and “any later version”, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.

  11. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
  12. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
  13. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

Appendix: How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs

If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.

To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.

 
one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.
Copyright (C) yyyy  name of author

This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
(at your option) any later version.

This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
GNU General Public License for more details.

You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA  02110-1301, USA.

Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.

If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:

 
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) 19yy name of author
Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'.
This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it
under certain conditions; type `show c' for details.

The hypothetical commands ‘show w’ and ‘show c’ should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than ‘show w’ and ‘show c’; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items—whatever suits your program.

You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:

 
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program
`Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.

signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1989
Ty Coon, President of Vice

This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Library General Public License instead of this License.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

C.2 GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

Version 2.1, February 1999

 
Copyright © 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
51 Franklin St -- Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA

Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.

[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL.  It also counts
as the successor of the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence the
version number 2.1.]

[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

Preamble

The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software—to make sure the software is free for all its users.

This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated software—typically libraries—of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case, based on the explanations below.

When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things.

To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it.

For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you link other code with the library, you must provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.

We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.

To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library. Also, if the library is modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version, so that the original author's reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others.

Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license.

Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License. This license, the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License. We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non-free programs.

When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library. The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library.

We call this license the Lesser General Public License because it does Less to protect the user's freedom than the ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries. However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances.

For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must be allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser General Public License.

In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system.

Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users' freedom, it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library.

The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a “work based on the library” and a “work that uses the library”. The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run.

  1. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License (also called “this License”). Each licensee is addressed as “you”.

    A “library” means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables.

    The “Library”, below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms. A “work based on the Library” means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term “modification”.)

    “Source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library.

    Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does.

  2. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library.

    You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.

  3. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
    1. The modified work must itself be a software library.
    2. You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
    3. You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.
    4. If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such function or table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful.

      (For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied function or table used by this function must be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square root function must still compute square roots.)

    These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.

    Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library.

    In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.

  4. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in these notices.

    Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy.

    This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library.

  5. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange.

    If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.

  6. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it, is called a “work that uses the Library”. Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License.

    However, linking a “work that uses the Library” with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a “work that uses the library”. The executable is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.

    When a “work that uses the Library” uses material from a header file that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law.

    If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.)

    Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself.

  7. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a “work that uses the Library” with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer's own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications.

    You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things:

    1. Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete machine-readable “work that uses the Library”, as object code and/or source code, so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions.)
    2. Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user's computer system, rather than copying library functions into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified version of the library, if the user installs one, as long as the modified version is interface-compatible with the version that the work was made with.
    3. Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution.
    4. If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place.
    5. Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy.

    For an executable, the required form of the “work that uses the Library” must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable.

    It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute.

  8. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted, and provided that you do these two things:
    1. Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncombined with any other library facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above.
    2. Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work.
  9. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
  10. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it.
  11. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.
  12. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library.

    If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.

    It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.

    This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.

  13. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
  14. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.

    Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and “any later version”, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license version number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.

  15. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
  16. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
  17. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries

If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, we recommend making it free software that everyone can redistribute and change. You can do so by permitting redistribution under these terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of the ordinary General Public License).

To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.

 
one line to give the library's name and an idea of what it does.
Copyright (C) year  name of author

This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License as published by
the Free Software Foundation; either version 2.1 of the License, or (at
your option) any later version.

This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
Lesser General Public License for more details.

You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
License along with this library; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301,
USA.

Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.

You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the library, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:

 
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library
`Frob' (a library for tweaking knobs) written by James Random Hacker.

signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1990
Ty Coon, President of Vice

That's all there is to it!


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

C.3 Licence Documentation Libre GNU

Version 1.2, November 2002

 
Copyright © 2000,2001,2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA  02110-1301, USA

Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
  1. PREAMBLE

    The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other functional and useful document free in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily, this License preserves for the author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not being considered responsible for modifications made by others.

    This License is a kind of “copyleft”, which means that derivative works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft license designed for free software.

    We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free software, because free software needs free documentation: a free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the software does. But this License is not limited to software manuals; it can be used for any textual work, regardless of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book. We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference.

  2. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS

    This License applies to any manual or other work, in any medium, that contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed under the terms of this License. Such a notice grants a world-wide, royalty-free license, unlimited in duration, to use that work under the conditions stated herein. The “Document”, below, refers to any such manual or work. Any member of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as “you”. You accept the license if you copy, modify or distribute the work in a way requiring permission under copyright law.

    A “Modified Version” of the Document means any work containing the Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with modifications and/or translated into another language.

    A “Secondary Section” is a named appendix or a front-matter section of the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the publishers or authors of the Document to the Document's overall subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could fall directly within that overall subject. (Thus, if the Document is in part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain any mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter of historical connection with the subject or with related matters, or of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding them.

    The “Invariant Sections” are certain Secondary Sections whose titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice that says that the Document is released under this License. If a section does not fit the above definition of Secondary then it is not allowed to be designated as Invariant. The Document may contain zero Invariant Sections. If the Document does not identify any Invariant Sections then there are none.

    The “Cover Texts” are certain short passages of text that are listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that the Document is released under this License. A Front-Cover Text may be at most 5 words, and a Back-Cover Text may be at most 25 words.

    A “Transparent” copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy, represented in a format whose specification is available to the general public, that is suitable for revising the document straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file format whose markup, or absence of markup, has been arranged to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not Transparent. An image format is not Transparent if used for any substantial amount of text. A copy that is not “Transparent” is called “Opaque”.

    Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple HTML, PostScript or PDF designed for human modification. Examples of transparent image formats include PNG, XCF and JPG. Opaque formats include proprietary formats that can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally available, and the machine-generated HTML, PostScript or PDF produced by some word processors for output purposes only.

    The “Title Page” means, for a printed book, the title page itself, plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material this License requires to appear in the title page. For works in formats which do not have any title page as such, “Title Page” means the text near the most prominent appearance of the work's title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text.

    A section “Entitled XYZ” means a named subunit of the Document whose title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses following text that translates XYZ in another language. (Here XYZ stands for a specific section name mentioned below, such as “Acknowledgements”, “Dedications”, “Endorsements”, or “History”.) To “Preserve the Title” of such a section when you modify the Document means that it remains a section “Entitled XYZ” according to this definition.

    The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice which states that this License applies to the Document. These Warranty Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in this License, but only as regards disclaiming warranties: any other implication that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and has no effect on the meaning of this License.

  3. VERBATIM COPYING

    You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further copying of the copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept compensation in exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow the conditions in section 3.

    You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and you may publicly display copies.

  4. COPYING IN QUANTITY

    If you publish printed copies (or copies in media that commonly have printed covers) of the Document, numbering more than 100, and the Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you must enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on the back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and visible. You may add other material on the covers in addition. Copying with changes limited to the covers, as long as they preserve the title of the Document and satisfy these conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in other respects.

    If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent pages.

    If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document numbering more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy a computer-network location from which the general network-using public has access to download using public-standard network protocols a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added material. If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that edition to the public.

    It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the Document well before redistributing any large number of copies, to give them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document.

  5. MODIFICATIONS

    You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document under the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy of it. In addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:

    1. Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title distinct from that of the Document, and from those of previous versions (which should, if there were any, be listed in the History section of the Document). You may use the same title as a previous version if the original publisher of that version gives permission.
    2. List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or entities responsible for authorship of the modifications in the Modified Version, together with at least five of the principal authors of the Document (all of its principal authors, if it has fewer than five), unless they release you from this requirement.
    3. State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the Modified Version, as the publisher.
    4. Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document.
    5. Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications adjacent to the other copyright notices.
    6. Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice giving the public permission to use the Modified Version under the terms of this License, in the form shown in the Addendum below.
    7. Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant Sections and required Cover Texts given in the Document's license notice.
    8. Include an unaltered copy of this License.
    9. Preserve the section Entitled “History”, Preserve its Title, and add to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and publisher of the Modified Version as given on the Title Page. If there is no section Entitled “History” in the Document, create one stating the title, year, authors, and publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page, then add an item describing the Modified Version as stated in the previous sentence.
    10. Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document for public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and likewise the network locations given in the Document for previous versions it was based on. These may be placed in the “History” section. You may omit a network location for a work that was published at least four years before the Document itself, or if the original publisher of the version it refers to gives permission.
    11. For any section Entitled “Acknowledgements” or “Dedications”, Preserve the Title of the section, and preserve in the section all the substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein.
    12. Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document, unaltered in their text and in their titles. Section numbers or the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles.
    13. Delete any section Entitled “Endorsements”. Such a section may not be included in the Modified Version.
    14. Do not retitle any existing section to be Entitled “Endorsements” or to conflict in title with any Invariant Section.
    15. Preserve any Warranty Disclaimers.

    If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no material copied from the Document, you may at your option designate some or all of these sections as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version's license notice. These titles must be distinct from any other section titles.

    You may add a section Entitled “Endorsements”, provided it contains nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various parties—for example, statements of peer review or that the text has been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of a standard.

    You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text, and a passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version. Only one passage of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or through arrangements made by) any one entity. If the Document already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of, you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit permission from the previous publisher that added the old one.

    The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or imply endorsement of any Modified Version.

  6. COMBINING DOCUMENTS

    You may combine the Document with other documents released under this License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for modified versions, provided that you include in the combination all of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents, unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its license notice, and that you preserve all their Warranty Disclaimers.

    The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but different contents, make the title of each such section unique by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number. Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined work.

    In the combination, you must combine any sections Entitled “History” in the various original documents, forming one section Entitled “History”; likewise combine any sections Entitled “Acknowledgements”, and any sections Entitled “Dedications”. You must delete all sections Entitled “Endorsements.”

  7. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS

    You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other documents released under this License, and replace the individual copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects.

    You may extract a single document from such a collection, and distribute it individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow this License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document.

  8. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS

    A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other separate and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is called an “aggregate” if the copyright resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the legal rights of the compilation's users beyond what the individual works permit. When the Document is included in an aggregate, this License does not apply to the other works in the aggregate which are not themselves derivative works of the Document.

    If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one half of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be placed on covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate, or the electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic form. Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket the whole aggregate.

  9. TRANSLATION

    Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section 4. Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special permission from their copyright holders, but you may include translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a translation of this License, and all the license notices in the Document, and any Warranty Disclaimers, provided that you also include the original English version of this License and the original versions of those notices and disclaimers. In case of a disagreement between the translation and the original version of this License or a notice or disclaimer, the original version will prevail.

    If a section in the Document is Entitled “Acknowledgements”, “Dedications”, or “History”, the requirement (section 4) to Preserve its Title (section 1) will typically require changing the actual title.

  10. TERMINATION

    You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document except as expressly provided for under this License. Any other attempt to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.

  11. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE

    The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. See http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/.

    Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number. If the Document specifies that a particular numbered version of this License “or any later version” applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that specified version or of any later version that has been published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the Document does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents

To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of the License in the document and put the following copyright and license notices just after the title page:

 
  Copyright (C)  year  your name.
  Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
  under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.2
  or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
  with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover
  Texts.  A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU
  Free Documentation License''.

If you have Invariant Sections, Front-Cover Texts and Back-Cover Texts, replace the “with...Texts.” line with this:

 
    with the Invariant Sections being list their titles, with
    the Front-Cover Texts being list, and with the Back-Cover Texts
    being list.

If you have Invariant Sections without Cover Texts, or some other combination of the three, merge those two alternatives to suit the situation.

If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free software license, such as the GNU General Public License, to permit their use in free software.


[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

Index programme

Aller à:   A   E   G   M   N   R   X  
Entrée d'index Section

A
autopoint13.6.3 Invocation du programme autopoint

E
envsubst15.5.2.5 Invocation du programme envsubst

G
gettext15.5.2 sh - Shell Script
gettext15.5.2.3 Invocation du programme gettext
gettextize13.3 Invcation du programme gettextize

M
msgattrib9.8 Invocation du programme msgattrib
msgcat9.1 Invocation du programme msgcat
msgcmp9.7 Invocation du programme msgcmp
msgcomm9.6 Invocation du programme msgcomm
msgconv9.2 Invocation du programme msgconv
msgen9.9 Invocation du programme msgen
msgexec9.10 Invocation du programme msgexec
msgfilter9.4 Invocation du programme msgfilter
msgfmt10.1 Invocation du programme msgfmt
msggrep9.3 Invocation du programme msggrep
msginit6.1 Invocation du programme msginit
msgmerge7.1 Invocation du promgramme msgmerge
msgunfmt10.2 Invocation du programme msgunfmt
msguniq9.5 Invocation du programme msguniq

N
ngettext15.5.2 sh - Shell Script
ngettext15.5.2.4 Invocation du programme ngettext

R
recode-sr-latin9.4.5 Built-in filters

X
xgettext5.1 Invocation le programme msginit

Aller à:   A   E   G   M   N   R   X  

[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

Index options

Aller à:   -
Entrée d'index Section

-
-<, msgcat option9.1.3 Message selection
-<, msgcomm option9.6.3 Message selection
->, msgcat option9.1.3 Message selection
->, msgcomm option9.6.3 Message selection
-a, msgfmt option10.1.9 Output details
-a, xgettext option5.1.6 Options spécifiques sur les languages
--add-comments, xgettext option5.1.5 Operation mode
--add-location, msgattrib option9.8.6 Output details
--add-location, msgcat option9.1.5 Output details
--add-location, msgcomm option9.6.5 Output details
--add-location, msgconv option9.2.5 Output details
--add-location, msgen option9.9.4 Output details
--add-location, msgfilter option9.4.7 Output details
--add-location, msggrep option9.3.5 Output details
--add-location, msgmerge option7.1.7 Output details
--add-location, msguniq option9.5.5 Output details
--add-location, xgettext option5.1.7 Output details
--alignment, msgfmt option10.1.9 Output details
--backup, msgmerge option7.1.4 Output file location in update mode
--boost, xgettext option5.1.6 Options spécifiques sur les languages
--c++, xgettext option5.1.3 Choix du language d'entrée
-C, msgfmt option10.1.8 Input file interpretation
-c, msgfmt option10.1.8 Input file interpretation
-C, msggrep option9.3.3 Message selection
-C, msgmerge option7.1.1 Input file location
-C, xgettext option5.1.3 Choix du language d'entrée
-c, xgettext option5.1.5 Operation mode
--check, msgfmt option10.1.8 Input file interpretation
--check-accelerators, msgfmt option10.1.8 Input file interpretation
--check-compatibility, msgfmt option10.1.8 Input file interpretation
--check-domain, msgfmt option10.1.8 Input file interpretation
--check-format, msgfmt option10.1.8 Input file interpretation
--check-header, msgfmt option10.1.8 Input file interpretation
--clear-fuzzy, msgattrib option9.8.4 Attribute manipulation
--clear-obsolete, msgattrib option9.8.4 Attribute manipulation
--clear-previous, msgattrib option9.8.4 Attribute manipulation
--color, msgcat option9.1.5 Output details
--color, msgcat option9.11.1 The --color option
--comment, msggrep option9.3.3 Message selection
--compendium, msgmerge option7.1.1 Input file location
--copyright-holder, xgettext option5.1.7 Output details
--csharp, msgfmt option10.1.2 Operation mode
--csharp, msgunfmt option10.2.1 Operation mode
--csharp-resources, msgfmt option10.1.2 Operation mode
--csharp-resources, msgunfmt option10.2.1 Operation mode
-d, autopoint option13.6.3.1 Options
-d, gettext option15.5.2.3 Invocation du programme gettext
-d, gettextize option13.3 Invcation du programme gettextize
-D, msgattrib option9.8.1 Input file location
-D, msgcat option9.1.1 Input file location
-D, msgcmp option9.7.1 Input file location
-D, msgcomm option9.6.1 Input file location
-D, msgconv option9.2.1 Input file location
-D, msgen option9.9.1 Input file location
-D, msgexec option9.10.1 Input file location
-D, msgfilter option9.4.1 Input file location
-d, msgfmt option10.1.4 Output file location in Java mode
-D, msgfmt option10.1.1 Input file location
-d, msgfmt option10.1.5 Output file location in C# mode
-d, msgfmt option10.1.6 Output file location in Tcl mode
-D, msggrep option9.3.1 Input file location
-D, msgmerge option7.1.1 Input file location
-d, msgunfmt option10.2.4 Input file location in C# mode
-d, msgunfmt option10.2.5 Input file location in Tcl mode
-d, msguniq option9.5.3 Message selection
-D, msguniq option9.5.1 Input file location
-d, ngettext option15.5.2.4 Invocation du programme ngettext
-D, xgettext option5.1.1 Input file location
-d, xgettext option5.1.2 Output file location
--debug, xgettext option5.1.6 Options spécifiques sur les languages
--default-domain, xgettext option5.1.2 Output file location
--directory, msgattrib option9.8.1 Input file location
--directory, msgcat option9.1.1 Input file location
--directory, msgcmp option9.7.1 Input file location
--directory, msgcomm option9.6.1 Input file location
--directory, msgconv option9.2.1 Input file location
--directory, msgen option9.9.1 Input file location
--directory, msgexec option9.10.1 Input file location
--directory, msgfilter option9.4.1 Input file location
--directory, msgfmt option10.1.1 Input file location
--directory, msggrep option9.3.1 Input file location
--directory, msgmerge option7.1.1 Input file location
--directory, msguniq option9.5.1 Input file location
--directory, xgettext option5.1.1 Input file location
--domain, gettext option15.5.2.3 Invocation du programme gettext
--domain, msggrep option9.3.3 Message selection
--domain, ngettext option15.5.2.4 Invocation du programme ngettext
--dry-run, autopoint option13.6.3.1 Options
--dry-run, gettextize option13.3 Invcation du programme gettextize
-E, gettext option15.5.2.3 Invocation du programme gettext
-e, gettext option15.5.2.3 Invocation du programme gettext
-e, msgfilter option9.4.4 Useful filter-options when the filter is ‘sed
-e, msggrep option9.3.3 Message selection
-E, msggrep option9.3.3 Message selection
-e, ngettext option15.5.2.4 Invocation du programme ngettext
-E, ngettext option15.5.2.4 Invocation du programme ngettext
--exclude-file, xgettext option5.1.5 Operation mode
--expression, msgfilter option9.4.4 Useful filter-options when the filter is ‘sed
--extended-regexp, msggrep option9.3.3 Message selection
--extract-all, xgettext option5.1.6 Options spécifiques sur les languages
--extracted-comment, msggrep option9.3.3 Message selection
-f, autopoint option13.6.3.1 Options
-f, gettextize option13.3 Invcation du programme gettextize
-F, msgattrib option9.8.6 Output details
-F, msgcat option9.1.5 Output details
-f, msgcat option9.1.1 Input file location
-f, msgcomm option9.6.1 Input file location
-F, msgcomm option9.6.5 Output details
-F, msgconv option9.2.5 Output details
-F, msgen option9.9.4 Output details
-F, msgfilter option9.4.7 Output details
-f, msgfilter option9.4.4 Useful filter-options when the filter is ‘sed
-f, msgfmt option10.1.8 Input file interpretation
-F, msggrep option9.3.3 Message selection
-f, msggrep option9.3.3 Message selection
-F, msgmerge option7.1.7 Output details
-F, msguniq option9.5.5 Output details
-F, xgettext option5.1.7 Output details
-f, xgettext option5.1.1 Input file location
--file, msgfilter option9.4.4 Useful filter-options when the filter is ‘sed
--file, msggrep option9.3.3 Message selection
--files-from, msgcat option9.1.1 Input file location
--files-from, msgcomm option9.6.1 Input file location
--files-from, xgettext option5.1.1 Input file location
--fixed-strings, msggrep option9.3.3 Message selection
--flag, xgettext option5.1.6 Options spécifiques sur les languages
--force, autopoint option13.6.3.1 Options
--force, gettextize option13.3 Invcation du programme gettextize
--force-po, msgattrib option9.8.6 Output details
--force-po, msgcat option9.1.5 Output details
--force-po, msgcomm option9.6.5 Output details
--force-po, msgconv option9.2.5 Output details
--force-po, msgen option9.9.4 Output details
--force-po, msgfilter option9.4.7 Output details
--force-po, msggrep option9.3.5 Output details
--force-po, msgmerge option7.1.7 Output details
--force-po, msgunfmt option10.2.7 Output details
--force-po, msguniq option9.5.5 Output details
--force-po, xgettext option5.1.7 Output details
--foreign-user, xgettext option5.1.7 Output details
--from-code, xgettext option5.1.4 Input file interpretation
--fuzzy, msgattrib option9.8.4 Attribute manipulation
-h, envsubst option15.5.2.5 Invocation du programme envsubst
-h, gettext option15.5.2.3 Invocation du programme gettext
-h, msgattrib option9.8.7 Sortie informative
-h, msgcat option9.1.6 Sortie informative
-h, msgcmp option9.7.4 Sortie informative
-h, msgcomm option9.6.6 Sortie informative
-h, msgconv option9.2.6 Sortie informative
-h, msgen option9.9.5 Sortie informative
-h, msgexec option9.10.3 Sortie informative
-h, msgfilter option9.4.8 Sortie informative
-h, msgfmt option10.1.10 Sortie informative
-h, msggrep option9.3.6 Sortie informative
-h, msginit option6.1.5 Sortie informative
-h, msgmerge option7.1.8 Sortie informative
-h, msgunfmt option10.2.8 Sortie informative
-h, msguniq option9.5.6 Sortie informative
-h, ngettext option15.5.2.4 Invocation du programme ngettext
-h, xgettext option5.1.8 Sortie informative
--help, autopoint option13.6.3.2 Sortie informative
--help, envsubst option15.5.2.5 Invocation du programme envsubst
--help, gettext option15.5.2.3 Invocation du programme gettext
--help, gettextize option13.3 Invcation du programme gettextize
--help, msgattrib option9.8.7 Sortie informative
--help, msgcat option9.1.6 Sortie informative
--help, msgcmp option9.7.4 Sortie informative
--help, msgcomm option9.6.6 Sortie informative
--help, msgconv option9.2.6 Sortie informative
--help, msgen option9.9.5 Sortie informative
--help, msgexec option9.10.3 Sortie informative
--help, msgfilter option9.4.8 Sortie informative
--help, msgfmt option10.1.10 Sortie informative
--help, msggrep option9.3.6 Sortie informative
--help, msginit option6.1.5 Sortie informative
--help, msgmerge option7.1.8 Sortie informative
--help, msgunfmt option10.2.8 Sortie informative
--help, msguniq option9.5.6 Sortie informative
--help, ngettext option15.5.2.4 Invocation du programme ngettext
--help, xgettext option5.1.8 Sortie informative
-i, msgattrib option9.8.6 Output details
-i, msgcat option9.1.5 Output details
-i, msgcomm option9.6.5 Output details
-i, msgconv option9.2.5 Output details
-i, msgen option9.9.4 Output details
-i, msgexec option9.10.1 Input file location
-i, msgfilter option9.4.1 Input file location
-i, msggrep option9.3.3 Message selection
-i, msginit option6.1.1 Input file location
-i, msgmerge option7.1.7 Output details
-i, msgunfmt option10.2.7 Output details
-i, msguniq option9.5.5 Output details
-i, xgettext option5.1.7 Output details
--ignore-case, msggrep option9.3.3 Message selection
--ignore-file, msgattrib option9.8.4 Attribute manipulation
--indent, msgattrib option9.8.6 Output details
--indent, msgcat option9.1.5 Output details
--indent, msgcomm option9.6.5 Output details
--indent, msgconv option9.2.5 Output details
--indent, msgen option9.9.4 Output details
--indent, msgfilter option9.4.7 Output details
--indent, msggrep option9.3.5 Output details
--indent, msgmerge option7.1.7 Output details
--indent, msgunfmt option10.2.7 Output details
--indent, msguniq option9.5.5 Output details
--indent, xgettext option5.1.7 Output details
--input, msgexec option9.10.1 Input file location
--input, msgfilter option9.4.1 Input file location
--input, msginit option6.1.1 Input file location
--intl, gettextize option13.3 Invcation du programme gettextize
--invert-match, msggrep option9.3.3 Message selection
-j, msgfmt option10.1.2 Operation mode
-J, msggrep option9.3.3 Message selection
-j, msgunfmt option10.2.1 Operation mode
-j, xgettext option5.1.5 Operation mode
--java, msgfmt option10.1.2 Operation mode
--java, msgunfmt option10.2.1 Operation mode
--java2, msgfmt option10.1.2 Operation mode
--join-existing, xgettext option5.1.5 Operation mode
-K, msggrep option9.3.3 Message selection
-k, xgettext option5.1.6 Options spécifiques sur les languages
--kde, xgettext option5.1.6 Options spécifiques sur les languages
--keep-header, msgfilter option9.4.7 Output details
--keyword, xgettext option5.1.6 Options spécifiques sur les languages
-l, msgfmt option10.1.4 Output file location in Java mode
-l, msgfmt option10.1.5 Output file location in C# mode
-l, msgfmt option10.1.6 Output file location in Tcl mode
-l, msginit option6.1.4 Output details
-l, msgunfmt option10.2.3 Input file location in Java mode
-l, msgunfmt option10.2.4 Input file location in C# mode
-l, msgunfmt option10.2.5 Input file location in Tcl mode
-L, xgettext option5.1.3 Choix du language d'entrée
--language, xgettext option5.1.3 Choix du language d'entrée
--less-than, msgcat option9.1.3 Message selection
--less-than, msgcomm option9.6.3 Message selection
--locale, msgfmt option10.1.4 Output file location in Java mode
--locale, msgfmt option10.1.5 Output file location in C# mode
--locale, msgfmt option10.1.6 Output file location in Tcl mode
--locale, msginit option6.1.4 Output details
--locale, msgunfmt option10.2.3 Input file location in Java mode
--locale, msgunfmt option10.2.4 Input file location in C# mode
--locale, msgunfmt option10.2.5 Input file location in Tcl mode
--location, msggrep option9.3.3 Message selection
-m, msgcmp option9.7.2 Operation modifiers
-M, msggrep option9.3.3 Message selection
-m, msgmerge option7.1.5 Operation modifiers
-m, xgettext option5.1.7 Output details
-M, xgettext option5.1.7 Output details
--more-than, msgcat option9.1.3 Message selection
--more-than, msgcomm option9.6.3 Message selection
--msgctxt, msggrep option9.3.3 Message selection
--msgid, msggrep option9.3.3 Message selection
--msgid-bugs-address, xgettext option5.1.7 Output details
--msgstr, msggrep option9.3.3 Message selection
--msgstr-prefix, xgettext option5.1.7 Output details
--msgstr-suffix, xgettext option5.1.7 Output details
--multi-domain, msgcmp option9.7.2 Operation modifiers
--multi-domain, msgmerge option7.1.5 Operation modifiers
-n, gettext option15.5.2.3 Invocation du programme gettext
-n, msgattrib option9.8.6 Output details
-n, msgcat option9.1.5 Output details
-n, msgcomm option9.6.5 Output details
-n, msgfilter option9.4.4 Useful filter-options when the filter is ‘sed
-N, msggrep option9.3.3 Message selection
-N, msgmerge option7.1.5 Operation modifiers
-n, msguniq option9.5.5 Output details
-n, xgettext option5.1.7 Output details
--no-changelog, gettextize option13.3 Invcation du programme gettextize
--no-fuzzy, msgattrib option9.8.3 Message selection
--no-fuzzy-matching, msgmerge option7.1.5 Operation modifiers
--no-hash, msgfmt option10.1.9 Output details
--no-location, msgattrib option9.8.6 Output details
--no-location, msgcat option9.1.5 Output details
--no-location, msgcomm option9.6.5 Output details
--no-location, msgconv option9.2.5 Output details
--no-location, msgen option9.9.4 Output details
--no-location, msgfilter option9.4.7 Output details
--no-location, msggrep option9.3.5 Output details
--no-location, msgmerge option7.1.7 Output details
--no-location, msguniq option9.5.5 Output details
--no-location, xgettext option5.1.7 Output details
--no-obsolete, msgattrib option9.8.3 Message selection
--no-translator, msginit option6.1.4 Output details
--no-wrap, msgattrib option9.8.6 Output details
--no-wrap, msgcat option9.1.5 Output details
--no-wrap, msgcomm option9.6.5 Output details
--no-wrap, msgconv option9.2.5 Output details
--no-wrap, msgen option9.9.4 Output details
--no-wrap, msgfilter option9.4.7 Output details
--no-wrap, msggrep option9.3.5 Output details
--no-wrap, msginit option6.1.4 Output details
--no-wrap, msgmerge option7.1.7 Output details
--no-wrap, msgunfmt option10.2.7 Output details
--no-wrap, msguniq option9.5.5 Output details
--no-wrap, xgettext option5.1.7 Output details
-o, msgattrib option9.8.2 Output file location
-o, msgcat option9.1.2 Output file location
-o, msgcomm option9.6.2 Output file location
-o, msgconv option9.2.2 Output file location
-o, msgen option9.9.2 Output file location
-o, msgfilter option9.4.2 Output file location
-o, msgfmt option10.1.3 Output file location
-o, msggrep option9.3.2 Output file location
-o, msginit option6.1.2 Output file location
-o, msgmerge option7.1.3 Output file location
-o, msgunfmt option10.2.6 Output file location
-o, msguniq option9.5.2 Output file location
-o, xgettext option5.1.2 Output file location
--obsolete, msgattrib option9.8.4 Attribute manipulation
--omit-header, msgcomm option9.6.5 Output details
--omit-header, xgettext option5.1.7 Output details
--only-file, msgattrib option9.8.4 Attribute manipulation
--only-fuzzy, msgattrib option9.8.3 Message selection
--only-obsolete, msgattrib option9.8.3 Message selection
--output, xgettext option5.1.2 Output file location
--output-dir, xgettext option5.1.2 Output file location
--output-file, msgattrib option9.8.2 Output file location
--output-file, msgcat option9.1.2 Output file location
--output-file, msgcomm option9.6.2 Output file location
--output-file, msgconv option9.2.2 Output file location
--output-file, msgen option9.9.2 Output file location
--output-file, msgfilter option9.4.2 Output file location
--output-file, msgfmt option10.1.3 Output file location
--output-file, msggrep option9.3.2 Output file location
--output-file, msginit option6.1.2 Output file location
--output-file, msgmerge option7.1.3 Output file location
--output-file, msgunfmt option10.2.6 Output file location
--output-file, msguniq option9.5.2 Output file location
-p, msgattrib option9.8.6 Output details
-P, msgattrib option9.8.5 Input file syntax
-P, msgcat option9.1.4 Input file syntax
-p, msgcat option9.1.5 Output details
-P, msgcmp option9.7.3 Input file syntax
-P, msgcomm option9.6.4 Input file syntax
-p, msgcomm option9.6.5 Output details
-P, msgconv option9.2.4 Input file syntax
-p, msgconv option9.2.5 Output details
-p, msgen option9.9.4 Output details
-P, msgen option9.9.3 Input file syntax
-P, msgexec option9.10.2 Input file syntax
-P, msgfilter option9.4.6 Input file syntax
-p, msgfilter option9.4.7 Output details
-P, msgfmt option10.1.7 Input file syntax
-p, msggrep option9.3.5 Output details
-P, msggrep option9.3.4 Input file syntax
-P, msginit option6.1.3 Input file syntax
-p, msginit option6.1.4 Output details
-p, msgmerge option7.1.7 Output details
-P, msgmerge option7.1.6 Input file syntax
-p, msgunfmt option10.2.7 Output details
-P, msguniq option9.5.4 Input file syntax
-p, msguniq option9.5.5 Output details
-p, xgettext option5.1.2 Output file location
--package-name, xgettext option5.1.7 Output details
--package-version, xgettext option5.1.7 Output details
--po-dir, gettextize option13.3 Invcation du programme gettextize
--previous, msgmerge option7.1.5 Operation modifiers
--properties-input, msgattrib option9.8.5 Input file syntax
--properties-input, msgcat option9.1.4 Input file syntax
--properties-input, msgcmp option9.7.3 Input file syntax
--properties-input, msgcomm option9.6.4 Input file syntax
--properties-input, msgconv option9.2.4 Input file syntax
--properties-input, msgen option9.9.3 Input file syntax
--properties-input, msgexec option9.10.2 Input file syntax
--properties-input, msgfilter option9.4.6 Input file syntax
--properties-input, msgfmt option10.1.7 Input file syntax
--properties-input, msggrep option9.3.4 Input file syntax
--properties-input, msginit option6.1.3 Input file syntax
--properties-input, msgmerge option7.1.6 Input file syntax
--properties-input, msguniq option9.5.4 Input file syntax
--properties-output, msgattrib option9.8.6 Output details
--properties-output, msgcat option9.1.5 Output details
--properties-output, msgcomm option9.6.5 Output details
--properties-output, msgconv option9.2.5 Output details
--properties-output, msgen option9.9.4 Output details
--properties-output, msgfilter option9.4.7 Output details
--properties-output, msggrep option9.3.5 Output details
--properties-output, msginit option6.1.4 Output details
--properties-output, msgmerge option7.1.7 Output details
--properties-output, msgunfmt option10.2.7 Output details
--properties-output, msguniq option9.5.5 Output details
--properties-output, xgettext option5.1.7 Output details
-q, msgmerge option7.1.8 Sortie informative
--qt, msgfmt option10.1.2 Operation mode
--qt, xgettext option5.1.6 Options spécifiques sur les languages
--quiet, msgfilter option9.4.4 Useful filter-options when the filter is ‘sed
--quiet, msgmerge option7.1.8 Sortie informative
-r, msgfmt option10.1.4 Output file location in Java mode
-r, msgfmt option10.1.5 Output file location in C# mode
-r, msgunfmt option10.2.3 Input file location in Java mode
-r, msgunfmt option10.2.4 Input file location in C# mode
--regexp=, msggrep option9.3.3 Message selection
--repeated, msguniq option9.5.3 Message selection
--resource, msgfmt option10.1.4 Output file location in Java mode
--resource, msgfmt option10.1.5 Output file location in C# mode
--resource, msgunfmt option10.2.3 Input file location in Java mode
--resource, msgunfmt option10.2.4 Input file location in C# mode
-s, msgattrib option9.8.6 Output details
-s, msgcat option9.1.5 Output details
-s, msgcomm option9.6.5 Output details
-s, msgconv option9.2.5 Output details
-s, msgen option9.9.4 Output details
-s, msgfilter option9.4.7 Output details
-s, msgmerge option7.1.7 Output details
-s, msgunfmt option10.2.7 Output details
-s, msguniq option9.5.5 Output details
-s, xgettext option5.1.7 Output details
--set-fuzzy, msgattrib option9.8.4 Attribute manipulation
--set-obsolete, msgattrib option9.8.4 Attribute manipulation
--silent, msgfilter option9.4.4 Useful filter-options when the filter is ‘sed
--silent, msgmerge option7.1.8 Sortie informative
--sort-by-file, msgattrib option9.8.6 Output details
--sort-by-file, msgcat option9.1.5 Output details
--sort-by-file, msgcomm option9.6.5 Output details
--sort-by-file, msgconv option9.2.5 Output details
--sort-by-file, msgen option9.9.4 Output details
--sort-by-file, msgfilter option9.4.7 Output details
--sort-by-file, msggrep option9.3.5 Output details
--sort-by-file, msgmerge option7.1.7 Output details
--sort-by-file, msguniq option9.5.5 Output details
--sort-by-file, xgettext option5.1.7 Output details
--sort-output, msgattrib option9.8.6 Output details
--sort-output, msgcat option9.1.5 Output details
--sort-output, msgcomm option9.6.5 Output details
--sort-output, msgconv option9.2.5 Output details
--sort-output, msgen option9.9.4 Output details
--sort-output, msgfilter option9.4.7 Output details
--sort-output, msggrep option9.3.5 Output details
--sort-output, msgmerge option7.1.7 Output details
--sort-output, msgunfmt option10.2.7 Output details
--sort-output, msguniq option9.5.5 Output details
--sort-output, xgettext option5.1.7 Output details
--statistics, msgfmt option10.1.10 Sortie informative
--strict, msgattrib option9.8.6 Output details
--strict, msgcat option9.1.5 Output details
--strict, msgcomm option9.6.5 Output details
--strict, msgconv option9.2.5 Output details
--strict, msgen option9.9.4 Output details
--strict, msgfilter option9.4.7 Output details
--strict, msgfmt option10.1.3 Output file location
--strict, msggrep option9.3.5 Output details
--strict, msgmerge option7.1.7 Output details
--strict, msgunfmt option10.2.7 Output details
--strict, msguniq option9.5.5 Output details
--strict, xgettext option5.1.7 Output details
--stringtable-input, msgattrib option9.8.5 Input file syntax
--stringtable-input, msgcat option9.1.4 Input file syntax
--stringtable-input, msgcmp option9.7.3 Input file syntax
--stringtable-input, msgcomm option9.6.4 Input file syntax
--stringtable-input, msgen option9.9.3 Input file syntax
--stringtable-input, msgexec option9.10.2 Input file syntax
--stringtable-input, msgfilter option9.4.6 Input file syntax
--stringtable-input, msgfmt option10.1.7 Input file syntax
--stringtable-input, msggrep option9.3.4 Input file syntax
--stringtable-input, msginit option6.1.3 Input file syntax
--stringtable-input, msgmerge option7.1.6 Input file syntax
--stringtable-input, msgonv option9.2.4 Input file syntax
--stringtable-input, msguniq option9.5.4 Input file syntax
--stringtable-output, msgattrib option9.8.6 Output details
--stringtable-output, msgcat option9.1.5 Output details
--stringtable-output, msgcomm option9.6.5 Output details
--stringtable-output, msgconv option9.2.5 Output details
--stringtable-output, msgen option9.9.4 Output details
--stringtable-output, msgfilter option9.4.7 Output details
--stringtable-output, msggrep option9.3.5 Output details
--stringtable-output, msginit option6.1.4 Output details
--stringtable-output, msgmerge option7.1.7 Output details
--stringtable-output, msgunfmt option10.2.7 Output details
--stringtable-output, msguniq option9.5.5 Output details
--stringtable-output, xgettext option5.1.7 Output details
--style, msgcat option9.1.5 Output details
--style, msgcat option9.11.3 L'option --style
--suffix, msgmerge option7.1.4 Output file location in update mode
--symlink, gettextize option13.3 Invcation du programme gettextize
-t, msgcat option9.1.5 Output details
-t, msgconv option9.2.3 Conversion target
-T, msggrep option9.3.3 Message selection
-t, msguniq option9.5.5 Output details
-T, xgettext option5.1.6 Options spécifiques sur les languages
--tcl, msgfmt option10.1.2 Operation mode
--tcl, msgunfmt option10.2.1 Operation mode
--to-code, msgcat option9.1.5 Output details
--to-code, msgconv option9.2.3 Conversion target
--to-code, msguniq option9.5.5 Output details
--translated, msgattrib option9.8.3 Message selection
--trigraphs, xgettext option5.1.6 Options spécifiques sur les languages
-u, msgcat option9.1.3 Message selection
-u, msgcomm option9.6.3 Message selection
-U, msgmerge option7.1.2 Operation mode
-u, msguniq option9.5.3 Message selection
--unique, msgcat option9.1.3 Message selection
--unique, msgcomm option9.6.3 Message selection
--unique, msguniq option9.5.3 Message selection
--untranslated, msgattrib option9.8.3 Message selection
--update, msgmerge option7.1.2 Operation mode
--use-first, msgcat option9.1.5 Output details
--use-first, msguniq option9.5.5 Output details
--use-fuzzy, msgcmp option9.7.2 Operation modifiers
--use-fuzzy, msgfmt option10.1.8 Input file interpretation
--use-untranslated, msgcmp option9.7.2 Operation modifiers
-v, envsubst option15.5.2.5 Invocation du programme envsubst
-V, envsubst option15.5.2.5 Invocation du programme envsubst
-V, gettext option15.5.2.3 Invocation du programme gettext
-V, msgattrib option9.8.7 Sortie informative
-V, msgcat option9.1.6 Sortie informative
-V, msgcmp option9.7.4 Sortie informative
-V, msgcomm option9.6.6 Sortie informative
-V, msgconv option9.2.6 Sortie informative
-V, msgen option9.9.5 Sortie informative
-V, msgexec option9.10.3 Sortie informative
-V, msgfilter option9.4.8 Sortie informative
-V, msgfmt option10.1.10 Sortie informative
-v, msgfmt option10.1.10 Sortie informative
-v, msggrep option9.3.3 Message selection
-V, msggrep option9.3.6 Sortie informative
-V, msginit option6.1.5 Sortie informative
-V, msgmerge option7.1.8 Sortie informative
-v, msgmerge option7.1.8 Sortie informative
-V, msgunfmt option10.2.8 Sortie informative
-v, msgunfmt option10.2.8 Sortie informative
-V, msguniq option9.5.6 Sortie informative
-V, ngettext option15.5.2.4 Invocation du programme ngettext
-V, xgettext option5.1.8 Sortie informative
--variables, envsubst option15.5.2.5 Invocation du programme envsubst
--verbose, msgfmt option10.1.10 Sortie informative
--verbose, msgmerge option7.1.8 Sortie informative
--verbose, msgunfmt option10.2.8 Sortie informative
--version, autopoint option13.6.3.2 Sortie informative
--version, envsubst option15.5.2.5 Invocation du programme envsubst
--version, gettext option15.5.2.3 Invocation du programme gettext
--version, gettextize option13.3 Invcation du programme gettextize
--version, msgattrib option9.8.7 Sortie informative
--version, msgcat option9.1.6 Sortie informative
--version, msgcmp option9.7.4 Sortie informative
--version, msgcomm option9.6.6 Sortie informative
--version, msgconv option9.2.6 Sortie informative
--version, msgen option9.9.5 Sortie informative
--version, msgexec option9.10.3 Sortie informative
--version, msgfilter option9.4.8 Sortie informative
--version, msgfmt option10.1.10 Sortie informative
--version, msggrep option9.3.6 Sortie informative
--version, msginit option6.1.5 Sortie informative
--version, msgmerge option7.1.8 Sortie informative
--version, msgunfmt option10.2.8 Sortie informative
--version, msguniq option9.5.6 Sortie informative
--version, ngettext option15.5.2.4 Invocation du programme ngettext
--version, xgettext option5.1.8 Sortie informative
-w, msgattrib option9.8.6 Output details
-w, msgcat option9.1.5 Output details
-w, msgcomm option9.6.5 Output details
-w, msgconv option9.2.5 Output details
-w, msgen option9.9.4 Output details
-w, msgfilter option9.4.7 Output details
-w, msggrep option9.3.5 Output details
-w, msginit option6.1.4 Output details
-w, msgmerge option7.1.7 Output details
-w, msgunfmt option10.2.7 Output details
-w, msguniq option9.5.5 Output details
-w, xgettext option5.1.7 Output details
--width, msgattrib option9.8.6 Output details
--width, msgcat option9.1.5 Output details
--width, msgcomm option9.6.5 Output details
--width, msgconv option9.2.5 Output details
--width, msgen option9.9.4 Output details
--width, msgfilter option9.4.7 Output details
--width, msggrep option9.3.5 Output details
--width, msginit option6.1.4 Output details
--width, msgmerge option7.1.7 Output details
--width, msgunfmt option10.2.7 Output details
--width, msguniq option9.5.5 Output details
--width, xgettext option5.1.7 Output details
-X, msggrep option9.3.3 Message selection
-x, xgettext option5.1.5 Operation mode

Aller à:   -

[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

Index variables

Aller à:   G   L   M   P   T  
Entrée d'index Section

G
GETTEXT_LOG_UNTRANSLATED, environment variable12.6 Prioritizing messages: How to determine which messages to translate first

L
LANG, variable d'environement2.3.2 Variables d'envrionnement pour la localisation
LANG, variable d'environement11.5 Être un passionné de gettext
LANGUAGE, environment variable2.3.2 Variables d'envrionnement pour la localisation
LANGUAGE, environment variable11.5 Être un passionné de gettext
LANGUAGE, environment variable13.4.4 Étendre ‘Makefile’ dans ‘po/
LC_ALL, variable d'environement2.3.2 Variables d'envrionnement pour la localisation
LC_ALL, variable d'environement11.5 Être un passionné de gettext
LC_COLLATE, variable d'environement2.3.2 Variables d'envrionnement pour la localisation
LC_COLLATE, variable d'environement11.5 Être un passionné de gettext
LC_CTYPE, variable d'environement2.3.2 Variables d'envrionnement pour la localisation
LC_CTYPE, variable d'environement11.5 Être un passionné de gettext
LC_MESSAGES, variable d'environement2.3.2 Variables d'envrionnement pour la localisation
LC_MESSAGES, variable d'environement11.5 Être un passionné de gettext
LC_MONETARY, variable d'environement2.3.2 Variables d'envrionnement pour la localisation
LC_MONETARY, variable d'environement11.5 Être un passionné de gettext
LC_NUMERIC, variable d'environement2.3.2 Variables d'envrionnement pour la localisation
LC_NUMERIC, variable d'environement11.5 Être un passionné de gettext
LC_TIME, variable d'environement2.3.2 Variables d'envrionnement pour la localisation
LC_TIME, variable d'environement11.5 Être un passionné de gettext
LINGUAS, environment variable14. Le point de vue des installateurs et des distributeurs

M
MSGEXEC_LOCATION, environment variable9.10 Invocation du programme msgexec
MSGEXEC_MSGCTXT, environment variable9.10 Invocation du programme msgexec
MSGEXEC_MSGID, environment variable9.10 Invocation du programme msgexec

P
PO_STYLE, environment variable9.11.3 L'option --style

T
TERM, environment variable9.11.2 La variable d'environnement TERM
TEXTDOMAIN, environment variable15.5.2 sh - Shell Script
TEXTDOMAINDIR, environment variable15.5.2 sh - Shell Script

Aller à:   G   L   M   P   T  

[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

Index mode PO

Aller à:   #   .   0   <   =   >   ?   _  
A   C   D   E   F   H   I   K   L   M   N   O   P   Q   R   S   T   U   V   W   X   Y   Z  
Entrée d'index Section

#
#, PO Mode command 8.3.10 Modification de commentaires
#, PO Mode command Interactively edit the translator comments8.3.10 Modification de commentaires

.
., PO Mode command 8.3.3 Positionnement de l'entrée
., PO Mode command Redisplay the current entry8.3.3 Positionnement de l'entrée
.emacs’ personalisation 8.3.1 Achever l'installation de GNU gettext

0
0, PO Mode command 8.3.2 Main PO mode Commands
0, PO Mode command Temporary leave the PO file window8.3.2 Main PO mode Commands

<
<, PO Mode command 8.3.3 Positionnement de l'entrée
<, PO Mode command Select the first entry in the PO file8.3.3 Positionnement de l'entrée

=
=, PO Mode command 8.3.2 Main PO mode Commands
=, PO Mode command Give some PO file statistics8.3.2 Main PO mode Commands

>
>, PO Mode command 8.3.3 Positionnement de l'entrée
>, PO Mode command Select the last entry in the PO file8.3.3 Positionnement de l'entrée

?
?, PO Mode command 8.3.2 Main PO mode Commands
?, PO Mode command 8.3.2 Main PO mode Commands

_
_, PO Mode command 8.3.2 Main PO mode Commands
_, PO Mode command Undo last modification to the PO file8.3.2 Main PO mode Commands

A
a, PO Mode command 8.3.13 Consultation des fichiers PO auxiliaires
A, PO Mode command 8.3.13 Consultation des fichiers PO auxiliaires
A, PO Mode command Declare this PO file as an auxiliary file8.3.13 Consultation des fichiers PO auxiliaires
a, PO Mode command Seek auxiliary files for another translation8.3.13 Consultation des fichiers PO auxiliaires
auxiliary PO file An auxiliary PO file is an existing PO file8.3.13 Consultation des fichiers PO auxiliaires

C
C-c C-a, PO Mode command 8.3.11 Details of Sub Edition
C-c C-a, PO Mode command 8.3.13 Consultation des fichiers PO auxiliaires
C-c C-a, PO Mode command Consult auxiliary PO files8.3.11 Details of Sub Edition
C-c C-a, PO Mode command Switch to a particular auxiliary file8.3.13 Consultation des fichiers PO auxiliaires
C-c C-c, PO Mode command
C-c C-c, PO Mode command Complete edition8.3.11 Details of Sub Edition
C-c C-k, PO Mode command 8.3.11 Details of Sub Edition
C-c C-k, PO Mode command Abort edition8.3.11 Details of Sub Edition
C-j, PO Mode command
C-j, PO Mode command
commands After setting up Emacs with something similar to the lines8.3.2 Main PO mode Commands
comment out PO file entry
consulting program sources 8.3.12 Contexte des fichiers sources en C
consulting translations to other languages8.3.13 Consultation des fichiers PO auxiliaires
current entry of a PO file The cursor in a PO file window is almost8.3.3 Positionnement de l'entrée
cut and paste for translated strings 8.3.9 Modification de traductions

D
DEL, PO Mode command 8.3.6 Entrées floues
DEL, PO Mode command 8.3.8 Entrées obsolètes
DEL, PO Mode command Make an active entry obsolete, or zap out8.3.8 Entrées obsolètes

E
editing comments8.3.10 Modification de commentaires
editing multiple entries When a translation (or a comment) is being8.3.11 Details of Sub Edition
editing translations8.3.9 Modification de traductions
etags, utilisé pour baliser les chaînes, Le jeu de4.5 Marquage des chaînes à traduire
exiting PO subedit 8.3.11 Details of Sub Edition

F
find source fragment for a PO file entry The following commands are8.3.12 Contexte des fichiers sources en C

H
h, PO Mode command
h, PO Mode command Show help

I
installer le mode PO

K
k, PO Mode
K, PO Mode command 8.3.10 Modification de commentaires
k, PO Mode command 8.3.7 Entrées non traduites
k, PO Mode command Save the translation on the kill ring, and8.3.9 Modification de traductions
K, PO Mode command Save the translator comments on the kill8.3.10 Modification de commentaires
k, PO Mode command Turn the current entry into an untranslated8.3.7 Entrées non traduites

L
LFD, PO Mode command 8.3.9 Modification de traductions
LFD, PO Mode command 8.3.9 Modification de traductions
looking at the source to aid

M
m, PO Mode command 8.3.3 Positionnement de l'entrée
m, PO Mode command Record the location of the current entry for8.3.3 Positionnement de l'entrée
M-,, commande mode PO Marque la dernière chaîne trouvée avec4.5 Marquage des chaînes à traduire
M-., commande mode PO Marque la dernière chaîne trouvée avec un4.5 Marquage des chaînes à traduire
M-A, PO Mode command 8.3.13 Consultation des fichiers PO auxiliaires
M-A, PO Mode command Remove this PO file from the list of8.3.13 Consultation des fichiers PO auxiliaires
M-S, PO Mode command 8.3.12 Contexte des fichiers sources en C
M-s, PO Mode command 8.3.12 Contexte des fichiers sources en C
M-S, PO Mode command Delete a directory from the search path8.3.12 Contexte des fichiers sources en C
M-s, PO Mode command Display of a program source context8.3.12 Contexte des fichiers sources en C
moving by fuzzy entries Also, the translator may decide herself to8.3.6 Entrées floues
moving by obsolete entries Moreover, some commands are more8.3.8 Entrées obsolètes
moving by translated entries Some commands are more specifically8.3.5 Entrées traduites
moving by untranslated entries The work of the translator might be8.3.7 Entrées non traduites
moving through a PO file Some PO mode commands alter the position8.3.3 Positionnement de l'entrée

N
n, PO Mode command 8.3.3 Positionnement de l'entrée
n, PO Mode command Select the entry after the current one8.3.3 Positionnement de l'entrée
next-error, stepping through PO file validation results The8.3.2 Main PO mode Commands
normalize, PO Mode command However, PO files initially created8.3.13 Consultation des fichiers PO auxiliaires

O
O, PO Mode command 8.3.8 Entrées obsolètes
o, PO Mode command 8.3.8 Entrées obsolètes
o, PO Mode command Find the next obsolete entry8.3.8 Entrées obsolètes
O, PO Mode command Find the previous obsolete entry8.3.8 Entrées obsolètes
obsolete active entry 8.3.8 Entrées obsolètes

P
p, PO Mode command 8.3.3 Positionnement de l'entrée
p, PO Mode command Select the entry before the current one8.3.3 Positionnement de l'entrée
pending subedits Pending subedits may be completed or aborted in8.3.11 Details of Sub Edition
po-auto-edit-with-msgid, PO Mode variable It is possible to8.3.9 Modification de traductions
po-auto-fuzzy-on-edit, PO Mode variable Translated entries8.3.5 Entrées traduites
po-auto-select-on-unfuzzy, PO Mode variable The command8.3.6 Entrées floues
po-confirm-and-quit, PO Mode8.3.2 Main PO mode Commands
po-consider-as-auxiliary, PO
po-consider-source-path, PO Mode
po-current-entry, PO Mode
po-cycle-auxiliary, PO Mode
po-cycle-source-reference, PO
po-edit-comment, PO Mode
po-edit-msgstr, PO Mode
po-exchange-location, PO Mode
po-fade-out-entry, PO Mode
po-fade-out-entry, PO Mode
po-first-entry, PO Mode command
po-kill-comment, PO Mode
po-kill-msgstr, PO Mode command
po-kill-msgstr, PO Mode command 8.3.9 Modification de traductions
po-kill-ring-save-msgstr, PO Mode command The command8.3.9 Modification de traductions
po-last-entry, PO Mode command
po-mark-translatable, Mode de commande PO4.5 Marquage des chaînes à traduire
po-next-entry, PO Mode command
po-next-fuzzy-entry, PO Mode
po-next-obsolete-entry, PO Mode
po-next-translated-entry, PO
po-next-untranslated-entry, PO
po-normalize, PO Mode command Tidy the whole PO file by making8.3.4 Normalisation des chaînes de caractères en entrée
po-other-window, PO Mode
po-pop-location, PO
po-previous-entry, PO Mode
po-push-location, PO Mode
po-select-auxiliary, PO
po-select-mark-and-mark, Mode de commande PO4.5 Marquage des chaînes à traduire
po-statistics, PO Mode command
po-subedit-abort, PO Mode
po-subedit-mode-hook, PO Mode variable Functions found on8.3.10 Modification de commentaires
po-tags-search, commande mode PO La commande ,4.5 Marquage des chaînes à traduire
po-undo, PO Mode command The
po-unfuzzy, PO Mode command
po-validate, PO Mode command
po-yank-comment, PO Mode command The command K8.3.10 Modification de commentaires
po-yank-msgstr, PO Mode command
pour les chaînes à traduire4.5 Marquage des chaînes à traduire

Q
Q, PO Mode command 8.3.2 Main PO mode Commands
q, PO Mode command
Q, PO Mode command Quit processing and save the PO file8.3.2 Main PO mode Commands
q, PO Mode command Quit processing, possibly after confirmation8.3.2 Main PO mode Commands

R
r, PO Mode command 8.3.3 Positionnement de l'entrée
r, PO Mode command Return to a previously saved entry location8.3.3 Positionnement de l'entrée
RET, PO Mode command 8.3.9 Modification de traductions
RET, PO Mode command Interactively edit the translation8.3.9 Modification de traductions

S
s, PO Mode command 8.3.12 Contexte des fichiers sources en C
S, PO Mode command 8.3.12 Contexte des fichiers sources en C
S, PO Mode command Add a directory to the search path for8.3.12 Contexte des fichiers sources en C
s, PO Mode command Resume the display of a program source8.3.12 Contexte des fichiers sources en C
starting a string translation In fact, whether it is best to start8.3.9 Modification de traductions
string normalization in entries8.3.4 Normalisation des chaînes de caractères en entrée
subedit minor mode8.3.11 Details of Sub Edition

T
T, PO Mode command 8.3.5 Entrées traduites
t, PO Mode command 8.3.5 Entrées traduites
t, PO Mode command Find the next translated entry8.3.5 Entrées traduites
T, PO Mode command Find the previous translated entry8.3.5 Entrées traduites
TAB, PO Mode command 8.3.6 Entrées floues
TAB, PO Mode command Remove the fuzzy attribute of the current8.3.6 Entrées floues
TAGS’, et le balisage des chaînes à traduire Pour les4.5 Marquage des chaînes à traduire

U
u, PO Mode command 8.3.7 Entrées non traduites
U, PO Mode command 8.3.7 Entrées non traduites
u, PO Mode command Find the next untranslated entry8.3.7 Entrées non traduites
U, PO Mode command Find the previous untranslated entry8.3.7 Entrées non traduites
use the source, Luke8.3.12 Contexte des fichiers sources en C
using obsolete translations to make new entries To better8.3.9 Modification de traductions
using translation compendia8.4 Utiliser un compendia de traduction

V
V, PO Mode command 8.3.2 Main PO mode Commands
V, PO Mode command Batch validate the format of the whole PO8.3.2 Main PO mode Commands

W
w, PO Mode
W, PO Mode command 8.3.10 Modification de commentaires
w, PO Mode command Save the translation on the kill ring,8.3.9 Modification de traductions
W, PO Mode command Save the translator comments on the kill8.3.10 Modification de commentaires

X
x, PO Mode command 8.3.3 Positionnement de l'entrée
x, PO Mode command Exchange the current entry location with the8.3.3 Positionnement de l'entrée

Y
Y, PO Mode8.3.10 Modification de commentaires
y, PO Mode command 8.3.9 Modification de traductions
y, PO Mode command Replace the translation, taking the new from8.3.9 Modification de traductions
Y, PO Mode command Replace the translator comments, taking the8.3.10 Modification de commentaires

Z
Z, PO Mode command 8.3.6 Entrées floues
z, PO Mode command 8.3.6 Entrées floues
z, PO Mode command Find the next fuzzy entry8.3.6 Entrées floues
Z, PO Mode command Find the previous fuzzy entry8.3.6 Entrées floues

Aller à:   #   .   0   <   =   >   ?   _  
A   C   D   E   F   H   I   K   L   M   N   O   P   Q   R   S   T   U   V   W   X   Y   Z  

[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

Index macros autoconf

Aller à:   A  
Entrée d'index Section

A
AM_GNU_GETTEXT The AM_GNU_GETTEXT macro tests for the13.5.1 AM_GNU_GETTEXT dans ‘gettext.m4
AM_GNU_GETTEXT_INTL_SUBDIR The AM_GNU_GETTEXT_INTL_SUBDIR13.5.4 AM_GNU_GETTEXT_INTL_SUBDIR dans ‘intldir.m4
AM_GNU_GETTEXT_NEED The AM_GNU_GETTEXT_NEED macro declares a13.5.3 AM_GNU_GETTEXT_NEED dans ‘gettext.m4
AM_GNU_GETTEXT_VERSION The AM_GNU_GETTEXT_VERSION macro13.5.2 AM_GNU_GETTEXT_VERSION dans ‘gettext.m4
AM_ICONV The AM_ICONV macro tests for the presence of the13.5.7 AM_ICONV dans ‘iconv.m4
AM_PO_SUBDIRS The AM_PO_SUBDIRS macro prepares the13.5.5 AM_PO_SUBDIRS dans ‘po.m4
AM_XGETTEXT_OPTION The AM_XGETTEXT_OPTION macro registers a13.5.6 AM_XGETTEXT_OPTION in ‘po.m4

Aller à:   A  

[ < ] [ > ]   [ << ] [Plus haut] [ >> ]         [Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

Index général

Aller à:   _   Ã  
A   B   C   D   E   F   G   H   I   J   K   L   M   N   O   P   Q   R   S   T   U   V   W   X   Y  
Entrée d'index Section

_
_, une macro pour baliser les chaînes à traduire4.4 Comment les marquages apparaissent dans les fichiers source
_nl_msg_cat_cntr11.5 Être un passionné de gettext

Ã
Éditeur de fichier PO de GNOME8.2 Éditeur de fichier PO sous GNOME
Éditeur de fichier PO de KDE8.1 Éditeur de fichier PO sous KDE
évolution des progiciels1.5 Vue générale de la suite d'utilitaires GNU gettext

A
acconfig.h’ file13.4.9 ‘acconfig.h’ au niveau sommet
accumulating translations8.4.1.1 Concatenate PO Files
aclocal.m4’ file13.4.8 ‘aclocal.m4’ au niveau sommet
adding keywords, xgettext5.1.6 Options spécifiques sur les languages
adresse de rapport de bogues1. Introduction
ambiguïtés4.3 Préparation des chaînes à traduire
apply a filter to translations9.4 Invocation du programme msgfilter
apply command to all translations in a catalog9.10 Invocation du programme msgexec
Arabic digits15.3.1 Format des chaînes en C
Aspects de la traduction1.3 Les aspects du Support des Langues Nationales
attribute manipulation9.8 Invocation du programme msgattrib
attribute, fuzzy8.3.6 Entrées floues
attributes of a PO file entry8.3.6 Entrées floues
attributes, manipulating9. La manipulatin d'un fichier PO
autoconf macros for gettext13.5 les macros autoconf pour utiliser dans ‘configure.ac
auxiliary PO file8.3.13 Consultation des fichiers PO auxiliaires
awk15.5.13 GNU awk
awk-format marque3. Le format des fichiers PO.

B
backup old file, and msgmerge program7.1.4 Output file location in update mode
balisage des chaînes requérant une traduction4.4 Comment les marquages apparaissent dans les fichiers source
balises4.3 Préparation des chaînes à traduire
bash15.5.3 bash - Bourne-Again Shell Script
bibliography16.2 Lectures connexes
bind_textdomain_codeset11.2.4 How to specify the output character set gettext uses
Boost format strings5.1.6 Options spécifiques sur les languages
boost-format marque3. Le format des fichiers PO.

C
C and C-like languages15.5.1 C, C++, Objective C
C trigraphs5.1.6 Options spécifiques sur les languages
C#15.5.12 C#
C# mode, and msgfmt program10.1.2 Operation mode
C# mode, and msgunfmt program10.2.1 Operation mode
C# resources mode, and msgfmt program10.1.2 Operation mode
C# resources mode, and msgunfmt program10.2.1 Operation mode
C#, concaténation de chaîne4.3 Préparation des chaînes à traduire
c-format marque3. Le format des fichiers PO.
c-format, et xgettext4.6 Les commentaires spéciaux précédants les mots-clés
caractères de contrôle4.3 Préparation des chaînes à traduire
caractères de quotation utilisés dans les fichies PO6.2 Remplissage de l'en-tête
catalog encoding and msgexec output9.10 Invocation du programme msgexec
catclose, a catgets function11.1.1 The Interface
catgets, a catgets function11.1.1 The Interface
catgets, X/Open specification11.1 À propos de catgets
catopen, a catgets function11.1.1 The Interface
catégorie de localisation, LC_MESSAGES1.3 Les aspects du Support des Langues Nationales
catégorie de localisation, LC_MESSAGES4.2 Sollicitation des operations de gettext
catégorie de localisation, LC_MONETARY1.3 Les aspects du Support des Langues Nationales
catégorie de localisation, LC_MONETARY4.2 Sollicitation des operations de gettext
catégorie de localisation, LC_NUMERIC1.3 Les aspects du Support des Langues Nationales
catégorie de localisation, LC_NUMERIC4.2 Sollicitation des operations de gettext
catégorie de localisation, LC_TIME1.3 Les aspects du Support des Langues Nationales
catégorie de localisation, LC_TIME4.2 Sollicitation des operations de gettext
catégorie locale, LC_ALL4.2 Sollicitation des operations de gettext
catégorie locale, LC_COLLATE4.2 Sollicitation des operations de gettext
catégorie locale, LC_RESPONSES4.2 Sollicitation des operations de gettext
character encoding1.3 Les aspects du Support des Langues Nationales
charset conversion at runtime11.2.4 How to specify the output character set gettext uses
check format strings10.1.8 Input file interpretation
checking of translations9. La manipulatin d'un fichier PO
clisp15.5.5 Gnu clisp - Comon Lisp
clisp C sources15.5.6 sources GNU cliso C
codeset1.3 Les aspects du Support des Langues Nationales
commantaires de la traductrice3. Le format des fichiers PO.
commentaires automatiques3. Le format des fichiers PO.
commentaires dans les fichiers PO3. Le format des fichiers PO.
commentaires extraits3. Le format des fichiers PO.
Comon Lisp15.5.5 Gnu clisp - Comon Lisp
compare PO files9.7 Invocation du programme msgcmp
comparison of interfaces11.3 Comparing the Two Interfaces
compatibility with X/Open msgfmt10.1.8 Input file interpretation
compendium8.4 Utiliser un compendia de traduction
compendium, creating8.4.1 Création d'un compendia
concatenate PO files9.1 Invocation du programme msgcat
concatenating PO files into a compendium8.4.1.1 Concatenate PO Files
concaténation de chaînes4.3 Préparation des chaînes à traduire
concaténation de chaînes4.3 Préparation des chaînes à traduire
config.h.in’ file13.4.10 ‘config.h.in’ au niveau sommet
context11.2.5 Using contexts for solving ambiguities
context, argument specification in xgettext5.1.6 Options spécifiques sur les languages
context, in MO files10.3 Le format des fichiers GNU MO
contexte dans les fichiers PO3. Le format des fichiers PO.
convert binary message catalog into PO file10.2 Invocation du programme msgunfmt
convert translations to a different encoding9.2 Invocation du programme msgconv
converting a package to use gettext13.2 Travail pré-requis
country codesB. Codes d'identification des pays
create new PO file6.1 Invocation du programme msginit
creating compendia8.4.1 Création d'un compendia
Création d'un nouveau fichier PO6. La création d'un nouveau fichier PO.
csharp-format marque3. Le format des fichiers PO.

D
dcngettext11.2.6 Additional functions for plural forms
dcpgettext11.2.5 Using contexts for solving ambiguities
dcpgettext_expr11.2.5 Using contexts for solving ambiguities
debugging messages marked as format strings5.1.6 Options spécifiques sur les languages
dialect9. La manipulatin d'un fichier PO
disabling NLS13.4.13 ‘gettext.h’ dans ‘lib/
distribution tarball13.7 Créer un fichier de distribution tarball
dngettext11.2.6 Additional functions for plural forms
dollar substitution15.5.2.5 Invocation du programme envsubst
domain ambiguities11.2.2 Solving Ambiguities
dpgettext11.2.5 Using contexts for solving ambiguities
dpgettext_expr11.2.5 Using contexts for solving ambiguities
duplicate elimination9. La manipulatin d'un fichier PO
duplicate removal9.5 Invocation du programme msguniq

E
editing comments in PO files8.3.10 Modification de commentaires
editing translations8.3.9 Modification de traductions
elisp-format marque3. Le format des fichiers PO.
Elle, lui et eux1. Introduction
Emacs Lisp15.5.7 Emacs Lisp
encodage pour votre langue6.2 Remplissage de l'en-tête
encoder les fichiers PO6.2 Remplissage de l'en-tête
encoding1.3 Les aspects du Support des Langues Nationales
encoding conversion9. La manipulatin d'un fichier PO
encoding conversion at runtime11.2.4 How to specify the output character set gettext uses
entrée d'en-tête d'un fichier PO6.2 Remplissage de l'en-tête
environment variables15.5.2.5 Invocation du programme envsubst
envsubst program, usage15.5.2.5 Invocation du programme envsubst
eval_gettext function, usage15.5.2.6 Invocation de la fonction eval_gettext
eval_ngettext function, usage15.5.2.7 Invocation de la fonction eval_ngettext
extracting parts of a PO file into a compendium8.4.1.2 Extract a Message Subset from a PO File

F
FDL, GNU Free Documentation LicenseC.3 Licence Documentation Libre GNU
Fichier ‘ABOUT-NLS2.4 Installing Translations for Particular Programs
fichier PO de référence1.5 Vue générale de la suite d'utilitaires GNU gettext
fichier, ‘.po’ et ‘.mo1.4 Les fichiers transmettant les traductions
fichiers, ‘.pot1.5 Vue générale de la suite d'utilitaires GNU gettext
file format, ‘.mo10.3 Le format des fichiers GNU MO
filter messages according to attributes9.8 Invocation du programme msgattrib
find common messages9.6 Invocation du programme msgcomm
force use of fuzzy entries10.1.8 Input file interpretation
format de fichier ‘.po3. Le format des fichiers PO.
format des dates1.3 Les aspects du Support des Langues Nationales
Format des fichiers PO3. Le format des fichiers PO.
format des nombres1.3 Les aspects du Support des Langues Nationales
format strings4.6 Les commentaires spéciaux précédants les mots-clés
formes au pluriel dans les fichiers PO3. Le format des fichiers PO.
Free Pascal15.5.14 Pascal - le compilateur libre Pascal
function attribute, __format__5.1.6 Options spécifiques sur les languages
function attribute, __format_arg__5.1.6 Options spécifiques sur les languages
fuzzy entries8.3.6 Entrées floues
fuzzy marque Cette marque peut être générée par le programme3. Le format des fichiers PO.

G
gawk15.5.13 GNU awk
gcc-internal-format marque3. Le format des fichiers PO.
generate binary message catalog from PO file10.1 Invocation du programme msgfmt
generate translation catalog in English9.9 Invocation du programme msgen
gettext files13.4 Les fichiers que vous devez modifier ou créer
gettext interface11.2.1 The Interface
gettext program, usage15.5.2.3 Invocation du programme gettext
gettext vs catgets11.3 Comparing the Two Interfaces
gettext, a programmer's view11.2 À propos de gettext
gettext.h’ file13.4.13 ‘gettext.h’ dans ‘lib/
GPL, GNU General Public LicenseC.1 GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
GUI programs11.2.5 Using contexts for solving ambiguities
guile15.5.9 Gnu guile - Scheme

H
hash table, inside MO files10.3 Le format des fichiers GNU MO
history of GNU gettext16.1 Historique de GNU gettext

I
i18n1.2 I18n, L10n et autres
importing PO files8.3.4 Normalisation des chaînes de caractères en entrée
include file ‘libintl.h1.5 Vue générale de la suite d'utilitaires GNU gettext
include file ‘libintl.h4.1 Importation de la déclarations de gettext
include file ‘libintl.h11.3 Comparing the Two Interfaces
include file ‘libintl.h13.4.13 ‘gettext.h’ dans ‘lib/
initialisation4.2 Sollicitation des operations de gettext
initialize new PO file6.1 Invocation du programme msginit
initialize translations from a compendium8.4.2.1 Initialize a New Translation File
installation de gettext8.3.1 Achever l'installation de GNU gettext
installer gettext8.3.1 Achever l'installation de GNU gettext
interface to catgets11.1.1 The Interface
internationalisation1.2 I18n, L10n et autres
inttypes.h4.3 Préparation des chaînes à traduire
ISO 3166B. Codes d'identification des pays
ISO 639A. Codes d'identification des langues

J
Java15.5.11 Java
Java mode, and msgfmt program10.1.2 Operation mode
Java mode, and msgunfmt program10.2.1 Operation mode
Java, concaténation de chaîne4.3 Préparation des chaînes à traduire
java-format marque3. Le format des fichiers PO.
jeu de caractères des fichiers PO6.2 Remplissage de l'en-tête

K
KDE format strings5.1.6 Options spécifiques sur les languages
kde-format marque3. Le format des fichiers PO.
keyboard accelerator checking10.1.8 Input file interpretation

L
L'édition d'un fichier PO8. L'édition d'un fichier PO
l10n1.2 I18n, L10n et autres
Langages supportés, xgettext5.1.3 Choix du language d'entrée
language codesA. Codes d'identification des langues
language selection at runtime11.5 Être un passionné de gettext
large package11.2.2 Solving Ambiguities
le fichier PO modèle5. La fabrication du fichier modèle PO.
Le grand tableau1.5 Vue générale de la suite d'utilitaires GNU gettext
Le marquage des initialisateurs de chaînes.4.7 Cas spéciaux de chaînes à traduire
le programme xmodmap et l'entrée des marques de quotation6.2 Remplissage de l'en-tête
Les catégories de localisation.1.3 Les aspects du Support des Langues Nationales
Les catégories de localisation.1.3 Les aspects du Support des Langues Nationales
Les liste d'équipes de traduction, où les trouver6.2 Remplissage de l'en-tête
LGPL, GNU Lesser General Public LicenseC.2 GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
libiconv library13.5.7 AM_ICONV dans ‘iconv.m4
libintl for C#15.5.12 C#
libintl for Java15.5.11 Java
libintl library13.5.1 AM_GNU_GETTEXT dans ‘gettext.m4
librep Lisp15.5.8 librep
librep-format marque3. Le format des fichiers PO.
License, GNU FDLC.3 Licence Documentation Libre GNU
License, GNU GPLC.1 GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
License, GNU LGPLC.2 GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
LicensesC. Licenses
Liez avec ‘libintl1.5 Vue générale de la suite d'utilitaires GNU gettext
LINGUAS’ file13.4.2 ‘LINGUAS’ dans ‘po/
Linux1.3 Les aspects du Support des Langues Nationales
Linux1.5 Vue générale de la suite d'utilitaires GNU gettext
Linux6.2 Remplissage de l'en-tête
Lisp15.5.5 Gnu clisp - Comon Lisp
lisp-format marque3. Le format des fichiers PO.
list d'encodage6.2 Remplissage de l'en-tête
locale category, LC_CTYPE1.3 Les aspects du Support des Langues Nationales
locale category, LC_CTYPE4.2 Sollicitation des operations de gettext
locale category, LC_CTYPE4.2 Sollicitation des operations de gettext
localisation1.2 I18n, L10n et autres
lookup message translation15.5.2.3 Invocation du programme gettext
lookup message translation15.5.2.6 Invocation de la fonction eval_gettext
lookup plural message translation15.5.2.4 Invocation du programme ngettext
lookup plural message translation15.5.2.7 Invocation de la fonction eval_ngettext
Lui, elle et eux1. Introduction

M
magic signature of MO files10.3 Le format des fichiers GNU MO
Makefile.in.in’ extensions13.4.4 Étendre ‘Makefile’ dans ‘po/
Makevars’ file13.4.3 ‘Makevars’ dans ‘po/
manipulating PO files9. La manipulatin d'un fichier PO
marking Perl sources15.5.18 Perl
marquagage des chaînes à traduire1.5 Vue générale de la suite d'utilitaires GNU gettext
marquage des chaînes, préparations4.3 Préparation des chaînes à traduire
marques de quotation6.2 Remplissage de l'en-tête
marques de quotation13.4.4 Étendre ‘Makefile’ dans ‘po/
Matrice de traduction2.4 Installing Translations for Particular Programs
menu entries11.2.5 Using contexts for solving ambiguities
menu, keyboard accelerator support10.1.8 Input file interpretation
merge PO files9.1 Invocation du programme msgcat
merging two PO files9. La manipulatin d'un fichier PO
message catalog files location11.2.3 Locating Message Catalog Files
messages1.3 Les aspects du Support des Langues Nationales
migration from earlier versions of gettext13.2 Travail pré-requis
mkinstalldirs’ file13.4.7 ‘mkinstalldirs’ au niveau sommet
mnemonics of menu entries10.1.8 Input file interpretation
MO file's format10.3 Le format des fichiers GNU MO
Mode PO d'Emacs8.3 Éditeur Emacs pour les fichiers PO
modify message attributes9.8.4 Attribute manipulation
msgattrib program, usage9.8 Invocation du programme msgattrib
msgcat program, usage9.1 Invocation du programme msgcat
msgcmp program, usage9.7 Invocation du programme msgcmp
msgcomm program, usage9.6 Invocation du programme msgcomm
msgconv program, usage9.2 Invocation du programme msgconv
msgctxt3. Le format des fichiers PO.
msgen program, usage9.9 Invocation du programme msgen
msgexec program, usage9.10 Invocation du programme msgexec
msgfilter filter and catalog encoding9.4.3 The filter
msgfilter program, usage9.4 Invocation du programme msgfilter
msgfmt program, usage10.1 Invocation du programme msgfmt
msggrep program, usage9.3 Invocation du programme msggrep
msgid 3. Le format des fichiers PO.
msgid_plural3. Le format des fichiers PO.
msginit program, usage6.1 Invocation du programme msginit
msgmerge program, usage7.1 Invocation du promgramme msgmerge
msgstr après un espace blanc ou des commentaires,
msgunfmt program, usage10.2 Invocation du programme msgunfmt
msguniq program, usage9.5 Invocation du programme msguniq
multi-line strings8.3.4 Normalisation des chaînes de caractères en entrée

N
N_, a convenience macro11.3 Comparing the Two Interfaces
Native Language Support1.2 I18n, L10n et autres
ngettext11.2.6 Additional functions for plural forms
ngettext program, usage15.5.2.4 Invocation du programme ngettext
no-awk-format marque3. Le format des fichiers PO.
no-boost-format marque3. Le format des fichiers PO.
no-c-format marque Ces marques ne devraient pas être ajoutées3. Le format des fichiers PO.
no-c-format, et xgettext4.6 Les commentaires spéciaux précédants les mots-clés
no-csharp-format marque3. Le format des fichiers PO.
no-elisp-format marque3. Le format des fichiers PO.
no-gcc-internal-format marque3. Le format des fichiers PO.
no-java-format marque3. Le format des fichiers PO.
no-kde-format marque3. Le format des fichiers PO.
no-librep-format flag3. Le format des fichiers PO.
no-lisp-format marque De façon identique pour Lisp, voir3. Le format des fichiers PO.
no-objc-format flag3. Le format des fichiers PO.
no-object-pascal-format marque3. Le format des fichiers PO.
no-perl-brace-format marque3. Le format des fichiers PO.
no-perl-format marque3. Le format des fichiers PO.
no-php-format marque3. Le format des fichiers PO.
no-python-format marque3. Le format des fichiers PO.
no-qt-format marque3. Le format des fichiers PO.
no-scheme-format marque3. Le format des fichiers PO.
no-sh-format marque De façon identique pour le Shell, voir3. Le format des fichiers PO.
no-smalltalk-format flag3. Le format des fichiers PO.
no-tcl-format marque3. Le format des fichiers PO.
no-ycp-format marque3. Le format des fichiers PO.
nouvelles lignes dans le fichiers PO3. Le format des fichiers PO.
nplurals, in a PO file header 11.2.6 Additional functions for plural forms

O
objc-format marque3. Le format des fichiers PO.
Object Pascal15.5.14 Pascal - le compilateur libre Pascal
object-pascal-format marque3. Le format des fichiers PO.
obsolete entries8.3.8 Entrées obsolètes
optimization of gettext functions11.2.7 Optimisation des fonctions *gettext
option d'aide4.3 Préparation des chaînes à traduire
orthography9. La manipulatin d'un fichier PO
outdigits15.3.1 Format des chaînes en C

P
package and version declaration in ‘configure.ac13.4.5 ‘configure.ac’ au niveau sommet
package build and installation options14. Le point de vue des installateurs et des distributeurs
package distributor's view of gettext14. Le point de vue des installateurs et des distributeurs
package installer's view of gettext14. Le point de vue des installateurs et des distributeurs
package maintainer's view of gettext13. Le point de vue des mainteneurs du programme
paragraphes4.3 Préparation des chaînes à traduire
Pascal15.5.14 Pascal - le compilateur libre Pascal
Perl15.5.18 Perl
Perl default keywords15.5.18.2 Which keywords will xgettext look for?
Perl invalid string interpolation15.5.18.5 Invalid Uses Of String Interpolation
Perl long lines15.5.18.8 Comment couper les lignes longues
Perl parentheses15.5.18.7 Quand utiliser des parenthèses
Perl pitfalls15.5.18.9 Bugs, Pitfalls, And Things That Do Not Work
Perl quote-like expressions15.5.18.4 Quelles sont les chaînes et les expressions comme les guillemets ?
Perl special keywords for hash-lookups15.5.18.3 Comment extraire les clés de hachage
Perl valid string interpolation15.5.18.6 Valid Uses Of String Interpolation
perl-brace-format marque3. Le format des fichiers PO.
perl-format marque3. Le format des fichiers PO.
pgettext11.2.5 Using contexts for solving ambiguities
pgettext_expr11.2.5 Using contexts for solving ambiguities
PHP15.5.19 Pré-processeur hyper-texte PHP
php-format marque3. Le format des fichiers PO.
phrases4.3 Préparation des chaînes à traduire
Pike15.5.20 Pike
plural form formulas11.2.6 Additional functions for plural forms
plural forms11.2.6 Additional functions for plural forms
plural forms, in MO files10.3 Le format des fichiers GNU MO
plural, in a PO file
PO mode (Emacs) commands8.3.2 Main PO mode Commands
po_file_domains9.12 Écriture de vos propres programmes qui traitent des fichiers PO
po_file_free9.12 Écriture de vos propres programmes qui traitent des fichiers PO
po_file_read9.12 Écriture de vos propres programmes qui traitent des fichiers PO
po_message_iterator9.12 Écriture de vos propres programmes qui traitent des fichiers PO
po_message_iterator_free9.12 Écriture de vos propres programmes qui traitent des fichiers PO
po_message_msgid9.12 Écriture de vos propres programmes qui traitent des fichiers PO
po_message_msgid_plural9.12 Écriture de vos propres programmes qui traitent des fichiers PO
po_message_msgstr9.12 Écriture de vos propres programmes qui traitent des fichiers PO
po_message_msgstr_plural9.12 Écriture de vos propres programmes qui traitent des fichiers PO
po_next_message9.12 Écriture de vos propres programmes qui traitent des fichiers PO
portability problems with sed9.4.3 The filter
POTFILES.in’ file13.4.1 ‘POTFILES.in’ dans ‘po/
preparing programs for translation4. La préparation des fichiers source d'un programme.
preparing shell scripts for translation15.5.2.1 Préparation des scripts Shell pour l'internationalisation
problems with catgets interface11.1.2 Problems with the catgets Interface?!
programme autopoint, utilisation13.6.3 Invocation du programme autopoint
programme de localisation6.2 Remplissage de l'en-tête
programme gettextize, usage13.3 Invcation du programme gettextize
programming languages15.1 Le point de vue de l'implémentaire d'une langue
Projet de traduction1.1 L'objectif de la suite d'utilitaire GNU gettext
Python15.5.4 Python
python-format marque3. Le format des fichiers PO.

Q
Qt format strings5.1.6 Options spécifiques sur les languages
Qt mode, and msgfmt program10.1.2 Operation mode
qt-format marque3. Le format des fichiers PO.

R
recode-sr-latin program9.4.5 Built-in filters
related reading16.2 Lectures connexes
release13.7 Créer un fichier de distribution tarball
Régler gettext pendant l'exécution2.3.2 Variables d'envrionnement pour la localisation

S
Scheme15.5.9 Gnu guile - Scheme
scheme-format marque3. Le format des fichiers PO.
scripting languages15.1 Le point de vue de l'implémentaire d'une langue
search messages in a catalog9.3 Invocation du programme msggrep
setting up gettext at build time14. Le point de vue des installateurs et des distributeurs
several domains11.2.2 Solving Ambiguities
sexe1. Introduction
sh-format marque3. Le format des fichiers PO.
shell format string15.5.2.5 Invocation du programme envsubst
shell scripts15.5.2 sh - Shell Script
SLN1.2 I18n, L10n et autres
Smalltalk15.5.10 GNU Smalltalk
smalltalk-format marque3. Le format des fichiers PO.
Sortie vers stdout, xgettext5.1.2 Output file location
sorting msgcat output9.1.5 Output details
sorting msgmerge output7.1.7 Output details
sorting msgunfmt output10.2.7 Output details
sorting output of xgettext5.1.7 Output details
source GCC15.5.21 Collection de sources du compilateur GNU
specifying plural form in a PO file11.2.6 Additional functions for plural forms
standard output, and msgcat9.1.2 Output file location
standard output, and msgmerge program7.1.3 Output file location
string normalization in entries8.3.4 Normalisation des chaînes de caractères en entrée
style4.3 Préparation des chaînes à traduire
Support des Langues Nationales1.2 I18n, L10n et autres
symbole monétaire1.3 Les aspects du Support des Langues Nationales
Sélection de la langue2.3.2 Variables d'envrionnement pour la localisation
Sélection de la langue des messages2.3.2 Variables d'envrionnement pour la localisation

T
Tcl15.5.17 Language de script Tcl - Tk
Tcl mode, and msgfmt program10.1.2 Operation mode
Tcl mode, and msgunfmt program10.2.1 Operation mode
tcl-format marque3. Le format des fichiers PO.
TCR15.6.2 Table des Chaînes Ressource
testing ‘.po’ files for equivalence5.1.7 Output details
Tk's scripting language15.5.17 Language de script Tcl - Tk
traductions disponibles2.4 Installing Translations for Particular Programs
translated entries8.3.5 Entrées traduites
translating menu entries11.2.5 Using contexts for solving ambiguities
turning off NLS support13.4.13 ‘gettext.h’ dans ‘lib/
tutoriel pour apprendre à utiliser gettext1.5 Vue générale de la suite d'utilitaires GNU gettext

U
unify duplicate translations9.5 Invocation du programme msguniq
untranslated entries8.3.7 Entrées non traduites
update translations from a compendium8.4.2.2 Update an Existing Translation File
upgrading to new versions of gettext13.2 Travail pré-requis

V
version control for backup files, msgmerge7.1.4 Output file location in update mode
vue d'ensemble de gettext1.5 Vue générale de la suite d'utilitaires GNU gettext

W
wxWidgets library15.5.15 bibliothèque de wxWidgets

X
xargs, and output from msgexec9.10 Invocation du programme msgexec
xgettext program, usage5.1 Invocation le programme msginit

Y
YaST2 scripting language15.5.16 YCP - langage de script YaST2
YCP15.5.16 YCP - langage de script YaST2
ycp-format marque3. Le format des fichiers PO.

Aller à:   _   Ã  
A   B   C   D   E   F   G   H   I   J   K   L   M   N   O   P   Q   R   S   T   U   V   W   X   Y  

[Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

Notes de bas de page

(1)

Dans ce manuel, toutes les mentions d'Emacs réfèrent aussi bien à GNU Emacs qu'à XEmacs, que les gens appèlent parfois respectivement FSF Emacs et Lucid Emacs.

(2)

Cette limitation n'est pas imposée par GNU gettext, mais c'est pour la compatibilité avec l'implémentation de msgfmt sur Solaris.

(3)

Some system, e.g. mingw, don't have LC_MESSAGES. Here we use a more or less arbitrary value for it, namely 1729, the smallest positive integer which can be represented in two different ways as the sum of two cubes.

(4)

When the system does not support setlocale its behavior in setting the locale values is simulated by looking at the environment variables.

(5)

Additions are welcome. Send appropriate information to bug-gnu-gettext@gnu.org and bug-glibc-manual@gnu.org.


[Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

Table des matières


[Top] [Table des matières] [Index] [ ? ]

A propos de ce document

Ce document a été généré par Mathieu le 11 Mai 2009 en utilisant texi2html 1.78.

Les boutons de navigation ont la signification suivante :

Bouton Nom Aller à Depuis 1.2.3 aller à
[ < ] Retour Section précédente dans l'ordre de lecture 1.2.2
[ > ] Avant Section suivante dans l'ordre de lecture 1.2.4
[ << ] RetourRapide Début de ce chapitre ou chapitre précédent 1
[Plus haut] Monter Section supérieure 1.2
[ >> ] AvanceRapide Chapitre suivant 2
[Top] Top Couverture (top) du document  
[Table des matières] Table des matières Table des matières  
[Index] Index Index  
[ ? ] A propos A propos (page d'aide)  

Dans cet exemple on est à Sous section un-deux-trois dans un document dont la structure est :


Ce document a été généré par Mathieu le 11 Mai 2009 en utilisant texi2html 1.78.